Home

Coral IPx Office Installation and Hardware Reference Manual

1. USB cable ___ On Off i LAN cable WAN cable m NTU Office card WiFi antenna WiFi card cables Coral IPx Office Installation Manual System Networking 11 11 S ta 3 E n E E D z 5 n E E D S E z 3 Replacing the NTU Office Card This section describes how to replace the NTU Office card without replacing the card chassis 1 Unplug the power cord that supplies the Coral IPx Office system Electrical Hazard Contact with live wires could cause shock burn and death Do not open the Coral IPx Office cover before removing power from the system 2 Remove the unit cover See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 3 Disconnect all cables connected to the NTU Office card including the two line harnesses the USB harness the power harness the reset switch harness and the WiFi cables if installed 4 Unfasten the three M3 screws and washers and safeguard them for future reassembly 5 Replace the NTU Office card 6 Fasten the three M3 screws and washers 7 Reconnect all cables to the NTU Office card including the two RJ 45 cables the USB cable the power harness and the reset button harness 8 If a WiFi card is installed skip to Installing the WiFi Card page 11 13 9 Close the unit cover See Closing the Unit Cover page 6 10 10 Reconnect the power cable 11 12
2. Total 032 Time Slots Sheli SlovCkt Type Dial No SITE Needed 1 1 1 7 112 DTD 2 2 1 7 113 3 3 1 7 114 4 4 1 7 115 DTD 5 5 1 7 116 6 6 1 7 117 7 7 1 7 118 8 8 1 7 119 9 9 1 7 120 10 10 11 11 1 7 122 DTD 12 12 1 7 123 DTD 13 13 14 14 1 7 125 DTD 15 15 1 7 126 16 16 17 17 1 7 128 18 18 1 7 129 19 19 1 7 130 20 20 1 7 131 21 21 1 7 132 DTD 22 22 1 7 133 DTD 23 23 1 7 134 C 24 24 1 7 135 DTD 25 25 1 7 136 DTD 26 26 1 7 137 9 32 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 27 27 7 138 DTD 28 28 7 139 DTD 29 29 7 140 DTD 30 30 7 141 DTD 31 31 7 142 DTD 32 32 7 143 DTD The ports listed above the double line indicate the default range See Table 9 11 on page 9 23 Shared Service Cards 29 33 x lt 5 gt D n D 1 S 2 gt E z N Dd lt 9 34 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 9 Three Way Conferen
3. o o Shared Service Cards 9 93 S RE ES 5 n S D 5 lt S e S nm nm D lt E S A ES S T S D E S lt n D 4 Configuring the Relay Contacts 3 4 J umper to RLY3 The relay contacts 3 4 may be either RLY2 BELL or RLY3 System Alarm or Dial Operated contacts Figure 9 33 displays the jumper settings for the page feature Table 9 26 Relay Contacts 3 4 RLY3 BELL Selection P4 Jumper Setting Figure 9 32 RLY3 Contacts 3 4 Simplified Diagram System Alarm or Dial Operated UNA or Bell Incoming Call Figure 9 33 Relay P4 3 4 4 5 Relay Contacts 3 4 RELAY RLY3 BELL RLY2 Contacts 3 4 RLY3 BELL Selection P4 Jumper Setting 3 4 Function RLY3 RELAY Relay Contacts Relay contacts P4 3 1 ia 2 4 4 RLY3 RELAY lt RLY2 PAGE 5 P4 P6 P5 a N RLY2 BELL 9 94 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual a N 5 Database Programming The major and minor alarm or accessory interface feature requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database p
4. Total Time Slot Shelf Slot Ckt Type Dial No 1 1 1 7 80 iDSP 2 2 1 7 81 iDSP 3 3 1 7 82 iDSP 4 4 1 7 83 iDSP 5 5 1 7 84 iDSP 6 6 1 7 85 iDSP 7 7 1 7 86 iDSP 8 8 1 7 87 iDSP 9 9 1 7 88 iDSP 10 10 1 7 89 iDSP 11 11 1 7 90 iDSP 12 12 1 7 91 iDSP 13 13 1 7 92 iDSP 14 14 1 7 93 iDSP 15 15 1 7 94 iDSP 16 16 1 7 95 iDSP 17 17 1 T 96 iDSP 18 18 1 7 97 iDSP 19 19 1 7 98 iDSP 20 20 1 7 99 iDSP 21 21 1 100 iDSP 22 22 1 7 101 iDSP 23 23 1 7 102 iDSP 24 24 1 7 103 iDSP 25 25 1 7 104 iDSP 9 30 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 26 26 7 105 iDSP 27 27 7 106 iDSP 28 28 7 107 iDSP 29 29 7 108 iDSP 30 30 7 109 5 31 31 7 110 5 32 32 7 111 iDSP The ports listed above the double line indicate the default range See Table 9 11 on page 9 23 Shared Service Cards 29 31 5 x lt 5 gt D gt U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Cards Table 9 18 URC Dial Tone Detector DTD PI Configuration URC Configuration PI Route DTB 11 PI Route PLIS
5. 1 72449277100 5 8 28 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Installing the MRC The MRC card is secured to the MCB Office by a threaded spacer The parts used to attach the spacer to the MCB Office are listed below NOTE E The MRC assembly kit includes additional parts However you only need to use the parts listed below Table 8 3 Assembly Part Quantity Parts Used in MRC Assembly Kit Philips screw M8X6 4 Lock washer M3 Male female spacer hex M3X10 4 Preparing for Installation 1 Locate a desk or table top that will support 20 Ib 9 1 kg If the surface can be damaged by sharp objects place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar material over the top surface Place an anti static sheet over the desk or table top The card s plastic shipping bag will suffice Remove power from the IPx Office system by turning OFF the power switch on the front panel of the PS Office unit Disconnect the power cord or wires from the PS Office unit If necessary disconnect the ground wire from the IPx Office unit If necessary dismount the IPx Office unit from the rack See Dismounting the IPx Office Unit from the Rack page 2 16 Installing the MRC Card Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Open the IPx Office unit See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 Fasten the four hex M3X10 standoff spacers int
6. ii 10 27 Fig re 1 0 UDT Office Gard sau aaa a 10 28 Figure 10 9 4T Office Cardi utile 10 29 Figure 10 10 4T CID Office Card ii 10 30 Figure 10 11 8SFT Office Card 2 ai 10 31 Fig re 10 12 16SFT Office Card ua usu ua iaia aa 10 32 Figure 10 13 24SFT Office ie 10 33 Fig re 10 14 4S OfflCe Card alia e He te en iena Eus 10 34 Figure 10 15 85 Office Card eese ee i 10 35 Figure 10 16 12Sx Office Card Top Side i 10 36 Figure 10 17 12Sx Office Card Rear Side iii 10 37 Figure 10 18 205 Office Gard u uu eate 10 38 Figure 10 19 4S8F 4S16F 8S8F and 8S16F Office 10 39 Figure 10 20 8T Office Cards init aere d edu 10 40 Figure 10 21 8T CID Office Card u u an 10 41 Figure 10 22 IPC Office Card 10 42 Figure 10 23 4CID Office Card iii 10 43 Figure 10 24 8CID Cardi Cm 10 44 Figure 10 25 8Fx Office and 16Fx Office Card nennen 10 45 Figure 11 1 System Operation without an NTU Office Card 11 4 Figure 11 2 System Operation with an NTU Office 11 6 Figure 11 9 NT U Office Gard labii e ener terne ir Fete dea e dis 11 7 Figure 11 4 NTU Offic
7. 9 88 Figure 9 28 UNA Bell Wiring to Mechanical Bell i 9 88 Figure 9 29 RLYS Simplified Diagram i 9 92 Figure 9 30 RLY3 Contacts 1 2 Simplified Diagram sse 9 93 Figure 9 31 Relay Contacts 1 2 RLY3 PAGE Selection P4 Jumper Setting 9 93 Figure 9 32 RLY3 Contacts 3 4 Simplified Diagram seen 9 94 Figure 9 33 Relay Contacts 3 4 RLY3 BELL Selection P4 Jumper Setting 9 94 Figure 9 34 Dial Operated Relay RLY3 Connections 9 97 Figure 9 35 Alarm Relay RLY3 9 97 Figure 9 36 DC Arc Suppression for U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Card Relays 9 100 Figure 9 37 Simplified Relay Diagram i 9 101 Figure 10 1 Coral IPx Office Peripheral Card Slot Location seen 10 6 Figure 10 2 Coral IPx Office Peripheral Card 10 6 Figure 10 3 Digital Trunk Cards Jumper Settings for Synchronization 10 16 Figure 10 4 Office Card Jumper Settings for Synchronization 10 17 Figure 10 5 30T Office Card am neri enero quet eode Edu aG ne gut a 10 25 Figure 10 6 4TBR Office Card i 10 26 Figure 10 7 PRI 30 Office
8. 5 36 Connecting WAN e reiecta cheese ase edente easet bn d a poe baeo duae 5 36 Connecting to the WAN when an NTU Office Card is Supplied 5 36 Connecting to the WAN when an NTU Office Card is not Supplied 5 36 Connecting to a Printer unahan agag q nnne innen 5 37 Connecting to a Printer when an NTU Office Card is 5 37 Connecting to a Printer when an NTU Office Card is not Supplied 5 37 LAN WAN BInOUt aaa 5 38 Chapter 6 Cage Description 6 1 General System Description nennen 6 1 2941214 9 6 1 PED 6 3 Rear Side duri ea i 6 5 Side Panels cal Ri A P ER e a 6 6 TOD MR 6 6 Bottom Panel oiii 6 6 Installation Kits sore 6 6 IB COVO e 6 7 Opening the Unit Covers ee eec 6 8 Closing the Unit 6 10 Unit Interior Front Section
9. Intel 80386EX CPU Clock Rate 32 MHz Memory Addressing 16 MB Data Bus Structure 16 Bit Shared with DBM X IMC8 16 RAM Storage Capacity 2M Bytes with battery backup 90 days typically Memory Device 512kb 4bit SRAM RAM Backup Battery LF1 2W 2430 2430B 3 0 VDC Nom 250 mA H Dimensions Diameter 0 965 in 24 5 mm Width i 0 118 in 3 mm NEDA Equivalent 5011L Baby Cards Up to two one DBM X and one MRC u RS 232E 95 Baud rate 300 bps to 19 200 bps iraniani None Odd Even Number of bits 7 8 Stop Dit 1 S Default 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit VT 100 UGW COM RS 232E 95 5 Baud rate 300 bps to 19 200 bps 5 Number of bits 7 8 Stop Dit 1 Default urine 11500 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 100 2 5 A Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 23 S 5 O S S D 5 9 8 24 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 8 LED Card 1 General In
10. Pin 1 GND Shield N RxB Receive Data from Network ms ew Figure 5 13 30 Office Pinout RJ 45 socket female 1 RxB external view 2 RxA 3 GND shield 4 TxB 111111 5 TxA RJ 45 plug male clip at rear 30T Office Nominal Line Impedance n O D 3 S D 5 5 D lt S D o S K nm E S o D 5 O o o NS P NOTE E For impedance jumpers see Figure 10 5 on on page 10 25 External Connections 5 33 12105 404 suollg ouuoO PAVI 5 34 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual LAN WAN and Printer Connections This section describes how to connect LAN WAN and a printer to the Coral Office unit The Coral IPx Office includes m Eight RJ 45 ports for connection to the LAN m One RJ 45 port for connection to the WAN and m One USB port for connection to a printer Connection to these media vary depending on whether or not the Coral Office unit is supplied with an NTU Office card The NTU Office card acts a router enabling direct connection to the WAN and to a printer If the Coral IPx Office is not supplied with an NTU Office card connections to the WAN and to a printer can be facilitated only after a router has been connected See Chapter 11 System Networking Figure 5 14 Network
11. 6 33 Figure 6 28 IPx Office System PCM Timeslot Distribution i 6 35 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 PS Office AG Front ee det ei ia 7 2 PS Office AC Card Layout i 7 3 PS Office AC Card Rear VieW a 7 3 PS Office AC Block Diagram i 74 IPx Office AC Power Connections a 7 8 PS Office DG Front Panel etu eade bar TREE 7 14 PS Office DO Card Eayout itii In 7 16 DC Power Supply Rear View i 7 16 PS Office DC Block Diagram iii 7 18 Figure 7 10 IPx Office PS Office DC Connection 7 20 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 MCB Office Card i 8 3 MGB Office Gard Layout iii aaa 8 7 Coral IPx Office Voice Switching iii 8 11 Coral system PCM Highway Distribution for Group COntrol 8 12 Software Authorization Unit SAU Detail 8 15 IBO PincAsSignlTIerit ay 8 18 UGW Pin Assignmenti a nani ee elt dd ue ua en he ad 8 19 MCB Office Card Battery Insulator Release iii 8 22 Figur
12. 1 aging System Interface 1 Extern Intern 1 Extern Paging Shared Service Controller RMI F Peripheral Services 1024 PCM time slot Group Controller Call Progress Tone Generators Networking Card Slot 8 4 ESIM Office O m o gt 5 0 Backplane Office 9 0 2 Shared Service Controller URC The number of URC shared service resources are database programmable and can be adjusted as required See the relevant Program Interface Manual for URC defaults maximums and time slot details Fourteen Party Conferences Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 8 11 Common Control Cards S D S 8 Figure 8 4 IPx Office Main Unit system PCM Highway x Office Main Uni Distribution for Group 128 time slots Control AD CN BO uU 128 time slots A1 22 1 UT J 51518183 500 800 500 800 181 Expansion 2nd Expansion Cage 384 time slots 2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 IGC Periph
13. 2 gt A 8 44 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Removing the DBM X 1 Repeat Step 1 through Step 1 on Preparing for Installation page 8 43 2 Remove the M3X6 Phillips screws and washers that secure the DBM X card to the standoff spacers of the MCB Office card and safeguard for future re assembly 3 Place your thumbs on the MCB Office card on either side of the DBM X card near the MCB Office front side Use your fingers to lift the edge of the DBM X card on both sides and gently disengage the multi pin connector P1 on the DBM X from MCB Office connector P13 di 2 Q Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 45 3 Specifications DBM X Memory configuration 524 288 16 bits Memory device 128kb 8 bit SRAM Operating voltage 3 3VDC Nom T gt 2 Q 8 46 gt Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual hapter ee 9 1 Shan 9 2MRC 8 9 3 U RMI U M Office Cards 9 4 Three Way Conference 3 Way o ul 9 5 Multi P arty Conference CONF 9 39 9 6 BEEN 9 45 9 7 Dial Tone Detector 007 CASI 9 49 980 0 057 9 53 9 9MFCReceven 9 57 9 10 VoIP 21000 7 9 59
14. These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual e S 9 Q 9 46 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 4 Database Programming The DTR requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required for the DTR The following parameters must be set to enable the DTR Sizes TAB Route SYSGEN RESOURCES URC Feature Authorization Route FEAT 1 URC DTMF Separate Software Authorization is required to allocate the URC resources Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 3 Feature Authorization for more details URC Configuration Route CDB 11 1 m DTMF Defines the maximum number of DTMF Receiver DTR resources to be enabled by the system URC cards Each DTMF receiver requires one card time slot URC Card Database Route CDB 11 2 m DTMF GAIN The gain may be adjusted in this branch and not in the Feature Control branch as with other cards Card List Route CLIS Card type see Table 9 3 on page 9 7 must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 URC2 in the P TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Port List Route PLIS 0 Port type must show DTR in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 0 23 max for URC2 0 47 max for URC4 See Table 9 13 URC DTR DTMF PI
15. S 8 14 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 8 5 Software Authorization Unit SAU Detail 2 so cz SAU 3 gt es 5 ez 2 N FRONT LEFT SIDE REAR RIGHT SIDE MARKET NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE BAR CODE When starting up the Coral system ensure that there are no SAU fault messages during startup or SAU Alarms PI Branch Root 1 1 15 Controls due to any one of the following three reasons m missing SAU device m Inappropriate SAU software for this type of system m Mismatched SAU serial numbers on the IMC8 and SAU device SAU Unique Serial Numbers Each SAU is assigned a unique factory set system identification serial number which enables the feature authorizations and Coral generic software version for the Coral system Figure 8 5 illustrates the four views of the SAU including sample ID numbers The left side includes the country code while the right side includes the unique serial number The last digit of the serial number is a verification digit Any leading zeros as well as the verification digit do not appear in the SAU number reported in the PI root menu Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 2 8 15 S 5 S S
16. a 9 22 URC2 Database Programming U RMI Office and U MR Office cards 9 23 9 4 Three Way Conference 3 nnns 9 35 General Description ie ere tc eee ute gir E n ee rete rege eara aas 9 35 Database nennt nennen nennen trenes nnne 9 35 Additional 3 Way u n ul qaq qapas 9 37 Specifications 3 Way 9 37 9 5 Multi Party Conference CONF 9 39 General Description areni ll iaia lalla 9 39 Feature Descriplions MEE 9 40 URC Chained Meet Me Groups 9 40 URC Meet Me Conference Modes iii 9 40 Database 9 41 Additional Multi Party Conference Circuits 9 44 Specifications Multi Party Conference sss ener 9 44 9 6 DTMF Receiver DTR iii 9 45 General Description 3 da erdt aa 9 45 How DTMF receiver circuits D TRs are required essen 9 46 Additional 9 46
17. esee eene nnne nennen i sinensis 9 63 Additional Modem in the Optional IPx 800X 9 65 Specifications Modem id esee aiar aa 9 65 9 12 Data Serial Ports RS 232E i 9 67 General Description 9 67 RS 232E ports in the Optional 800X 9 68 Specitications RS 292E ud eret e ae ne die Fa ae a queo da ud ua 9 68 9 13 MUSIC ie sec davies 9 69 INTFOGUGHONE siriana aa 9 69 sno ea 9 69 M1 Internal External MUSIC nennen nennen nnn nennen ennt nens 9 69 M2 P Paging External 9 69 Configuring the Music M1 Jumper to External or 0 9 70 Configuring the Music M2 P Jumper to MUSIC sess 9 71 Database Programming ash Sakata ae eene eene nennen entren 9 72 External Connections igitur LE Ea dg d du eae dee aa du Races 9 74 Additional Music Interfaces in the Optional IPx 800X Cage 9 75 Specifications MUSIC us A ou Q RR Ve eae e aqua 9 75 9 14 Voice Paging Public Address and 1 9 77 1121116 5 81011 0 4 Oa 9 77 Circuit DOSC
18. i 2 39 Chapter 3 Initial Power up Tests 3 1 Power Supply Testi te et eto nb et REED edet eddie 3 1 AG Powered Systems er atem eer era re ERR oaa 3 1 DC Powered Systems ui ete ise n tene Ee er iren inana 3 3 3 2 Common Control Tests oe td eee pete cede a tiu 3 5 Control Card Initialization iii 3 5 Memory Lithium Battery Condition essent enne 3 8 3 3 Peripheral Interface Card Initialization nnne 3 9 RTOC OT a E E 3 9 Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card eene 3 10 E ER 3 13 Preparing for Initialization ris err e e Ee dr hee e Pede enel 3 13 IPx Office Unit Initialization enne nnne nnns tnter nns 3 13 First Expansion Cage Initialization sees 3 14 Second Expansion Cage 3 14 3 4 Cable Installation 3 15 S o Installation Wrap 0p ubi es e tu ate XE lalla loi 3 17 Chapter 4 Software Installation Procedure 4 1 Generic Feature Software a aa aaa 4 1 vi IDHOQUGULODN S cnr i ia ii n 4 1 Upgrading Using the 4 2 Installing an Upgraded IMC8 IMC16 sss 4 3 Creating a Binary
19. 0 SDRCF card 1 x 6 party requires IPx 800X exp cage 2 15 party requires IPx 800X exp cage Number of Participants Per U RMI or U MR circuit 14 max Per U RMI or U MR card 84 max 5 E E v gt E gt 29 2 3 M S D S S 9 44 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual DTMF Receiver 9 1 General Description The U RMI Office and U MR Office cards provide 24 max 24 port DTMF receivers and decoders for touch tone digits PN NOTE E Separate authorization is required to allocate the DTMF circuits supported by the U RMI Office and U MR Office cards max The max number is dependant on the number of URC time slots The U RMI Office and U MR Office cards include the DTR circuits The DTR provides up to 24 circuits which receive and decode Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF dialing tones The is required to support telephone station apparatus or trunks that send DTMF tones to the Coral IPx Office system to activate system features or select other ports DTMF signaling is commonly used by industry standard single line telephone SLT sets as well as E amp M tie trunks and Direct Inward Dialing DID central office trunks Loop start and ground start central office trunks which are defined in the system database as IRSS Freedom or DISA require a DTR to
20. 5 a adiran Telecom Coral IPx Office Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual CoraliPx The flexible way to communicate The information contained in this document is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright patent and other laws protecting intellectual property as well as any specific agreement protecting TADIRAN TELECOM LTD s herein referred to as the Manufacturer rights in the aforesaid information Neither this document nor the information contained herein may be published reproduced or disclosed to third parties in whole or in part without the express prior written permission of the Manufacturer In addition any use of this document or the information contained herein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed is strictly forbidden The Manufacturer reserves the right without prior notice or liability to make changes in equipment design or specifications Information supplied by the Manufacturer is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by the Manufacturer for the use thereof nor for the rights of third parties which may be effected in any way by the use thereof Any representation s in this document concerning performance of the Manufacturer s product s are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of future performance either express or implied The Manufacturer s standard limited warranty
21. S v S 3 Front Panel Features The front panel of the MCB Office card contains various elements that are accessed via the front panel These elements including LED indicators buttons connectors and disk card slots Because they are accessed directly from the front panel of the unit they are described fully in Front Panel page 6 3 5 5 S S 8 16 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 4 1 8 16 Memory Card The IMC8 16 is an integrated memory card with a 8 or 16 MB flash memory capacity It contains the generic software of the Coral and is used to store the system database See IMC8 and IMC16 Flash Cards page 8 33 for details The IMC8 16 is used by the main control during run time The memory management on the MCP IPx allows part of the code to use portions of the IMC8 16 memory for run time Therefore the IMC8 16 card must not be removed from its drive during system operation If removed the system will crash CAUTION Do not Remove the IMC8 16 card form its drive during system operation Removing the IMC8 while the system is ON AIR will cause the system to shut down S S D gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 2 8 17 5 5 S S 3
22. nn RE LAN to LAN ERR eee DHCP over IPSec ned ie oe e eo eden IPSec Pass through System Networking gt 11 17 5 S 3 E 5 3 D S 5 3 n E E D S E z Network Features DHCP server relay client DNS cache and proxy Dynamic DNS SNTP client Call scheduling RADIUS client UPnP Routing protocol Static routing RIP V2 QoS Class based bandwidth guarantee by user defined traffic categories Rule based classification IP Port DiffServ Code Point 4 evel priority for each direction Inbound Outbound Bandwidth borrowed Automatic WAN speed detection URL Filtering URL Blocking with Exception Handling Java ActiveX Cookies Zip EXE Blocking Executable Compressed multimedia file Blocking URL Blocking by User defined keywords Time Schedule support Management Web base user Interface HTTP HTTPS Command Line Interface Telnet Administration access control list Configuration backup restore Build in diagnostic function Firmware upgrade via TFTP Remote firmware upgrade via FTP Quick start wizard Logging via syslog SNMP management MIB II Max Power able 10 Watt 101 ay ganana Sunan 1 22 0 W16 0 H3 67 cm ee 15 1 2A 11 18 j System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual WiFI Card WLAN Access Point Protocole aqa eie esed IEEE802 11
23. oreet di tele gu Siac bated eee ne ali 8 8 Memory Manage mem 112555 eodein ep ei liana 8 8 The Program Interface ilari 8 9 Internet Protocol Gateway eene 8 9 Group Controller s iret ee tte e eget pte tegere 8 10 Voice Switching and Time Slot 8 10 Circuit Rafale bes 8 13 45 u amaata S Ra Masha hua tha 8 13 Software Authorization 8 14 SAU Unique Serial Numbers nas 8 15 Front Panel Features xir Biala NG Giaden 8 16 IMC8 16 Memory Card 8 17 RS 232E Programming Port 8 18 BO SOUP E Me ti ero i i ean ey 8 18 UGW RS 232E Programming Port 8 19 8 19 Installing the DBM X Memory 8 20 Lithium Battery Condition Testing eene nennen nennen nennen 8 21 Specifications MCB OffIC8 eic i aie E nda 8 23 8 3 i nece ee eet teet ife th etie eh 8 25 GONG al iaia Aa ii ose ilaria 8 25 Disconnecting the LED Office Card from the MCB Office 8 26 Repl
24. 1 Turn the PS Office AC power switch OFF turn the switch downwards 7 10 Power Supply Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Remove all peripheral cards from the IPx Office unit or control and peripheral cards from the relevant cage so that they protrude from the cage by approximately 1 inch 2 5 cm Turn ON the PS Office AC Either the PS Office AC is malfunctioning replace as described on Installation and Operation page 7 6 or the problem is caused by the backplane control cards peripheral or NTU Office cards within the IPx Office unit Contact the manufacturer To determine which peripheral card is causing the problem insert the cards into their appropriate slots one at a time beginning from the right side of the cage Ensure that the card s rear panel connectors engage properly with the backplane and that they initialize properly Power Supply 27 11 D 5 5 5 un D 2 D 2 S WY lt 6 Specifications PS Office AC Power Supply IPx Office 100 240VAC 47 63Hz Power Rating i 115 60Hz Range 98 to 126 230VAC 50Hz 3A Range 198 to 253VAC Power Consumption from mains Continuous 130W ll 5VDC nom regulated 6 0A max 3 3VDC nom regulated 6 0A max 48VDC nom regulated 1 0A max Fuses Input AC
25. 5 5 3 EN 5 E a 5 Q Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 13 4 Synchronization Instructions 1 See the selection of the digital trunk cards available at the Coral site given on Choosing the Best Synchronization Source page 10 12 above to determine which cards will be used as the primary and secondary synchronization sources 2 Determine into which slots the card chosen in Step 1 should be inserted See Figure 10 3 on page 10 16 3 Verify that the digital trunk cards are properly strapped See Figure 10 3 on page 10 16 4 When expansion cages are installed verify that the ESIM Office card is properly strapped See Figure 10 4 on page 10 17 If an IPx 500X Expansion cage is installed and if straps must be changed verify that the cage power is OFF before removing the PS500 power supply unit Refer to the Coral IPx 500 Installation Guide 5 Verify that the backplane of the expansion cages are properly strapped See Chapter 6 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual or Coral IPx 800 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual 6 Use the PI facility to inform the system of the synchronization slot selection Access the synchronization branch Route DTDB 3 to set the following parameters ADDR PRM SEC Enter the appropriate shelf slot combination of your choice m IPx Office main unit PRM shelf 1 slot 8 10
26. 1 0 when Music 2 is used 8DRCF card requires IPx 800X expansion cage PAGE External Paging Output Termination Capacitor coupled transformer non grounded Output Level 15 dBm Nominal External Device 10 000 Minimum PAGE Connector Connector Stereo 3 5 mm phone plug Relay Contacts 1 2 RLY1 Contact Type Isolated Dry Form A SPST NO Voltage Limit 50VDC Maximum Current Limit 0 5A Maximum non inductive Power Limit 30VA Maximum nm nm DS lt R ini gt S x S nm nm 5 S 253 5 R do 5 S Ey 23 2 9 84 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 9 UNA Bell and Relay 2 Universal Night Answering Central Bell Introduction The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards provide relay contacts for central ringing bell interface An incoming call may be automatically directed to a central bell When the bell rings anyone within that group may dial the feature code to pick up that call Calls may be answered after the attendant leaves or when a central bell is ringing Normally this feature is activated for incoming calls during the night answering period There are two ways to do this group pickup and
27. 1 requires IPx 800X expansion cage Relay Contacts 1 2 and 3 4 RLY3 lt Contact Type Isolated Dry Form A SPST NO S Voltage Limit 50VDC Maximum E Current Limit 0 5A Maximum non inductive 2 Power Limit 30VA Maximum lt 9 98 j Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Relay Contacts RLY1 RLY2 RLY3 General Information The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards incorporate two relay contacts 1 2 and 3 4 for two of the following three features m External voice paging PAGE Described on page 9 77 m Universal Night Answer UNA Central Bell Described on page 9 85 m Dial operated accessory alarm RELAY Described on page 9 91 The applications described in the sections above describe several examples of the control of external devices through relay contacts on the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office or MR Office cards A limited description of most of the external devices is listed herein In each application however several important factors should be considered The relays provide form A single pole single throw normally open or SPST NO contacts for activating external circuitry and devices Operation of the relays is determined by the system database m Contacts RLYI are designated to operate in conjunction with audio interface M2 P for external paging applications
28. 8 L8 Figure 5 5 on page 5 16 illustrates wiring interconnections between the trunk card station card and a single line station set Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 21 8T CID Office Card TRUNK 0 1 6 7 TRUNK 2 3 4 5 71 3 1 B TRUNK 0 7 2 2 STR 3 3 STT LLLLLLU 4 TR 4 TR yo RJ 45 plug male si TT 2 45 plug male 6 6 SCR clip at rear RJ 45 socket female 7 7 SCT external view Figure 5 5 on page 5 16 illustrates wiring interconnections between the trunk card station card and a single line station set n o 5 M S D S D S E D Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 41 Figure 10 22 IPC Office Card Applications Hard Disk VIDEO USB1 SHUTDOWN HDD DSP2 BUSY RESET APP__IPC Office 22 Y MX S E S 2 10 42 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 23 4CID Office Card Mounting holes for metal screws and spacers for connecting to 4T Office Metal washer NN Spacer 4CID Office 4T Office n o S M 5 S S ES N E ua Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10
29. Prm Sync Slot 4 18 HO 119 Power Supply PS500 AC DC Battery Pack BATTipx for PS500 AC Ad Equipment Installation Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 29 Figure 2 14 2nd Expansion Cage 500X Card Placement Coral IPx 500X Shelf Number 2nd EXP CAGE Card Type Card Type o o U5 o JU1 JU3 Card Type Card Type Card Type Card Type DIGITAL TRUNK See Chapter 10 Card Type 9 D gt D E J Sec Sync Slot uaa Card Type Card Type _ Card Type Power Supply PS500 AC DC Battery Pack BAT Tipx Yes No for PS500 AC 9 Equipment Installation 2 30 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 2 15 1st Expansion Cage 800X Card Placement Coral IPx 800X 1st EXPANSION CAGE Shelf Number Card Type niversal YO Type DIGITAL
30. Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 5 External Connectors The card front panel connectors Figure 9 8 provides music connection paging connection and relay circuits The music and paging connectors are stereo 3 5 mm phone plugs see Figure 9 9 Table 9 7 External Connections Connector Function Description RLY1 Voice paging activation jumper P4 pins 1 2 selected Relay contacts 1 2 System Alarm or Dial Operated contacts RLY 3 jumper P4 pins 2 3 selected RLY3 System Alarm or Dial Operated contacts Relay jumper P4 pins 3 4 selected contacts 3 4 RLY2 UNA Bell contacts jumper P4 pins 4 5 selected M1 jack Music 1 External music input jumper P2 pins 2 3 selected Music 2 External music input jumper P3 pins 1 2 selected M2 P jack Page Voice paging output jumper P3 pins 2 3 selected Figure 9 8 External Connections Front View Music 1 Music 2 or Paging jack jack 1234 x o 9 _ Ps MM U RMI Office Relay Relay contacts 1 2 contact 3 4 PAGE or RELAY BELL or RELAY Figure 9 9 Music and Paging Plugs Connection Left Right Common n E S x lt N x lt 5 2 Shared Service Cards 29 17 o D 3 5 x 3 Dd SS Dd 6 MR RMI F EPROM U60 Figure 9 3 on page 9 11 through Figure 9 6 on page 9 14 illustrate the MR RMI F EPROM U60 location on the U
31. Coral IPx Office Installation Manual CHECKING SAU END CHECKING SAU CHECK CHECKSUM END CHECK CHECKSUM And the following second message appears after two or three minutes following several short messages that appear during system start up Initializing CCS Partial initialization phase starting 32 16GC BROADCAST RESET System configuration identified CCS is on the air ROOT CCS XX xX XX Copyright c 2001 yyyy NAME site name SAU 11 Do the following m If the second message appears the system has initialized properly and is capable of processing calls The version number of the generic feature software is indicated where the x s appear in the line that reads CCS m If the version number shown in the PI does not match the version number printed on the IMC8 16 flash card supplied with the system perform the procedure described in Chapter 4 Software Installation Procedure to install a new generic software version on the IMC8 16 card 12 Disconnect the cable from the front panel of the IPx Office unit S E S o Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests 3 7 2 Memory Lithium Battery Condition Test If the start up tests detect that the voltage level of a lithium backup battery on the MCB Office is insufficient to reliably maintain the memory contents in the event of power failure the follow
32. D S 20 gt un R E Y S S lt The second message may appear after two or three minutes following several short messages that appear during system start up CCS is the air Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Software Installation Procedure 4 3 CCS Copyright 2001 xxxx NAME site name SAU After the second message appears the system has initialized properly and is capable of processing calls After entering the password the version level of the generic feature software is indicated where the x s appear in the line that reads CCS xx xx xx 7 The new IMC8 card does not include a backup of the current database To make a backup of the database perform the procedure described in Saving to IMC8 or IMC16 page 4 6 The Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days for any of the following reasons SAU serial number does not match the corresponding CFD SAU serial number The Coral generic version contained in the CFD is higher than the version that is authorized by the SAU SAU is removed from the IPx Office side panel Relevant system messages appear on the automatically warning that the system will not operate without the proper SAU The program contained on the IMC8 permits the generic software to function even if the serial number of the SAU is incorrect or the SAU
33. PRI 30 office 1 5 office 1 4T Office 4 2 10 11 m 4T CID Office 4T 4CID 4 External Connections 5 3 Figure 5 1 Connecting via an MDF Champ Connections D 2 Termina Equipment T Q D S 3 E 3 Q amp S 5 4 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual External Equipment 1 Station Equipment Wired Stations Each station peripheral card provides an I O Champ connector Connections to Coral IPx Office system station equipment are established by cross connecting the station circuit from the appropriate Coral IPx Office I O cable punch block to the corresponding station wiring punch block Table 5 2 lists the various station interface cards available for the Coral IPx Office system the type of station equipment that the card supports and the number of wire pairs required by the station interface Station wiring between the Coral IPx Office system MDF and the station equipment should contain at least two and preferably three wire pairs to ensure adequate wiring capacity At the station location the station wiring should be terminated with a modular six position telephone jack containing at least four conductors pins 2 3 4 and 5 Figure 5 2 illustrates typical jack configurations with wire designations for four station types m 2 wire single line telephones SLT and digital station set
34. Use a UL Listed CSA Labeled Cord Set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG Type SVT or SJT three conductor cord terminating in a molded connector body The cord should have an IEC CEE 22 female configuration on one end and a molded on parallel blade grounding type attachment plug rated 15A 125V configuration 5 15P at the other end 2 Do not insert the power cord into the AC receptacle at this time CL Electrical Hazard Verify that the AC power strip or outlet supplying the unit is easily accessible and can be easily disconnected in the event of emergency Verify that the power strip or outlet is no higher than 63 160 cm from the floor Figure 2 18 AC Power Connection for One IPx To AC E Office Unit power outlet To Master Ground nm x S D R sot42 3 slots 4 5 6 22 slots 6 7 o O slots 10 11 A Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure gt 2 35 DC Powered Systems This section describes how to connect the power wires to the Coral IPx Office unit for DC powered systems that is when the PS Office DC power supply card is installed in the unit Figure 2 19 shows one IPx Office unit installed in the system and Figure 2 20 shows three units installed within the system Pa NOTE E The DC power wires provided with the system are 6 6ft 2m long Verify that the connection to the facilities pow
35. iii 7 13 PS Office DC Front Panel a ua 0000 7 13 PS Office DG Card Layout uu e ete e ene Feb eden u a NS 7 15 GIrCUIE m 7 17 Power Input Section us ete ie et catia einen Ga ates 7 17 DG Output 22 5 idee EB eene drea dati 7 17 48VDG Output PoOWer dedu eee iene et du ec du ea ee du ean nuda 7 17 Installation and Operation ii 7 19 Installing the Power Supply senes nter ens 7 19 Operating the PS Office qu iu nnne d 7 20 Removing the Power Supply 7 21 Troubleshooting aL elegi iter AEQ e DAE 7 22 Replacing the PS Office DC Power Fuse ii 7 22 Specifications oe Aa did s dp t RR and it a fo o t ee a cae eR eas 7 23 Chapter 8 Common Control Cards m ARGS DLE 8 1 General Description ie ed e diee tee et 8 1 Card Handling 8 4 Control 81 rer Pet te e pte unda 8 4 8 2 MCB OfiGe path Hte efe Ios 8 5 General Information 8 5 Card Components iste tiet ee kaa a ate 8 5 Main Control Processor n nan 8 8 Port
36. 9 100 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Configuring the Relay Contacts J umper Figure 9 37 is a simplified circuit diagram of the two relay contacts The relays provide form A single pole single throw and normally open contacts for activating external circuitry and devices Operation of the relays is determined by the system database Only two of the three relays functions RLY1 RLY2 RLY3 can be selected The selection is accomplished by P4 straps located on the U RMI Office RMI Office U MR Office and MR Office cards see Figure 9 37 Table 9 27 defines the position of the P4 straps for the relays selection Table 9 27 Relay Selection Figure 9 37 Simplified Relay Diagram Required Relays P4 Strap Setting RLY1 amp RLY2 4 5 amp 1 2 RLY1 amp RLY3 4 5 amp 2 3 RLY2 amp RLY3 1 2 amp 3 4 P4 il PAGE RLY 1 tel 47 REAY toe BELL RLY 2 Straps 1 2 3 Relay contacts RLY1 or RLY3 RLY2 or RLY3 1234 HEHE ugc M1 M2 P e amp PAGE RELAY BELL RELAY U RMI Office lt lt 5 lt lt 5 5 5 D Shared Service Cards 29 101 3 Specifications Relays Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 2 U MR Office card 2 RMI Office card 2 MR Office card 2 8DR
37. FS1 5A 250V S B replaceable Intermodule F2 5A 250V S B replaceable Output None Controls and Adjustments power switch Neli 1 2 kg External AC Input Connection straight connector D gt A 5 lt D 3 n 7 12 Power Supply Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 7 f PS Office DC Power Supply Unit 1 General Description The PS Office DC card s component side power supply unit provides internal operating voltages for the Coral IPx Office system The PS Office DC operates from a nominal input of 48VDC typically supplied by an external 48VDC rectifier or stationary battery plant Actual input may vary from 40VDC to 56VDC allowing operation m From a battery power source while the batteries are charged at an equalized charge rate m Under power failure until the batteries are completely discharged PS Office DC Front Panel Figure 7 6 displays the front panel of the PS Office DC The components located on the front panel are described in the following table Feature Description Power Switch Turns the unit ON or OFF WARNING Contact with live wires in the power supply unit could cause shock burn or death Do not remove the power supply from the IPx Office system when the power switch is turned ON and power is connected Handle Used to pull the unit out of the card cage Right and Left Used to
38. Female Female rear panel 1 not used Female Male First expansion cage IPx 500X IPx Office expasnion cable L IPx Office BE gt E 5 8 E 3 20 5 o S 5 n Female 6 32 Cage Description Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 6 27 Connection between the IPx Office dial Unit and two 800X Cages P 6 Second expansion cage IPx 800X Female rear panel H500 1 cable not used o 5 First 9 expansion cage m IPx 800X 9 with PX card 5 N a e 28 B Female Px Office rear panel TINO Oe al Female D T gt 5 8 3 O 5 o S n Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description 6 33 3 Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution Main Unit The Coral IPx Office main unit is a non blocking system The IPx Office system incorporates 1024X1024 timeslots The timeslots are distributed as follows slots 2 3 4 5 8 9 and 10 11 share the time slots 0 127 128 time slots Slot 6 7 uses time slots 128 255 128 time slots See Table 6 6 Table 6 6 Timeslot Distribution in Coral Peripheral Card Slots or Number of Peripheral Number of IPx Office Ma
39. Shared Service Cards 29 25 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Cards Table 9 13 DTR DTMF PI Configuration URC Configuration PI Route DTB 11 PI Route PLIS DTMF Total None URC2024 Time Slots Shelf Slot Ckt Dial No Short Full URCA 0 48 Needed 1 1 1 7 0 DTR DTMF 2 2 1 1 DTMF 3 3 1 7 2 DTR DTMF 4 4 1 7 3 DTR DTMF 5 5 1 7 4 DTR DTMF 6 6 1 7 5 DTR DTMF 7 1 7 6 DTR DTMF 8 8 1 7 7 DTR DTMF 9 9 1 7 8 DTR DTMF E 10 10 1 7 9 DTR DTMF 11 11 1 7 10 DTR DTMF 12 12 1 7 11 DTR DTMF 13 13 1 7 12 DTR DTMF 14 14 1 7 13 DTR DTMF 15 15 1 7 14 DTR DTMF 16 16 1 2 15 DTR DTMF 17 17 1 7 16 DTR DTMF 18 18 1 7 17 DTR DTMF 19 19 1 7 18 DTR DTMF 20 20 1 7 19 DTR DTMF 21 21 1 7 20 DTR DTMF 22 22 1 7 2 DIR DTMF 23 23 1 7 22 DIR DTMF 24 24 1 7 23 DITR DTMF 25 25 1 7 24 DIR DTMF 26 26 1 7 25 DTR DTMF 9 26 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual URC Configuration PI Route DTB 11 PI Route PLIS bles Name URC2024 Time Slots Shelf Slot Ckt Dial No Short Full URC4 0 48 Needed 27 27 1 7 26
40. 1 1 v 37 ST11 B11 B11 S 13 SH12 A12 A12 gt 38 5112 B12 B12 5 14 SR13 A13 A13 5 39 ST13 B13 B13 15 SR14 A14 5 40 5114 14 14 5 16 SR15 5 41 5115 B15 B15 a 17 SR16 DIG 42 ST16 B16 S 18 SR17 A17 43 ST17 B17 19 SR18 18 44 5118 18 20 SR19 A19 8 45 ST19 B19 Q 21 20 5 46 B20 22 A21 47 21 5 23 22 48 B22 gt 24 2 m 49 B23 25 50 External Connections 2 5 23 Table 5 9 displays the pinout connection directly on the Champ card connection for the 4S8F Office 45162 Office 858 Office and 8516F Office peripheral cards Table 5 9 Champ 50 Pin 4S8F Office 4S16F Office 8S8F Office 8S16F Office Connector Card Pinout 4S 8Fx 4S 16Fx 85 8Fx 8S 16Fx 4S8F 4S16F 8S8F 1 SRO SRO SRO SRO 8S16F 26 STO STO STO STO 2 SRI SRI SRI SRI 27 STI STI STI STI 3 SR2 SR2 SR2 SR2 28 ST2 ST2 ST2 512 4 SR3 SR3 SR3 SR3 29 ST3 ST3 ST3 ST3 5 SR4 SR4 30 ST4 ST4 6 SR5 SR5 31 ST5 ST5 7 SR6 SR6 32 ST6 ST6 8 SR7 SR7 33 ST7 ST7 9 AO AO AO 34 BO BO BO BO 10 A1 A1 A1 A1 35 B1 B1 B1 B1 11 A2 A2 A2 A2 36 B2 B2 B2 B2 12 A3 A3 A3 A3 37 B3 B3 B3 B3 3 13 B4 B4 B4 B4 38 4 4 4 4 2 14 5 5 5 A5 5 39 5 5 5 5 15 A6 A6 A6 A6 E 40 B6 B6 B6 B6 5 A7 A7 7 7 41 B7 B7 B7 B7 5 17 A8 A8 A 42 B8 B8 18 A9 A9 43
41. An ATA type PCMCIA connector houses the Compact Flash Disk CFD memory The CFD contains the TBD software and TBD files The CFD disk has an erasable memory capacity of 64MB or more The appropriate The ATA type PCMCIA slot is housed on the MCB Office card side edge 2 Inserting the CFD The CFD card is inserted with the front side facing up Q MX n s S 5 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards gt 8 39 z M n 5 8 40 gt Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 8 1 General Information The DBM X memory expansion card is a component of the Coral IPx Office common control section The DBM X incorporates 2 4 or 8 MB of Static Random Access Memory SRAM used to store the configuration database of a IPx Office system The DBM is an optional card that expands the database memory space The configuration database determines the individual characteristics of a particular installation site Figure 8 14 displays the DBM 8 card layout DBM 8 indicates that the DBM card is supplied with 8 MBytes of memory 1 MByte per chip Figure 8 14 DBM X Card Layout Connector P1 Holes for screws Memory chip 1 Mbyte chip SRAM devices require a constant source of power to retain their contents Power to maintain the memory is ordinarily provided by the IPx Office system in which the DBM X is install
42. D E 5 5 Saj Closing the Unit Cover Close the unit cover See Closing the Unit Cover page 6 10 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 22 11 5 Installing the External Components Installing the IMC 8 or IMC 16 Flash Card Install the IMC 8 or IMC 16 flash card See IMC8 and IMC16 Flash Cards page 8 33 Installing the Compact Flash Disk Install the compact flash disk See Compact Flash Disk page 8 39 Installing the Software Authorization Unit Install the Software Authorization Unit SAU See Installing the Software Authorization Unit page 2 12 Assembling the WiFi Antennas Install the WiFi antennas See Assembling the WiFi Antennas page 11 15 A 5 Ry 2 12 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 6 Mounting Table Units For rack mounted units skip to Mounting Rack Units page 2 14 To mount the unit onto a table peel off five rubber bumpers provided and affix them onto the bottom panel of the IPx Office unit as shown in Figure 2 3 PM NOTE E Attaching the rubber bumpers on to the bottom panel of the IPx Office unit will increase the height of the unit by approximately 0 16 4mm Figure 2 3 Table Mounting Bumpers Attach rubber bumpers onto five marked positions on the bottom panel Figure 2 4 IPx Office Unit Mounted on Table Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Har
43. Figure 6 13 Fan Dismountirig 5 eti 6 19 Figure 6 14 Fan Installatlon neci uir eire eti Lian 6 20 Figure 6 15 Bottom Panel Labels iii 6 21 Figure 6 16 ESD and Ground Labels enne nennen nnns nnn nennen 6 22 Figure 6 17 System with One Unit IPx nennen 6 25 Figure 6 18 System with Two Units IPx Office and IPx 500X 6 25 Figure 6 19 System with Three Units IPx Office and Two 500X Cages 6 26 Figure 6 20 System with Two Units IPx Office and IPx 800 6 27 Figure 6 21 System with Three Units IPx Office IPx 500X and 800 6 28 Figure 6 22 System with Three Units IPx Office and Two 800X Cages 6 29 Figure 6 23 Connection between the IPx Office and 500X i 6 31 Figure 6 24 Connection between the IPx Office unit and two 500 6 31 Figure 6 25 Connection between the IPx Office Unit and the 800X Cage 6 32 Figure 6 26 Connection between the IPx Office Unit 500X and 800X Cages 6 32 Figure 6 27 Connection between the IPx Office Unit and two 800X
44. System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 4 Installing the WiFi Card 1 Remove the two protective plugs that cover the holes for the antennas on the front panel of the system 2 Unplug the power cord that supplies the Coral IPx Office system Electrical Hazard Contact with live wires could cause shock burn and death Do not open the Coral IPx Office cover before removing power from the system Remove the unit cover See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 3 4 Insert the antenna cables through the front panel of the Coral IPx Office unit 5 Install the WiFi card as shown in Figure 11 6 6 Connect the cables to the WiFi card as shown in Figure 11 6 2 S a D S D Z Coral IP x Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 13 Figure 11 6 WiFi Card Assembly Attach the antenna wires to the WiFi card Attach the WiFi card to the network card Attach the antenna wires to the network card S w a S D 3 E 11 14 j System Networking Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 5 Assembling the WiFi Antennas 1 Close the Coral IPx Office unit cover Closing the Unit Cover page 6 10 2 Assemble the WiFi antennas as shown in Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 WiFi Antenna Assembly E ta 3 E n E E D Cor
45. WY 7 24 Power Supply Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 8 3 LED Carda aa wa 8 4 MRC 2 8 27 and ol 8 33 8 39 8 41 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 8 0 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Control Cards 1 General Description The common control cards include the MCB Office the IMC8 or IMC 16 flash card the compact flash card the hard disk the MRC card the LED Office card and the DBM X card The MCB Office card acts as a mother card to the other cards The MCB Office card contains the following embedded circuits m Main Control Processor MCP is the core of the IPx Office common control The MCP includes memory management circuitry local bus interface and database memory protected against power loss by a long life lithium standby battery It also provides a real time clock and hosts the Software Authorization Unit SAU The main processor receives status messages from ports in the system and determines the appropriate response based on programming entries contained in the system database The MCP circuit functions in a similar manner to the MCP IP2 card For further information see Main Control Processor page 8 8 m The Universal Gateway UGW provides the Coral IPx Office system with the ability to connect to the IP World The UGW circuit was previously part of the Universal GateWay UGW card in previous s
46. m Contacts RLY2 are designated as a UNA Bell destination m Contacts RLY3 are also designated for use as either a major or minor system alarm signal or an auxiliary dial operated relay contact The relay contacts provided on the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards have specific electrical limitations See Specifications Relays below Do not exceed these limitations In addition the type of load the relay contact operates can have a great significance Ideally the contact should operate a low voltage low current non inductive load such as a light bulb or solid state device When the voltage or current increases or when an inductive load such as a relay coil or solenoid is connected the likelihood of arching across the contact increases Contact arching occurs while the contact is opening and burns away the precious metal surface increasing the chance of the contact being Shared Service Cards 29 99 5 Re S N N Re a Q 5 5 o 83 D E N Re N N Re a 5 o S DI welded closed or failing completely Arching also generates high frequency energy that may be coupled to any one of the data busses of the Coral IPx Office causing unreliable or unpredictable system behavior If the contact is to operate a relay or solenoid use an alternating current AC operated device and an AC power source if at all possible AC operated inductive loads produce m
47. rie 10 14 10 4 Service and Peripheral CardS i 10 19 Chapter 11 System Networking 11 1 NTU Office Card sse nennen nter nnns 11 3 xiv eee a ani 11 3 System Operation without an NTU Office Card eene 11 3 Media Stream from the Digital World to the LAN and 11 3 Media Stream from the LAN and WAN to the Digital World 11 4 System Operation with an NTU Office eene nnns 11 5 Media Stream from the LAN and WAN to the Digital World 11 5 NTU Office Card ener 11 7 11 2 NTU Office Card Installation ii 11 9 PLE E 11 9 Installing the NTU Office Card iii 11 10 Replacing the NTU Office iii 11 12 Installing the WiFI Card u a a aha akapa snnt nnns 11 13 Assembling the WiFi Antennas iii 11 15 Configuring the Networking Software a 11 16 Specifications Sum EE 11 17 11 3 Connecting to the Network without NTU Office Card 11 21 xvi List of Tables Table 1 1
48. 2 STR 3 STT 4 TR 5 TT RJ 45 plug male 6 SCR clip at rear RJ 45 socket female 7 SCT external view 8 STT STR SCT and SCR are power failure transfer connections See Figure 5 5 on page 5 16 for power failure transfer wiring interconnections diagram and database programming n O D 3 D D X A D S O S n S 9 o D S S O E O NS 5 28 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 8T Office and 8T CID Office Cards The external network connections to the 87 Office and 8T CID Office circuit card are made via eight RJ 45 telephony connectors on the front panel See Table 5 13 and Figure 5 9 6T Office and 8T CID Office installed in slots 2 3 and 4 5 provide four 4 ports with power failure PF transfer connections on circuits 2 3 4 and 5 Pa NOTE E For further information on how to make the connection refer also to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Office Pinout RJ 45 B Conductor Trunk 0 1 6 7 Trunk 2 3 4 5 Pin 1 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Station Single Line Set Station Circuit 4 8 20S Office Figure 5 9 8T 8T CID Office Pinout 8T Office and 8T CID Office cards TRUNK TRUNK 0 1 6 7 2 3 4 5 ce 1 8 2 STR LULLLLLL 3 STT 4 TR RJ 45 plug male clip at rear as T
49. 5 un S S 29 Q Q S 2 S WY Figure 7 9 PS Office DC Block Diagram 6 3A 250V S B Power on off Power input fuse VIN Passive Inrush VRTN filter current Input 40 to 60VDC 48VDC nom 7 18 Power Supply NOTE 48VDC or approx 0 5V to 1 0V lower than VIN input voltage GND 3 3VDC 5VDC Backplane connector Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Installation and Operation The power supply unit is inserted into the IPx Office unit in slot 1 See Figure 7 10 Installing the Power Supply 1 Verify that the cage ground wire is connected and the ground nut is tightened See Figure 7 10 2 Verify that the power switch is turned OFF Contact with live wires in the power supply unit could cause shock burn or death Do not remove the power supply from the IPx Office system when the power switch is turned ON and power is connected 3 Position the two guide ridges located on the right panel of the power supply at the right and left into the card edge guides The power supply slot is positioned adjacent to the fans in the rear section of the IPx Office unit 4 Slide the power supply gently but firmly until fully inserted into the card cage A slight resistance should be felt as the multi pin connectors engage at the rear of the power supply and backplane Do not force the power supply into the card cage Irreparable damage may occur if the multi pin
50. 8 9 LED Office eee fie 8 25 Figure 8 10 Description of MRC iii 8 27 Figure 8 11 MRC Card Layout Bottom VieW ii 8 28 Figure 8 12 MRC Assembly onto MCB Office i 8 30 Figure 8 13 IMC8 Flash Memory Card Left side ii 8 33 Figure 8 14 DBM X Card LayoOUt i 8 41 Figure 8 15 DBM X Assembly onto MCB Office ii 8 44 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 MRG Card usus iaia lariana aa 9 6 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office ArchiteCture i 9 9 U RMI Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and Jumpers 9 11 RMI Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and Jumpers 9 12 U MR Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and Jumpers 9 13 MR Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and 9 14 Gard LED Indications oor o citet ea dde Q aa RE EE 9 16 External Connections Front View ii 9 17 Figure 9 9 Music and Paging Plugs Connection 1 i 9 17 Figure 9 10 MR RMI F Features 9 18 Figure 9 11
51. D D X A D S O S nm S 5 o D S S O E O NS 5 26 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 RJ 45 Connections Peripheral Cards Index The I O connections of the following interface cards are performed via cables connected to their RJ 45 connectors 4T Office on page 5 28 4T CID Office 8T Office on page 5 29 8T CID Office 4TBR Office on page 5 30 UDT Office PRI 23 on page 5 32 PRI 30 Office UDT Office T1 on page 5 33 30T Office LAN WAN IPx Office Front on page 5 38 Panel n O D 3 S D 5 5 D lt S D E o S K nm E S o D 5 O o o NS External Connections 5 27 4T Office and 4T CID Office Cards The external network connections to the 47 Office and 4T CID Office circuit card are made via four RJ 45 telephony connectors on the front panel See Table 5 12 and Figure 5 8 4T Office and 4T CID Office installed in slots 10 11 provide four 4 ports with power failure PF transfer connections PN NOTE E For further information on how to make the connection refer also to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Table 5 12 4T AT CID RJ 45 Pin T Office Pinout Pin Assignment Conductor Connect To Pin 1 Not Used 4 8 20S Office b Figure 5 8 4T AT CID Office Pinout 4T Office and 4T CID Office cards 1 TA
52. The total number may be defined per actual system Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Equipment Installation 1 Introduction The Coral IPx Office cage description are covered in Chapter 6 General System Description The cage mounting and installation procedure includes the following stages m Unpacking the Shipping Container m Preparing the Unit for Installation m Installing the Control and NTU Office cards if necessary Installing the External Components m One of the following m Mounting Table Units m Mounting Rack Units m Ground Wiring m Strapping the Configuration umpers m Peripheral Card Installation m Interconnecting the IPx Office and the Expansion Cages m Installing the DC Power Supply if necessary m Connecting the Power Wires General Hazard Installation and maintenance activities carried out by unqualified personnel could lead to death serious injury or damage to equipment Only qualified service technicians certified by the manufacturer may install and maintain the Coral IPx Office Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 7 S E D E 5 5 Saj 2 Unpacking the Shipping Container 1 Inspect the shipping container for evidence of physical damage mishandling Report any damage to the carrier immediately 2 If it is necessary to make a damage claim to the carrier do not move the container until it has been examined by a repr
53. Verify that electrical service is sufficient and located in close proximity to the system Coral IPx Office system requires at least one dedicated branch circuit with at least two receptacles one for the cage and one for ancillary equipment such as data terminals or personal computers external paging equipment or test instruments etc For 115VAC or 230VAC power 1 85mm or 14AWG wire must be used in the circuit branch Each branch circuit must be independently protected by a fuse or circuit breaker and must not be controlled by a switch C type fuses should be used where required by local authorities The receptacle for the Coral system branch circuit must be located within 4 feet 1 2m of the cage for AC operated systems or within 4 feet 1 2m of the 48VDC power supply for DC operated systems Auxiliary branch circuit receptacles should be located conveniently for ancillary equipment and should allow data terminals personal computers or test instruments to be operated near the system Table 2 4 lists the voltages and current requirements for each cabinet DC Electrical Requirements DC powered units must comply with the following instructions 1 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Restricted Access Area The DC powered equipment should only be installed in a Restricted Access Area Installation Codes The equipment must be installed according to country national electrical codes For North America equipme
54. YKI gt o9 cs 55 sg 2H on ES ul O o ka 220 suondo 8 wuajsKs Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 6 28 gt Cage Description 231ffO suoud 1 wajsks Coral IPx 800x Expansion Coral IPx 800x Expansion HEL BEE ipe wo e DL 85 TL 2 5 5 s 55 no o e 2 7 on C c N en og o O E ZQ 5 Og 59 g 575 2 x 9 ET O o o 8 5 o Di n Figure 6 22 System with Three Units IPx Office and Two IPx 800X Cages Cage Description gt 6 29 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Interconnecting the IPx Office Unit and the Expansion The IPx Office unit can be expanded in any one of the following configurations Table 6 5 IPx Office System Expansion System Configuration See Figure Options Main Cage 15 Expansion 2nd Expansion Cage Cage IPx Office 500X Figure 6 23 on page 6 31 IPx Office 500X 500X Figure 6 24 on page 6 31 IPx Office 500X 800X Figure 6 25 on page 6 32 IPx Office 800X Figure 6 25 on page 6 32 IPx Office 800X 800X Figure 6 27 on page 6 33 The IPx Office main cage and its expansion cages maintain a continuous conv
55. erect eet eae ied 6 12 MGB Office Card To rH 6 13 6 13 ere PEE EHE 6 13 sie 6 13 IMC8 IMC16 Flash Card i 6 13 Compact Flash DISK e rt etre ee t ivi tete 6 13 NGtWOrkING 6 13 WIFE Card Rc 6 13 Unit Interior Rear Section 6 14 Giro ele 6 14 Power SUpply u usus bie re asa 6 14 Peripheral can rae e ee d diana 6 15 Configuration iii 6 15 VO ie ale indica 6 15 Expansion Gonnectorz piscina P EUG olii 6 15 Cage Ground Terminal sn lella lana ila et edi nde 6 15 Blank Panels tue ni e ein 6 16 HeatFiemoval tn atat ete E ia 6 18 Cooling or titer 6 19 Safely UE ORO ii 6 21 Nameplate aaa 6 21 UL abel start cte ett tk beet 6 21 viii ESD ELI M EC MAD 6 22 6 2 System Configuration OptionS ii 6 23 General Description
56. m CONF MEMBERS m CONF SWITCH DELAY Sizes Def Route SIZ CONF CKTS parameter Between 1 to 6 ports required for the URC Sizes TAB Route SYSGEN 2 RESOURCES parameter Between 64 10112 ports required for URC n D S 2 2 E S 9 24 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Card List Route CLIS Card type must show URC2 in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 The card status can be one of the following m ACTIVE m INACTIVE The Port List supplies detailed information on which port is active or inactive see Table 9 12 on page 9 25 Port List Route PLIS Use this option to assign a short full name to URC Meet Me Multiparty Conference ports see Table 9 11 on page 9 28 Table 9 12 URC2 Features Circuit Circuit No Default Default Purpose See Table Type Ckt Name Dial No DTMF signaling 0 23 URC2 0 47 URC4 Table 9 13 on page 26 Meet me bridges CONF conference call for 48 53 BLANK 7098 7099 Table 9 14 on page 28 14 parties Not used in this Spare dei 54 55 Table 9 15 on page 28 Circuits of 3 way COW ANS Pe 56 79 Table 9 16 on 29 FSK transmitters for displaying CID a UM 7 iDSP Caller ID for SLT 80 111 Table 9 17 on page 30 users DTD Pral and progress 112 143 Table 9 18 on page 32 tone detectors n 3 o D S x lt gt gt x lt D E e S
57. 3 2 5 D 8 D n 10 26 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 7 PRI 30 Office Card Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Synchronization Source Not this card Primary green Secondary yellow Nominal Line Impedance SYNC PRI 30 Office LOS CRC GEN SEC 1 RxB 1 2 RxA 1 E 3 GND shield HH 1x8 p 8 5 TxA a A RJ 45 plug male 6 7 48VDC RJ 45 socket female 8 GND external view Peripheral Cards gt 10 27 n o S M 5 S S ES N E ua 2 o 5 D D 3 2 5 D 8 D n Figure 10 8 UDT Office Card Card Type Primary green 10 SYNC oe LOS CRC GEN SEC PRM e UDT Office 1 RxB 2 RxA RJ 45 plug male 6 clip at rear 7 48VDC 8 GND X 10 28 Peripheral Cards 3 GND shield 4 TxB 8 5 RJ 45 socket female external view Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 9 4 Office Card 2 E TRUNK 0 1 2 3 2 2 STR 5 E 3 STT S 4 TR RJ 45 x male SS 45 plug male I clip at rear 6 SCR RJ 45 socket female
58. 3 4 1 0 Cable Installation 3 5 Installation Wrap up Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 0 Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Power Supply Test 3 This chapter provides information about connecting the power supply to the facilities power supply Before proceeding verify that the peripheral cards in the expansion cages of the IPx Office system are only partially inserted into their respective card slots with the front side protruding approximately 1 inch 2 5 cm from the front of the card cage The IPx Office can operate as an AC powered system or as a DC powered system m For AC powered systems see AC Powered Systems page 3 1 below m For DC powered systems skip to DC Powered Systems page 3 3 1 AC Powered Systems 1 Verify that the cage ground wire is connected and the ground nut is tightened See Ground Wiring page 2 18 2 Verify that the power supply unit has been installed and the two removable screws on the left and right side of the PS Office AC front panel are tightened 3 Verify that the PS Office AC power switch is turned OFF downwards 4 Verify that the female connector of the AC power cord has been inserted into the front panel socket of the PS Office AC power supply See Figure 3 1 5 Insert the male plug of the AC power cord into the line outlet or primary power receptacle designated for the system 6 Perform the AC power supply test for expan
59. A ES un compatible Each circuit provides a 144 Kbps 2B D signal consisting of two 64 Kbps B voice channels and a 16kbps D data control channel Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 19 Service Peripheral Cards 9 Coral IPx Office Service and Peripheral Types Card Name Card PI Slot Description Type Slot P_TYPE 4S Office 2 3 4 5 Even 4SLS See Figure 10 14 on 10 34 Odd 4 port 2 wire SLT 2500 type device Single Line Telephone interface card Provides a multi pin connector to attach an optional 8Fx Office or 16Fx Office card in piggyback fashion 4S8F office 2 3 4 5 Even 4SLS See Figure 10 19 on page 10 39 Odd 8SFT Combination station card 4S Office and 8Fx Office cards on 4S Office board 12 ports total 4S16F office 2 3 4 5 Even 451 See Figure 10 19 on page 10 39 Odd 16SFT Combination station card 4S Office and 16Fx Office cards on 4S Office board 20 ports total 85 office 2 3 4 5 Even 8SLS See Figure 10 15 on page 10 35 Odd 8 port 2 wire SLT 2500 type device Single Line Telephone interface card Provides a multi pin connector to attach an optional 12Sx Office 8Fx Office or 16Fx Office card in piggyback fashion 8S8F office 2 3 4 5 Even 851 See Figure 10 19 on page 10 39 Odd 8SFT Combination station
60. APA _ NCg or PEX APA RS 232E RS 232 orange 8 Clear To Send CTS g v 24 Pinout 7 brown 7 Request To Send RTS 7 v 24 1 8 Data Set Ready DSR 6 9 gray 5 Signal Ground GND 5 yellow 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR black 3 Transmit Data TR 3 6 RJ 45 plug male blue 2 Receive Data RD 5 M 221 ae clip at rear red 1 Data Carrier Detector DCD To GKT or FlexSet APA To PC Serial Port COM 1 2 RS 232 9 pin female connector N 2 9 lt lt S ta S E 3 E S S Q 5 18 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 6 1 0 Card Connections For Coral Peripheral Interface Cards 1 Peripheral Cards Index The following tables display the pinout connection directly on the Champ card connection for all currently available peripheral cards for the Coral IPx Office To help identify the peripheral cards they are listed below in alpha numeric order Table 5 6 Card I O Connector Pinout External I O Connectors Pinout Card Name Connector Card Table Page Slot 12S office 205 1xChamp 2 3 4 5 Table 5 8 on page 5 23 and Table 5 10 on page 5 25 16Fx Office 4S16F or 1 2 3 4 5 Table 5 9 on page 5 24 and Table 5 11 on page 5 26 8S16F 16SFT office 1x Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 8 on page 5 23 and Table 5 10 on page 5 25 20S office 85 12sx 1x Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 8 on page 5 23 and Table 5 10 on page 5 25 24S
61. Card List Route CLIS Card type must show MR or RMI F in the P TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 See Table 9 3 on page 9 7 The card status can be one of the following m ACTIVE m INACTIVE The Port List supplies detailed information on which port is active or inactive Port List Route PLIS Use this option to assign a short full name to MR and RMI F ports see Table 9 9 Table 9 8 MR and RMI F Features Circuit Default Default Circuit Purpose Dial No NA NA 0 22 PAGE RLY1 M Pego 23 7074 Universal Night m ccn 24 BELLO 7050 RELAY RLY3 I Minor 25 BLANK 7086 MODEM MODEM Connection 26 MODMO 7070 Shared Service Cards 29 19 n o D S x lt gt N x lt D E e S Circuit Default Default Circuit Purpose No Name Dial No 1st Music Background and Music 1 Music On Hold N A N A N A Internal or External Source 2nd Music Background and Music 2 Music On Hold N A N A N A External Source Provided with U RMI and RMI Office cards Table 9 9 MR and AIMEE PI Route PLIS Dial No s ae 1 6 0 22 None 1 6 23 PAGE 7074 PAGE0 BLANK 1 6 24 UNA 7050 BELLO BLANK 1 6 25 RELAY 7086 BLANK BLANK 1 6 26 MODEM 7070 MODMO BLANK Provided with U RMI and RMI Office cards n D S 2 2 E lt 9 20 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 1 URC PROM
62. Configuring the Music M2 P J umper to Music The system music source M2 P may be either external music source or a voice page output Figure 9 14 displays the jumper settings for the music source Table 9 21 Music 2M2 P Music Paging Selection P3 Jumper Setting P3 1 2 2 3 M2 P External Music Paging Output Input Figure 9 14 Music 2 Simplified Diagram External Connectors M2 P Music 2 Stereo Phone Jack External Source Converter PCM Bus Digital Analog 1 3 PAGE m Figure 9 15 Music 2 M2 P Music Paging Selection P3 Jumper M2 P Function P3 amp Setting ro n 55555 1 P6 P5 Paging Output 2 3 E E P4 5 1 External Music 2 B 2 E Input Shared Service Cards 29 71 m 3 Q E o 2 3 E S US re S 5 9 72 5 Database Programming Each U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office or MR Office card provides two music sources 1 External Internal selectable and M2 External The Music feature requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required for Music The following parameters must be set to enable the Music feature 1 Card List Route CLIS Card type
63. NTU Office card Connector to LAN port WiFi card Connector to WAN port 5 E S n v 8 S Reset button WiFi antenna connector Reset button wires Coral IPx Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 7 NOTES 5 p 2 E 11 8 System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual NTU Office Card Installation 1 Introduction The NTU Office card installation process includes hardware and software installation The hardware installation process is described in this manual The software installation process is described by the Vigor 2900 software vendor at www draytek com Table 11 1 displays the items that are supplied with the NTU Office card Pa NOTE E The NTU Office card assembly kit includes additional parts However you only need to use the parts listed below Parts Used in NTU 0 card Assembly Kit USB cable 1 LAN cable 1 WAN cable 1 Power harness 1 Reset switch harness 1 5 S 3 E 5 3 D S Coral IP x Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 9 2 Installing the NTU Office Card This section describes how to install the NTU Office card assembly including the card chassis See Figure 11 5 1 If necessary unplug the power cord that supplies the Coral IPx Office system WARNING Electrical Hazard Contact
64. Optional Expansion Unit of the IPx Office uses standard Coral FlexiCom 300 400 5000 6000 and IPx 800 3000 4000 peripheral cards IMC8 IMC 16 Flash Module for generic software and database backup PCMCIA format PC CARD PRI 23 Office 23 channel PRI Primary Rate Interface digital trunk card PRI 30 Office 30 channel PRI Primary Rate Interface digital trunk card UDT Office Universal Digital Trunk T1ipx or PRI 23ipx interface card MR Office RMI Office U MR Office U RMI Office S 5 43 5 5 lt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Introduction 1 5 NOTES S 3 ES 3 43 ta 3 1 6 Introduction Coral IPx Office Installation Manual About the Coral IPx Office 1 System Description Capacity The Coral IPx Office is the first Coral product to integrate traditional telephony and VOIP networking abilities in the same basic system The Coral IPx Office is a small table or rack mounted PABX designed to fit in the low to medium range of the private PBX telephone market IPx Office supports all the Coral FlexiCom and Coral IPx family features The IPx Office is a communications platform that offers Voice over IP with all of the features and capabilities required in today s business environment The number of wired stations supported by the IPx Office configuration depends on the combination of SLTs Single Line Telephones and keyset units See the Product Descrip
65. RS 232E Programming Port The serial interface of the programming port on the MCB Office conforms to the EIA RS 232E specification It is wired as a Data Terminal Equipment DTE device using a popular 9 pin male D type connector The interface allows connection of a common asynchronous ASCII data terminal personal computer or external modem for programming the various features of the Coral IPx Office system and monitoring diagnostic information Figure 8 6 illustrates the pin assignments of the DB 9P Table 8 1 lists the pin functions See Program Interface Device Connection page 2 39 for detailed connection information and terminal setup Table 8 1 RS 232E Interface Pin Functions Pin Designation Function Receive Data Input to MCP IPx Transmit Data Output from MCP IPx Data Terminal Ready Output from MCP IPx Signal Ground Signal return Data Set Ready Input to MCP IPx Request to Send Output from MCP IPx Clear to Send Input to MCP IPx Figure 8 6 KB0 Pin Assignment 5 SIGNAL GROUND N C 9 O O 4 DATA TERMINAL READY CLEAR TO SEND 8 O 3 TRANSMIT DATA REQUEST TO SEND 7 O 2 RECEIVE DATA DATA SET READY 6 1 NC Setup The baud rate is set during first initialization at 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 100 The baud rate can be set from 300 bps to 19 200 bps Consult the Program Interface Reference
66. See Figure 6 15 Figure 6 15 Bottom Panel Labels san Telecom Coral IPx 5 Office dei LISTED SER NO E161352 DATE E T 2777 du e 5 E IDEA be 006010000 MADE IN ISRAEL THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION D n COMPLIES WITH PART 68 FCC RULES FCC XXXXX XXXXXXXXX REN 4 7B ONLY FCC REGISTERED OR GRANDFATHERED EQPT MAY BE USED WITH THIS FCC REGISTERED COMMON EQPT Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description 6 21 S S 5 o E 5 2 D lt D ESD Label An ESD label is located on the unit cover towards the rear panel above the grounding terminal See Figure 6 16 PN NOTE E The IPx Office unit is not equipped with a Electro Static Dissipating ESD wrist strap It is the customer s responsibility to provide the ESD wrist strap The ESD wrist strap should be worn while inserting removing or handling card in the system For further information see Inserting a Coral Circuit Card page 2 53 Each card is shipped inside an anti static plastic bag Cards should be kept in this bag whenever handling is not required
67. These labels warn the user to connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the strap before handling the cards All circuit cards including Shared Service cards Common Control cards and Peripheral cards contain static sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by Electrostatic Discharge ESD Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling circuit cards See Figure 6 16 Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces Handle with care and do not drop Ground Label The ground label is affixed to the rear side of the unit beneath the ground terminal This label indicates that only the threaded rod above the label is to be used as a grounding terminal See Figure 6 16 Figure 6 16 ESD and Ground Labels S S 5 o D lt E x 5 3 D D 6 22 Cage Description Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 6 2 System Configuration Options IPx Office This chapter describes the layout and configuration of the IPx Office system For a general description of the IPx Office unit see General System Description page 6 1 For a more detailed description of the IPx 500 expansion cage see Chapter 6 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual For a more detailed description of the IPx 800 expansion cage see Chapter 6 of the the Coral IPx 800 Installation Pr
68. but is not limited to the following conference functions m Six 3 way conference 6 x 3 way and m One x 6 party conference 1 x 6 party These cards are described in the Cora Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 4 Specifications 3 Way Conference Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 24 max 8 default U MR Office card 24 max 8 default RMI Office card 0 MR Office card 0 SDRCF card 6 requires IPx 800X expansion cage card ii 8 requires IPx 800X expansion cage ET 23 o D 5 E o gt ME D 5 5 o D E Shared Service Cards 29 37 KIMIN 22u24 fuo2 ADA 22nfT 9 38 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Multi Party Conference CONF Meet Me Conference Circuitry 1 General Description The U RMI Office and U MR Office cards provide two max 6 meet me bridge conference for 14 parties P NOTE E Separate authorization is required to allocate the CONF circuits supported by the U RMI Office and U MR Office cards max The max number is dependant on the number of URC time slots The Meet Me bridge manages conferences talk for up to 14 84 participants Any combination of trunks or stations can participate The circuitry is complete
69. electro static discharge ESD Always wear a static dissipating wrist strap connected to the unit while handling circuit cards Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces Handle with care and do not drop 2 insert a circuit card completely into its slot gently slide the card straight into the card slot A slight resistance will be felt as the multi pin connectors on the circuit card meet mating connectors on the backplane and engage 3 Push against the front panel of the card until it is flush with the front frame of the card cage Do not force the circuit card into the slot If more than slight resistance is encountered remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris Never place a card in a slot other than the dedicated one Refer to Table 2 6 on page 2 27 to determine peripheral interface card types 4 On the front panel of the peripheral card verify that the red diagnostic LED s near the right side of the card illuminates The LED remains illuminated continuously until the card receives its database from the system After a few seconds verify that the LED extinguishes An extinguished diagnostic LED indicates that the card has initialized properly If the LED remains illuminated continuously for more than two or three minutes either there is a conflict between the system database and its authorizations or the card may be faulty See Table 6 1 on page 6 3 or
70. o YV D O S 5 e d Y o So 42412223 4 u npy YAW 42412224 JAW 9 58 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual VoIP Media Gateway MG General Description Media channels are provided by an MRC module which is a daughterboard attached to the MCB Office card in piggyback fashion The MRC modules provide the following media channels Table 9 19 MRC Media Channels 2 Features MRC 8 MRC 16 MRC 32 MRC 64 G 711 32 64 128 128 G 729 8 16 32 64 G 723 8 16 32 64 Media channels are used to convert PCM calls to IP Packets and vice versa Media channels are also required when one of the calling parties is not an IP host No media channels are required for pure IP to IP connections direct connects Additional Media Channel Circuits Additional media gateway cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 500X and 800X expansion cages The additional cards include Card Cage Description PUGW w MRC IPx 800X 8 16 32 or 64 provides 8 16 32 or 64 media gateway channels PUGWipx w MRC IPx 500X UGW E w MG t IPx 800X MG 24 48 72 96 120 provides 24 48 72 96 or 120 media gateway UGW Eipx wMG IPx 500X channels PUGW and PUGWipx support SIP and MGCP end points T UGW E and PUGW Eipx support MGCP end points These cards are described in the Coral V
71. stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form is the only warranty offered by the Manufacturer in relation thereto This document may contain flaws omissions or typesetting errors no warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in the Manufacturer s sales contract or order confirmation Information contained herein is periodically updated and changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions If you have encountered an error please notify the Manufacturer All specifications are subject to change without prior notice Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD 2003 2006 rights reserved worldwide The Coral is Protected by U S Patents 6 594 255 6 598 098 6 608 895 6 615 404 All trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective holders Federal Communications Commission Rules Part 68 Compliance Statement This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive REN s on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s should no
72. umper on page 9 101 P5 P6 Enable or disable the modem by means of connecting or disconnecting the Tx and Rx analog lines Applying each jumper between terminals 1 and 2 enables the modem Applying each jumper between terminals 2 and 3 disables the modem See Modem umpers Enable Disable on page 9 61 n E o D S x lt gt N x lt D E e S Shared Service Cards 29 15 E o D 3 5 x 3 Dd SS Dd 4 Indicators The U RMI Office RMI Office U MR Office and MR Office cards are equipped with two LEDs located on the card front panel see Figure 9 3 on page 9 11 through Figure 9 6 on page 9 14 Table 9 6 Card LED indications Indicator LED State Indication URC Steadily Off No problem card operating normally in slot 7 Diagnostic LED middle Steadily On Card has not received a card database from system or the system resources are not sufficient To increase resource allotment go to the Sizes branch of the PI see Database Programming on page 9 23 MR RMI F Steadily Off No problem card operating normally in slot 6 Diagnostic LED right end Steadily On Card has not received a card database from system Flashing Diagnostic test failed by circuitry on card Figure 9 7 Card LED Indications URC MR RMI F 9 16 diagnostic LED diagnostic LED 1111 1 M2 P lil D U RMI Office
73. 073 Figure 9 3 on page 9 11 and Figure 9 5 on page 9 13 illustrate the URC PROM U73 location on the U RMI Office and U MR Office cards The URC Universal Resource Card unit software is provided with U RMI Office and U MR Office cards The URC is displayed in PI CLIS in Shelf 1 Slot 7 of the IPx Office as URC2 Tip Separate authorization is required to allocate the DTMF CLID 3way and CONF circuits supported by the U RMI Office and U MR Office cards See Table 9 10 on page 9 22 n S o E S x lt 5 gt E i 2 Shared Service Cards 29 21 Features The URC software includes the following shared service functions Table 9 10 URC2 Features and SAU Requirements Notation Function SAU Required D Tone Detectors DTD detects all necessary call progress No tones 16 max 32 port dial tone detector and call progress tone analyzer for enhanced dialing such as busy outside number auto redial Use a self contained table of call progress tone profiles to identify standard dial busy and ringback tone signals See Dial Tone Detector DTD page 9 49 R DTMF Receivers DTR Yes 24 max 24 DTR circuit DTMF signaling receiver and decoder for touch tone digits and cellular features See DTMF Receiver DTR page 9 45 C 3 way Conference functions Yes Eight max 24 3 way conferences Consultation Broker service bridge units for digital and IP channels
74. 1 specific customer request Peripheral interface cards ordered by the customer As required Installation kit including 1 Front rack mounting brackets 2 4 8 Phillips screws for rack mounting bracket 6 5 Table mounting rubber supports Right rear rack mounting bracket Left rear rack mounting bracket 1 AC Power cord 1 DC cable harness ordered at specific customer request including 1 eMolexTM 39 00 0078 crimp terminal 1 Molex M 39 01 4031 connector circuit minifit pitch 4 2mm 1 Black 16AWG wire approximately 2m long 1 Red 16AWG wire approximately 2m long 1 Main Resources Card ordered at specific customer request 1 NTU Office card ordered at specific customer request 1 Office RMI Office U MR Office U RMI card ordered at specific customer 1 request ICM8 16 flash memory card 1 SAU lock device 1 Hard disk ordered at specific customer request 1 Compact flash disk ordered at specific customer request 1 DBM X ordered at specific customer request 1 WiFi card including antennas and cables ordered at specific customer request 1 Any of the following blank panels ordered at specific customer request N S S S w S E S Full size 1 Half size upper 1 Half size lower 1 size right 1 For items included with expansion cages see the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual or the Coral IPx 800 Installati
75. 13 on page 5 29 8T CID office 8T 8CID 8 x RJ 45 2 3 4 5 Table 5 13 on page 5 29 IPC SFC uCMC WiCMC 2 3 4 5 Figure 10 22 on page 10 42 Office MCB Office 1 x DB 9P Unit front Table 8 1 on page 8 18 panel LAN MCB Office 8 x RJ 45 Unit front Table 5 18 on page 5 38 panel MR office 2 stereo 6 7 Table 5 3 on page 5 10 RMI office 3 5 mm U MR office phone plugs U RMI offi ane 2 relay wire pairs PRI 23 UDT Office 1 x RJ 45 8 9 10 11 Table 5 15 on page 5 31 PRI 30 office 1 x RJ 45 8 9 10 11 Table 5 16 on page 5 32 PRINTER Unit front Chapter 11 System Networking panel T1 Office 1 x RJ 45 8 9 10 11 Table 5 15 on page 5 31 UDT office 1 RJ 45 8 9 10 11 Table 5 15 on page 5 31 PRI 23 T1 5 20 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual UGW COMMON 1 x DB 9P Unit front Chapter 11 System Networking panel WAN MCB Office Table 5 18 on page 5 38 panel 1 x RJ 45 x Unit front n o ES S S w S M S 3 o S a 2 5 o E o NS External Connections 29 21 2 Champ Connections The following tables display the pinout the wire colors and the signals of the I O Champ connectors for each station card and each optional connection Table 5 7 Peripheral Card Connection 3 2 5 information Type Tables Starting Information Provided Champ 50 Direct P inout o
76. 2 S o lt D E Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 9 5 Replacing the PS Office Fuses The PS Office AC includes two fuses m If the FS1 fuse blows replace it with an identical fuse with the same rating See Specifications page 7 12 m If the F2 fuse blows replace it with an identical fuse with the same rating See Specifications page 7 12 To replace a fuse within the PS Office AC 1 Turn the PS Office AC power switch OFF downwards 2 Unplug the AC power cord from the front panel See Figure 7 5 Do not remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON Sudden power surges could damage system components Before extracting the PS Office AC card verify that the power switch is turned OFF 3 Remove the power supply unit from its slot and place it over the anti static material with the component side facing upwards See Removing the Power Supply page 7 9 4 Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse See the PS Office AC card layout in Figure 7 2 on page 7 3 5 Re install the power supply unit as described on Installing the Power Supply page 1 6 Diagnosing the IP x Office LED Indicators Refer to Front Panel page 6 3 for a complete description of the LED indicators on the front panel of the IPx Office unit P NOTE E The IPx Office system does not include an alarm LED indicator D gt A 5 lt D 3 n
77. 3 U RMI 2 for ional Car nfiguration U MR RMI MR Office Card List Optional Card Configurations Card List Route CLIS Location U RMI U MR RMI MR Shelf 1 Slot 6 RMI F MR RMI F MR Shelf 1 Slot 7 URC2 URC2 NO CARD NO CARD Shared service circuits in the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards are embedded in the MR RMI F U60 unit and the URC U73 unit See MR RMI F EPROM 060 on page 9 18 m URC PROM U73 on page 9 21 n o D S x lt gt N x lt D E e S Shared Service Cards 29 7 2 Features Table 9 4 U RMI EIUS U RMI U MR U MR Office RMI MR Office Features m 1internal or external music interface Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 external music interface or 1 external voice paging interface or public address and relay contacts 1 auxiliary or major minor alarm relay contacts 1 universal night answer UNA or central bell relay contacts 2relay contacts 1 remote maintenance modem V 92 ITU T Yes No Yes No standard up to 56Kbps m 16 circuit dial tone detector and call Yes Yes No No progress tone analyzer 32 m 24 DTR circuit DTMF receiver and decoder card for touch tone digits max 24 m Eight 3 way conference max 24 m Two Meet me bridge conference for 14 parties max 6 m 16 Caller ID circuit transmitters adapted to Bellcore standards which includes the time and Cal
78. 43 Figure 10 24 8CID Card Mounting holes for metal screws and spacers for connecting to 8T Office Metal Metal washer vai gi E Metal Metal Metal spacer screw Screw BCID 8T Office 2 o 5 D ER D 3 2 5 D 8 D n 10 44 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 25 8 Office and 16Fx Office Card Mounting holes for plastic screws and spacers for connecting to 4 8S Office Plastic Plastic Plastic screw spacer screw 8 16Fx Office 4 8S Office n o 5 M S D S D S E D un Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 45 NOTES n o 5 D MX S D S D iS 3 S 10 46 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 11 2 System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual NTU Office Card Description 1 Introduction This section describes the networking functions of the Coral IPx Office system For a description on how to install the networking card and components see NTU Office Card Installation page 11 9 Coral IPx Office offers a complete integration of traditional telephony and VoIP networking abilities Connection to the WAN is facilitated without installing an additional UGW card or router The Coral IPx Office includes UGW circuitry
79. CEPT digital trunk interface card 4T Office 4 Analog Loop Start Trunk Line with power fail circuits card 4T CID Office Same as 4T Csl card with 4CID module 4TBR Office 4 Trunk BRI circuit card 8T Office 8 Analog Loop Start Trunk Line with power fail circuits card 8T CID Office Same as 4T Office card with 8CID module 8SFT Office 8 digital Station FlexSet Terminal Telephones interface card 16SFT Office 16 digital Station FlexSet Terminal Telephones interface card 24SFT Office 24 digital Station FlexSet Terminal Telephones interface card 4S Office 4 Single Line Telephone interface card 85 Office 8 Single Line Telephone interface card 125 Office 12 Single Line Telephone interface card 20S Office Combination station card including 8S and 125 on a 8S Single Line Telephone interface card 4S8F Office Combination station card including 4S and 8S on a 4S Single Line Telephone interface card 45165 Office Combination station card including 4S and 165 on a 45 Single Line Telephone interface card 8516 Office Combination station card including 8S and 165 on a 8S Single Line Telephone interface card IPC Office Integrated PC card including SFC UCMC and WiCMC voice mail applications PS Office AC AC Power Supply PS Office DC DC Power Supply IPx 500X Expansion Unit of the IPx Office uses small factor XXXipx peripheral cards IPx 800X
80. COM S a S LAN 1 4 ln o e p UGW a processor n WAN ESIM o J2 connector Y a Printer S Reset button option of 3 network J13 for ADSL A Media gateway MRC screws card connectors B Hard disk catches P2 P6 P8 C DrayTek LAN card screws not used D DBM card screws Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 7 4 Main Control Processor The Main Control Processor MCP provides RS 232E programming and maintenance interface RS 232 UGW programming and maintenance interface a SAU connection and an IMC8 16 interface It integrates the main processor memory management circuitry local bus interface real time clock generic feature software memory and database memory The MCP supervises overall system operation by executing system wide processes These processes include port connection management feature management generic feature software installation feature authorization configuration database management database backup and restoration program interface input output and diagnostic testing Port Management In order to manage port connections and feature operation the main control processor embedded circuit communicates through the MBP Office backplane card via the HDLC buses Communication is enabled with the local card processors on every peripheral card both in the main and in the expansion units The main processor receives status messages fr
81. Controller switch Processor Processor Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 4 NTU Office Card Components The NTU Office card is mounted onto the MCB Office card and includes the following components see Figure 11 3 m NTU Office card housing This is the metallic frame that holds the NTU Office card The NTU Office card is permanently assembled onto the housing and is not removed in the field m NTU Office card This card functions as the system router and includes all of the components as detailed below WiFi Card The WiFi card is provided at specific customer request and is mounted onto the NTU Office card m WiFi Antenna Connectors The WiFi antenna wires are routed directly from the WiFi card to the WiFi antenna connectors that protrude from the front panel of the system The antennas are attached onto these connectors m Power connector Includes the connector of the power wire harness connector ON OFF switch m Connectors to LAN Port Includes four connectors one of which is connected to the MCB Office card enabling direct connection to the front panel LAN ports m Connector to WAN port Includes one port that is connected to the MCB Office card enabling direct connection to the front panel WAN port Figure 11 3 NTU Office Card NTU Office card housing WiFi antenna WiFi antenna cables connector USB printer port Power connector R ON OFF switch
82. DBM X Assembly Kit sene 8 43 Table 9 1 Shared Service Features the Main 9 2 Table 9 2 uu er ere Hie eee nean Deui dave genug aget eia 9 5 Table 9 3 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Card List Route CLIS 9 7 Table 9 4 U RMI U MR Office RMI MR Office Features 9 8 Table 9 5 U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office Configuration Jumpers 9 15 Table 9 6 Card LED Indications i 9 16 Table 9 7 External Connections eene enne nenne 9 17 Table 9 8 MR and RMI F 9 19 Table 9 9 and RMI F PI Route PLIS enr sn nnne 9 20 Table 9 10 URC2 Features and SAU Requirements i 9 22 Table 9 11 PI defaults per URC2 Resource 2 9 23 Table 9 12 URG2 Features 10 eer ded eed id Cade f ardt de paa 9 25 Table 9 13 URC DTR DTMF PI Configuration n nnne 9 26 xvii Table 9 14 Table 9 15 Table 9 16 Table 9 17 Table 9 18 Table 9 19 Table 9 20 Table 9 21 Table 9 22 Table 9 23 Table 9 24 Table 9 25 Table 9 26 Table 9 27 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 10 4 Table 10 5 Table 10 6 Table 11 1 URG DTB Pl Roilt sro Tu ah aha
83. DTR DTMF 28 28 1 7 27 DTR DTMF 29 29 1 7 28 DTR DTMF 30 30 1 7 29 DTR DTMF 31 31 1 7 30 DTR DTMF 32 32 1 7 31 DTMF 33 33 1 7 32 DTMF 34 34 1 7 33 DTR DTMF 35 35 1 7 34 DTMF 36 36 1 7 35 DTMF 37 37 1 7 36 DTR DTMF 38 38 1 7 37 DTR DTMF 39 39 1 7 38 DTR DTMF 40 40 1 7 39 DTR DTMF 41 41 1 7 40 42 42 1 7 41 DTR DTMF 43 43 1 7 42 DTMF 44 44 1 7 43 DTR DTMF 45 45 1 7 44 46 46 1 7 45 47 47 1 7 46 DTR DTMF 48 48 1 7 47 DTMF The ports listed above the double line indicate the default range See Table 9 11 on page 9 23 URC Meet Me Multiparty Conference PI Configuration Shared Service Cards 9 27 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Cards D x lt 2 D 5 lt D Table 9 14 URC DTB PI Route 1 16 1 7 48 CONF 7098 BLANK BLANK 2 32 1 7 49 CONF 7099 BLANK BLANK 3 48 1 7 50 BLANK BLANK 4 64 1 7 51 BLANK BLANK 5 80 1 7 52 CONF BLANK BLANK 6 96 1 7 53 BLANK BLANK The ports listed above the double line indicate the default range See Table 9 11 on page 9 23 Table 9 15 URC Spare ports not
84. Description 2 6 19 5 E n 2 un S Installing a New Fan 1 Insert the rubber plugs into the bottom mounting holes of the fan See Figure 6 14 2 Slip the fan plug assembly into the mating openings on the unit 3 Insert the top rubber plug through the top holes of the unit into the mounting holes of the fan 4 Connect the fan wires to the receptacle on the MBP Office P NOTE E When one fan needs to be replaced replace the other fans as well Figure 6 14 Fan Installation Insert rubber plugs into bottom holes Slip fan into openings A and B at bottom Insert rubbber plugs into top holes C and D Connect wires S S 5 o E S 5 3 D D 6 20 Cage Description Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 6 Safety Labels There are four safety labels located on the IPx Office unit the nameplate label the UL label the ESD label and the ground label Nameplate Label The nameplate label provides the product name the FCC compliance statement and conditions of use the CE trademark and the wheely bin icon indicating the need for disposal according to local environmental regulations See Figure 6 15 This label can vary according to your local regulations See the compliance statements at the beginning of the manual UL Label The UL label provides the UL registration number TBD
85. ENE N 9 91 Dial Operated sipas ayaqa daa kandida saaan 9 91 Major Minor Alarm Relay 9 91 xiii G7 re V BI Descriptio o eR 9 92 Configuring the Relay Contacts 1 2 Jumper to 9 93 Configuring the Relay Contacts 3 4 Jumper to 9 94 Database Programming sarcinas a a eea eene nennen eden nnns 9 95 Dial Operated Accessory sns nens 9 95 Major Minor Alarm Relay uu 9 96 External 5 ia 9 97 Dial Operated Accessory eeepc eit re dtp Edge ide da Ta 9 97 Major Minor Alarm Relays i 9 97 Relay Electrical LImIIi0ns iii 9 98 Additional RLY3 Contacts in the Optional IPx 800X Cage sss 9 98 Specifications RELAY iia ini el i analogo 9 98 9 17 Relay Contacisi TEE 9 99 General Information iii 9 99 Configuring the Relay Contacts Jumper L 9 101 Specifications 9 102 Chapter 10 Peripheral Cards 10 1 Peripheral Card Installation 10 1 General Information tired E o rte qe d cane Pe ie aiar 10 1 Card
86. IPx Office system In the future the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual will be available and will provide an updated description of all service and peripheral cards used in the Coral IPx Office system Table 10 4 Coral IPx Office Unit Service and Peripheral Card Types Coral IPx Office Service and Peripheral Card Types Card Name Card PI Slot Description Type Slot P_TYPE 80T Office IB 8 9 10 11 Even 30T See Figure 10 5 on page 10 25 Odd 30 channel E1 digital trunk interface card Provides a 4 wire digital multiplexed CEPT compatible trunk interface at 2 048Mbps rate NOTE 30T office is not for use in the North American market 4T Office I C 10 11 Even 4T C See Figure 10 9 on page 10 29 4 port Loop Start trunk interface card Includes 4 ports with power failure PF transfer Provides a multi pin connector to attach an optional 4CID Office card in piggyback fashion 4T CID office 1 10 11 Even 4T CID See Figure 10 10 on page 10 30 Odd Combination trunk card 4T Office and 4CID Office cards on 4T Office board in piggyback fashion 4 ports total The 4CID Office card is used for detecting Caller ID information 4TBR office IB 8 9 10 11 Even 4TBR See Figure 10 6 on page 10 26 Odd 4 port Basic Rate Interface digital trunk card ISDN n S S RS S 29 S E S S
87. Minor Alarm Introduction The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards provide one relay contact for major minor alarm or accessory interface Each U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office or MR Office card provides a multipurpose relay contact that can function as an On Off control of external equipment such as a door latch or light control It can also be programmed to operate during an alarm condition of the system signaling a malfunction Dial Operated Accessory The Coral IPx Office system can operate the relay contacts assigned by a specific dialed number Users can use this feature to switch external devices on and off A station user can switch the relay On or Off in order to activate certain external devices such as external alarm or electric locks Major Minor Alarm Relay The Coral IPx Office system reports failures as they occur on the PI screen A list of alarms can be retrieved by the Coral technician when needed A major or a minor system alarm can be programmed to appear on designated display telephones and or operate a relay and hence an external alert device Shared Service Cards 29 91 lt S ES 5 n S D 5 lt S e S nm nm lt 2 Circuit Description Figure 9 29 is a simplified circuit diagram of the relay contacts The relay provide form A single pole single throw and normally open contacts for activating ext
88. Optional hard disk provided with some system versions m Software Application Unit SAU m Main Resources Card MRC Office m Flash IMC8 or IMC16 Card Compact flash disk The networking cards include the NTU Office card WiFi In addition the front section of the unit includes the LED Office card which displays the diagnostic functions 6 12 Cage Description Coral IP x Office Installation Manual MCB Office Card The MCB Office card is the main control card of the IPx Office unit It is attached to the IPx Office case at the floor of the front section and is connected to the MBP Office The MCB Office integrates MCP IPI and GC circuitry and performs HDLC synchronization For further information see MCB Office Card page 8 5 DBM X Card The DBM X card provides 2MB 4MB or 8MB of SRAM Static Random Access Memory The optional DBM X card expands the SRAM of the IPx Office system For more information see DBM X Card page 8 41 Hard Disk The optional hard disk provides an additional 20GB 80GB of memory The hard disk is supplied only with some system versions MRC Card The optional MRC Main Resources Card converts PCM signals to IP packets and vice versa See MRC Card page 8 27 IMC8 IMC16 Flash Card The optional IMC8 or IMCI6 flash card includes the Coral software See IMC8 and IMC16 Flash Cards page 8 33 Compact Flash Disk The optional flash disk provides TBD See Compact Fl
89. Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Table 10 4 on page 10 19 lists the Peripheral Interface card types that can be inserted into each card slot in the Coral_IPx Office unit XXX Office Cards Peripheral cards with the suffix Office are special form factor cards for use in the Coral IPx Office system These cards come in four sizes as shown in Table 10 4 Peripheral Card types Peripheral card slots in the Coral IPx Office unit are not universal Slot 1 is reserved for the power supply m Slots 2 3 and 4 5 house full size cards Type II m Slots 6 7 8 9 and 10 11 house half size cards I m Cards type I A may be installed in slots 6 7 m Cards type I B may be installed in slots 8 9 10 11 ESIM Office in slot 8 9 only m Cards type I C may be installed in slots 10 11 See Figure 10 1 and Table 10 2 Coral IP x Office Peripheral CARD TYPE See Figure 10 2 and Table 10 3 Coral IPx Office Peripheral CARD SLOT Location n D 3 5 5 o nm D 5 O N D S D Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 5 A S 5 E 2 w RS n 9 9 S 29 Figure 10 1 Coral IPx Office Peripheral Card Slot Location slots 2 3 slots 4 5 Peripheral cards section Figure 10 2 Coral IPx Office Peripheral Card Types Type I A Half Size e e
90. RMI Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and Jumpers P5 Modem 1 Enable 3 Disable Tx P2 internal music lt external music P3 lt P paging 1 M2 P 2 Pm M2 external music Relay contacts 1 2 and 3 4 1 2 RLY1 PAGE 1 2 RLY3 RELAY 3 4 RLY3 RELAY lt 3 4 RLY2 BELL Relay Relay 1 2 3 4 1 M2 P e o RMI Office Relay Relay contacts contacts 1 2 3 4 D x lt 5 D 5 D 9 12 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 9 5 U MR Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and Jumpers P2 o M1 internal music external music P3 1 2 M2 external music 3 lo P paging Relay contacts 1 2 and 3 4 1 2 RLY1 PAGE 1 2 RLY3 RELAY 3 4 RLY3 RELAY 3 4 RLY2 BELL Relay contacts Q N 00000 Relay Relay 1 2 3 4 FTT e Mi M2 P e itd U MR Office Relay Relay contacts contacts 1 2 3 4 x lt 5 gt gt Shared Service Cards 29 13 D x lt 5 D 5 D Figure 9 6 MR Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and Jumpers Relay Relay 1 2 3 4 o MR Office Relay Rel
91. Related Documentation U U 1 3 Table 1 2 IPx Office System Specifications 1 10 Table 2 1 Coral IPx Office Dimensions 2 3 Table 2 2 Coral IPx Office Weights iii 2 3 Table 2 3 Coral IPx Office Space Requirements 2 3 Table 2 4 Coral IPx Office Maximum Power Requirements ii 2 6 Table 2 5 Part List Items per IPx Office Unit i 2 9 Table 2 6 Coral IPx Office Card Types i 2 27 Table 3 1 Card Slot Status Messages a n 3 12 Table 5 1 External I O Connectors for Coral IPx Office Peripheral Cards 5 3 Table 5 2 Station Interface Wire Pair Requirements a 5 6 Table 5 3 Auxiliary Connectors i 5 10 Table 5 4 Telephone Circuit Primary Protection Device Specifications 5 12 Table 5 5 Telephone Circuit Secondary Protection Device Specifications 5 13 Table 5 6 Card Connector Pinout i 5 19 Table 5 7 Peripheral Card Connection Information 1 5 22 Table 5 8 Champ 50 Connector Card Pinout 4 8 20S 8 16 24SFT 5 23 Table 5 9 Champ 50 Connector Card Pinout 4S8F 4516 858 85
92. SEC shelf 1 slot 8 10 m IPx 500X 800X first expansion cage shelf 2 slot 4 SEC shelf 2 slot 5 500X 800X second expansion cage shelf 3 slot 4 SEC shelf 3 slot 5 M E 5 50 Q For more information refer to Chapter 8 of the Program Interface reference Manual 10 14 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 7 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual If BRI lines are used for synchronization access the ISDN branch Route DTDB 4 to set the following parameters SYNC Set this parameter to YES PERMANENTLY active Channel Set this parameter to YES For more information refer to Chapter 26 of the Program Interface reference Manual Verify that the system 1s synchronized upon your settings Access the PI Synchronization branch Route DTDB 3 check the following parameter CURR CLK Verify that the value 1 is displayed indicating that the system is synchronized by the primary synchronization source Peripheral Cards gt 10 15 5 5 3 EN 5 x o E a 5 E O Q Figure 10 3 Digital Trunk Cards Jumper Settings slots 2 3 for Synchronization slots 4 5 lots 6 7 e SD M slot
93. Section 9 MRC 8 16 32 64 Modules on page 9 5 Shared Service Cards 29 1 E 85 S E 5 s 5 S 9 S S un 5 U RMI U MR and MR Office Cards Shared service circuits in the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards are embedded in the MR RMI F U60 unit and the URC U73 unit One of these cards may be installed in peripheral slot 6 7 See Section 9 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Cards on page 9 7 6 Shared Service Features in the Main Unit Table 9 1 Shared _ d Features OFFICE Cards Service Features in the MRC Main Unit U RMI U MR MR VoIP media gateway channels Yes No No No Mo m Oneinternal or external music No Yes Yes Yes Yes interface for music on hold and background music m One external music interface or one external voice paging interface for public address m One auxiliary or major minor alarm relay contacts m One universal night answer UNA or central bell relay contacts Aremote maintenance access No Yes No Yes No modem V 92 ITU T standard m Tone Detectors DTD detects all No Yes Yes No No necessary call progress tones m Receivers for No Yes Yes No No touch tone digits m 3 way Conference functions m Multi party Conference Bridge Meet Me m Caller ID transmitters iDSP for SLT users adapted to Bellcore standards Each shared service circuit and function is described in detai
94. See Chapter 11 Connecting to the Network without an NTU Office Card for further information 2 Connecting to the WAN The Coral IPx Office can connect to the WAN whether or not an NTU Office card is supplied with the system See Chapter 11 System Networking for more information Connecting to the WAN when an NTU Office Card is Supplied If an NTU Office card is supplied with the system the Coral IPx Office connects directly to the WAN without a router In this case the dynamic IP addresses can be provided either by the NTU Office card or by the DHCP server at the customer s site Connecting to the WAN when an NTU Office Card is not Supplied If an NTU Office card has not been supplied connecting to the WAN is possible only after a router has been added between one of the LAN ports and the WAN In this case the dynamic IP addresses are provided by the customer s DHCP server The WAN port 5 36 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual itself can function as an additional ninth LAN port However the WAN port does not include any LED indicators Connecting to a Printer The Coral IPx Office can connect to a printer whether or not an NTU Office card is supplied with the system Connecting to a Printer when an NTU Office Card is Supplied If an NTU Office card is supplied a printer can be connected via the USB port In this case the dynamic IP addresses can provided either by the NTU Office card or by the DHCP server a
95. XXX Office Type I B e XXX Office Type I C e XXX Office Type II Full Size e XXX Office 10 6 Peripheral Cards Power supply section Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Table 10 2 Coral IPx Office Peripheral CARD TYPE Card Type Card Name Card Slot 8 16 24SFT office 4S Office 8S Office 20S office 85 125 4S8F office 4S 8Fx 4S16F office 4S 16Fx 8S8F office 8S 8Fx 8S16F office 85 16Fx 8T Office 8T CID office IPC SFC office IPC uCMC office IPC WiCMC office 9108 2 3 4 5 MR office RMI office U MR office U RMI office 6 7 ESIM office 8 9 30T Office 4TBR office PRI 30 Office UDT office 8 9 10 11 1 4T Office 4T CID Office 4T 4CID 10 11 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual These cards are combination of two cards Peripheral Cards gt 10 7 n D gt lt 54 54 S 8 5 o Q S D S D Q Table 10 3 Coral IPx Office Peripheral CARD SLOT Location Card Slot Card Name Card Type 2 3 4 5 8 16 24SFT office Il 4S Office 8S Office 20S office 85 125 4S8F office 4S 8Fx 4S16F office 4S 16Fx 8S8F office 8S 8Fx 8S16F office 8S 16Fx 8T office 8T CID office 8T 8CID IPC SFC office IPC uCMC office IPC WiCMC office 6 7 MR office RMI office U MR o
96. a digital trunk interface The group controller circuit supports two HDLC highways and sixteen PCM streams including one stream reserved for the MRC and up to two expansion cages It is capable of establishing a maximum of 1000 time slots on its maximum peripheral shelf capacity This matrix allows for a constant frame delay operation mode The time slot distribution is described in Figure 8 4 Voice Switching and Time Slot Configuration The group controller supports up to two HDLC highways 16 PCM streams and up to two expansion cages Each PCM stream includes 64 Time Slots Each shelf unit one or two expansion cages receives 384 Time Slots divided into three groups of 128 Time Slots The Coral IPx Office supports 1024 PCM time slots The shelf unit requires only 384 of the entire 1024 time slots The remaining time slots are used for the main unit the tone generator and the MRC See Figure 8 4 5 5 S S 8 10 Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 8 8 Coral IPx Office Voice Switching P 2 Relays U RMI and RMI Office 1 Remote Prog Maint 7n Receivers DTR Call Progress Tone Detectors DTD Caller ID Circuits iDSP Three Party Conferences 3 Way Music Interfaces MOH BGM m Expansion Cabinet Interface
97. a software selection must take place The system must be notified via the PI facility of the synchronization cards shelf slot location See Choosing the Best S ynchronization Source page 10 12 Conditions for Slave Clock Mode Operation The following conditions are necessary for the Coral IPx Office to retrieve external clock signals m The jumpers must be strapped accordingly on the digital trunk cards and on the ESIM Office card m The digital trunk synchronization cards must be installed in the synchronization slots of the expansion cages IPx 500X and IPx 800X m The PI parameters must be properly set System Switch from Slave Clock Mode to Master Clock Mode When a digital trunk card is initialized in the appropriate slot the jumpers properly set and the shelf slot combination has been entered as a primary external clock source the system determines if the digital trunk card in the indicated position is properly synchronized with the network If the system is functioning properly it locks onto the primary external clock source Coral IPx Office Installation Manual If the primary digital trunk card issues a LOS or Red alarm and a secondary external clock source is defined the system determines whether the secondary digital trunk card is functioning properly If it is the system then locks onto the secondary external clock source If no secondary clock source is defined or the secondary clock is also in LOS or Red al
98. aaa lia iaia alla 9 28 URC Spare ports not used i 9 28 URC Three Way Conference C3WAY PI Configuration sese 9 29 URC iDSP CID Caller ID Transmitters PI Configuration 9 30 URC Dial Tone Detector DTD PI Configuration i 9 32 MRC M dia Channels rai a aa i 9 59 Music 1 Internal External Selection P2 Jumper Setting 9 70 Music 2 M2 P Music Paging Selection Jumper Setting 9 71 Paging M2 P Music Paging Selection Jumper Setting 9 79 Relay Contacts 1 2 PAGE RELAY Selection P4 Jumper Setting 9 80 Relay Contacts 3 4 BELL RELAY Selection Jumper Setting 9 86 Relay Contacts 1 2 RLYS PAGE Selection P4 Jumper Setting 9 93 Relay Contacts 3 4 RLYS BELL Selection P4 Jumper Setting 9 94 Relay Selection da c a o Dev 9 101 Card Diagnostic LED nnet 10 3 Coral IPx Office Peripheral CARD TYPE sees nnns 10 7 Coral IPx Office Peripheral CARD SLOT Location sse 10 8 Coral IPx Office Unit Service and Peripheral Card Types 10 19 Coral IPx Office Piggyback modules for Pe
99. amp gt 5 N on e lt S S un E S U RMI Office 0 U MR Office card 0 RMI Office card 0 MR Office card 0 SDRCF card 3 requires IPx 800X expansion cage 9 68 IPx Office Installation Manual Music Background and Music On Hold M1 M2 Introduction The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards provide the following common system functions m Two music inputs one of which can be internal m Music on hold interface two ports m Key telephone background music interface two different sources Circuit Description Figure 9 12 and Figure 9 14 are simplified circuit diagrams of the two Music Interfaces The external music M1 M2 interfaces are electrically identical Audio signals to the system are passed through the audio coupling transformer to the interface A direct current DC blocking capacitor protects the secondary winding of the audio coupling transformer from conducting DC energy As a music input the circuit operates as an input only and so it can be used to play but not record music M1 Internal External music Internal music M1 is available in all cards The selection between the internal or external source is accomplished by P2 jumper located on the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards See Figure 9 13 Table 9 2
100. and baby card connectors as described in Card Components page 8 5 The MCB Office acts as mother card to the following cards LED Office card The LED Office card is described in further detail on LED Card page 8 25 5 16 flash memory card The IMCS card is described in further detail in IMC8 and IMC16 Flash Cards page 8 33 Compact flash memory card The compact flash memory card is described in further detail in Compact Flash Disk page 8 39 MRC card The MRC card is described in further detail on MRC Card page 8 27 DBM X card The DBM x card is described in further detail on DBM X Card page 8 41 SAU Software Application Unit The SAU is described in further detail on Software Authorization Management page 8 14 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 8 1 MCB Office Card Layout Coral IPx Office Installation Manual LED card connector IMC8 IMC16 flash memory SAU MBP Office P4 connector ESIM 42 connector Common Control Cards 8 3 n 5 5 5 2 Card Handling Procedures Circuit cards contain static sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by electro static discharge ESD Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling circuit cards See Figure 2 11 Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces Handle with care and do not drop Control Card Installa
101. be installed in the system The DTR uses industry standard DTMF receiver circuitry to decode DTMF dialing tones The audio side of each DTMF receiver circuit is directly coupled through a CODEC to the Pulse Code Modulation PCM switching matrix of the Coral IPx Office system Decoded digital data is passed through the peripheral bus to the system processor E o Q Shared Service Cards 29 45 2 How many DTMF receiver circuits DTRs are required To provide adequate DTMF dialing Quality Of Service in the system the number of DTMF receivers should match the anticipated traffic volume The following table provides the amount of DTR ports required for several different DTMF dialing port sizes Number of DTMF Number of Dialing Ports Receiver Circuits 100 8 500 16 1000 24 This table assumes standard office traffic Medium traffic volume of 0 3Eg per port Higher traffic volumes should increase DTMF service accordingly Aaditional DTMF service should be used when features as FlexiCall IRSS Freedom and DISA are used 3 Additional DTR Circuits Additional DTR resources cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description 8DTR IPx 800X 8 circuit DTMF Receiver and decoder card 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes 8 DTR circuit DTMF receiver and decoder functions among other functions
102. be used to backup the Coral software into PCMCIA cards The backup file is in a binary format and includes all the software components of the specific Coral system from which it was copied including the Coral generic software version the switch authorization and the database Copies should be made and maintained at every customer site Each site has its unique software configuration including its main software version switch authorization and database as well as its specific Software Authorization Unit SAU information Copies of all system files exist and are available for use via the FMprog Utility if they are needed Use the FMprog Utility to m Manage your new database versions m Load the Coral generic version authorization and database information on to flash memory cards m Extract version authorization and database information from source files Removing the IMC8 IMC16 Card Before each installation or removal of an IMC8 card from the IPx Office unit press the RESET button on the front panel of the IPx Office unit To remove the IMC8 IMC 16 card from the IPx Office unit 1 Press the Reset button on the front panel of the IPx Office unit So E 20 gt un R aS Y S S 1 Press the Release button on the front panel of the IPx Office unit to remove the IMC8 IMC 16 card 4 2 Software Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Installing a
103. between peripheral ports and an outlet to the IP world The peripheral circuitry provides the hardware necessary to establish those connections Instructions from the common control to the peripheral circuitry and status information from the peripheral circuitry to the common control are passed through the group controller which provides driver and time slot interchange functions for the PCM highways and the HDLC channels The common control is further divided into shared service the group controller the main central processor connection to the IP and the MRC The shared service circuitry is integrated into the MR RMI U MR U RMI Office peripheral card which provides the equipment necessary to establish calls between peripheral interfaces The peripheral interface circuitry provides standardized electrical connections to external telephone station equipment and network facilities Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Major Features The unit houses all hardware components of the Coral IPx Office system including the power supply unit control cards peripheral cards service cards and I O connections In addition the unit Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Provides all the features capabilities interfaces and terminals of the Coral communication server Provides built in voice data convergence Provides built in functions See The Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Optimizes space utilizatio
104. card 8S Office and 8Fx Office cards on 8S Office board 16 ports total 85162 Office 2 3 4 5 8515 See Figure 10 19 on 10 39 Odd 16SFT Combination station card 8S Office and 16Fx Office cards on 8S Office board 24 ports total 20S office 2 3 4 5 20515 See Figure 10 18 on 10 38 Odd Combination station card 8S Office and 12Sx Office cards on 8S Office board 20 ports total NOTE Only one 20S Office card is allowed in a Coral IP Office main unit 8SFT office 2 3 4 5 Even 8SFT See Figure 10 11 on page 10 31 8 port 2 wire SFT Station FlexSet Terminal interface card Each of the circuits support Coral FlexSet GKT CPA DKT DST and APDL 16SFT office 2 3 4 5 Even 16SFT See Figure 10 12 on 10 32 Odd 16 port 2 wire SFT Station FlexSet Terminal interface card Each of the circuits support Coral FlexSet GKT CPA DKT DST and APDL 10 20 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IPx Office Service and Peripheral Card Types Card Name Card PI Slot Description Type Slot P TYPE 24SFT office Il 2 3 4 5 Even 24SFT See Figure 10 13 on page 10 33 24 port 2 wire SFT Station FlexSet Terminal interface card Each of the circuits support Coral FlexSet GKT CPA DKT DST and APDL 8T off
105. connectors misalign while attempting to insert the unit into the card cage If more than slight resistance is encountered partially slide out the card from the cage and verify the alignment of the guide ridges with the card edge guides If alignment appears to be correct remove the card from the slot and inspect the multi pin connectors for bent pins and debris in the pin holes 5 Secure the power supply unit to the cage with the two removable screws on the right and left of the front panel See Figure 7 6 The screws on the front panel must be tightened properly to prevent dangerous electrical shock D D 5 D 2 Q D S n Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 19 Operating the PS Office DC Follow these steps 1 Verify that the unit ground wire is connected and the ground nut is tightened See Figure 7 10 2 Verify that the power switch is in the OFF position turned downwards 3 Verify that the two removable screws the right and left side of the front panel of the power supply are tightened 4 Connect the DC cable supplied to the customer s DC power source as described in DC Powered Systems page 2 36 5 Insert the DC power input connector into the receptacle of the PS Office DC unit See Figure 7 10 6 Verify that the IMC8 card and the compact flash card if used are installed 7 In expansion cages make sure that at least one peripheral card is fully
106. define the relay dial number as the minor alarm situation destination MAJOR_RLY Use this parameter to define the relay dial number as the major alarm situation destination S lt 5 S 3 SS S lt e n n y S lt 9 96 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 6 External Connections Table 9 7 on page 9 17lists the function of each interface connector as they appear on the card front panel Figure 9 8 on page 9 17 illustrates that connector Dial Operated Accessory To operate external equipment the relay is assigned a dial access code Successive accesses alternately toggle the relay on and off Figure 9 34 illustrates a sample application Figure 9 34 Dial Operated Relay RLY3 Connections Contact Operated External Device Coral IPx Office U RMI Office Relay Contacts i 1 2 when P4 is connected between legs 2 3 3 4 when P4 is connected between legs 3 4 Major Minor Alarm Relays When programmed as a minor or major alarm indication the relay operates if the system fails to pass a diagnostic test This test falls under the corresponding alarm category The relay is released when the relay dial access code is dialed or when a subsequent execution of the diagnostic test that is issued the alarm is successfully passed Figure 9 35 illustrates a sample application Figure 9 35 Alarm Relay RLY3 Connections
107. displays the front panel of the PS Office AC The components located on the front panel are described in the following table Feature Description Power Switch Turns the unit ON or OFF WARNING Contact with live wires in the power supply unit could cause shock burn or death Do not remove the power supply from the IPx Office system when the Power switch is turned ON and power is connected Handle Used to pull the unit out of the card cage Left and Right Removable Used to secure the power supply to the unit These screws Screws also ground the unit to the cage and safeguard the unit against malfunction 100 240VAC Power Male connector used to connect the female AC power cord Outlet from the mains gt 5 T D 2 S o lt D E Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Power Supply 27 1 Figure 7 1 PS Office AC Front Panel OUTPUT 5 6A 6A PS Office AC 1 77440950200 INPUT 100 240Vac 2 2A 50 60H Handle di Removable screws PS Office AC Card Layout The PS Office AC card component side is shown in Figure 7 2 Five components are described in the following table D gt A 5 lt D 3 n 7 2 Power Supply Feature Power Output LED Indicator F1 Power Input Fuse FS2 Intermodule Fuse AC to DC Convertor Circuit Board DC to DC Convertor Circuit Board Connection
108. feature authorization information is installed updated into the IMC8 16 using FMprog PC utility Similarly the system database is regularly backed up to and may be transferred and restored from an IMC8 16 card housed in the IMC8 16 drive The Program Interface Facility The PI Program Interface and CoralVIEW CVA CVD provides a text based facility for reviewing and changing the system configuration and database It enables the performance and monitor of diagnostic routines The PI can be accessed either via a simple data terminal or by a personal computer The PI and CoralVIEW CVA CVD CVT can be accessed via an RS 232E data terminal port KB0 provided on the MCB Office front panel See Figure 8 2 5 Internet Protocol Gateway The internet protocol gateway embedded circuit provides the Coral IPx Office system with the ability to connect to the IP World Coral IP stations FlexSet IP 2808 FlexIP SoftPhone SIP and external telephony gateways Coral Teleport for analog SLTs and Loop Start Ground Start trunks receive their Coral signalling from the internet protocol gateway circuit The internet protocol gateway is the main Coral gateway to services offered on the enterprise network Voice calls maintained therein although controlled by the Coral are carried out entirely on the network when both ports involved are IP ports thereby allowing heavy traffic configurations The internet protocol gateway circuit is a Coral integrat
109. initialized properly 2 Insert the peripheral cards completely into their card slots See Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card page 3 10 Insert the cards fully one by one in sequential order slot 2 3 through slot 10 11 in adjacent card slots so that the S S S 23 D o S S 3 D S D installation corresponds with the uniform numbering plan See Figure 2 12 for the location of each peripheral card slot Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests gt 3 13 First Expansion Cage Initialization 1 Turn ON the power supply unit in the first expansion cage P NOTE E Turn on the power supply unit within the expansion cage only after powering the IPx Office unit and verifying that the control card has initialized properly otherwise the cards in the expansion cages may not initialize properly 2 Insert the peripheral cards completely into their card slots See Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card page 3 10 Insert the cards fully one by one from right to left slot 1 10 in adjacent card slots so that the installation corresponds with the uniform numbering plan 3 On the front panel of the power supply unit verify that the green power indicator is lit while the red alarm indicator is not lit Second Expansion Cage Initialization 1 Turn ON the power supply unit in the second expansion cage P NOTE E Turn on the power supply unit
110. installed Turn on the power supply units in the expansion cages only after powering the main cage and verifying that the main cage has initialized properly and the alarm indicator does not illuminate Otherwise the cards in the peripheral expansion cages might not initialize 8 Turn the PS Office DC power switch ON Verify that the green power indicator on the front panel of the IPx Office unit is lit 9 Turn the power switch OFF Figure 7 10 Office PS Office DC Connection DC power wires To facilities DC power source Ground wire To master ground 5 S S 29 Q Q S 2 S WY 29 slots 2 3 e slots 4 5 5 slots 6 7 slots 10 11 slots 8 9 e slot 1 7 20 Power Supply Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Removing the Power Supply 1 Locate a desk or table top If the surface can be damaged by sharp objects place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar material over the top surface 1 Turn the PS Office DC power switch OFF turn the switch downwards 2 Remove the DC power input connector See Figure 7 10 Do not remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON Sudden power surges could damage system components Before extracting the PS Office AC card verify that the power switch is turned OFF 3 Unfasten the two captive screws located at the top and bottom of the unit s front
111. is absent entirely If however the Coral determines that the SAU is missing or not correct a message appears during the procedure warning that the system will not operate without the proper SAU This provision allows the generic feature software and or feature authorizations to be upgraded on an IMCS card in another distant system then installed at the proper system by replacing the existing IMC8 card from the other distant system containing the upgrade 4 Upgrading the UGW Software D 20 N gt un R Y S 4 4 Software Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual System Database Control During normal system operation the configuration database may be saved to a file on the IMC8 IMC 16 card for permanent storage The system may also be programmed to save the database to IMC8 IMC16 automatically on a daily basis at a particular time A saved database file may be loaded at any time into the system database memory This is a way to restore the database into the RAM of a new MCB Office and DBM X control card Once the database in the system has been constructed copy the database onto the IMC8 IMC 16 card For more detailed information see Chapter 21 of the Program Interface Reference Manual 1 Accessing the Database Flash Menu 1 Ifa session has not already been established establish a PI programming session by entering a PI password 1 Select
112. is long enough to reach its designated card connection on the rear panel of the unit Verify that each cable is attached to the correct connection 3 For each connector used on the peripheral cards fabricate cables of the length determined above with a suitable connector on one end 4 Carefully route the connector end of the first cable to the rear panel of the unit For each installed card insert the cable connector firmly onto the IPx Office I O connector on the peripheral card See Figure 3 3 for the cage MDF connection 5 Connect the the I O connections to the MDF in accordance with the instructions provided by your MDF manufacturer 6 For information on external connections for peripheral card connection information pinouts refer to m Direct Pinout of the Champ Card Connection page 5 23 or m Direct Pinout of the MDF Connection page 5 25 5 S S o a 7 For information on protection devices refer to Protection Devices page 5 11 for the surge arrestor mounting procedure Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests 3 15 8 For information about peripheral device hardware connections refer to Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual 9 For information on how to install the expansion cages refer to the Chapter 3 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual and or Coral IPx 800 Installation Procedure and Hardware R
113. lt RLY2 PAGE UNA or Central Bell Incoming Call Figure 9 26 Relay Contacts 3 4 BELL RELAY Selection P4 Jumper Setting Relay Contacts 3 4 Function P4 110 i 6 P5 RLY2 BELL 21 3 5 P4 RLY3 RELAY o N 553 o o o o 9 86 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 4 Database Programming The Central Bell UNA requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required for the feature The following parameters must be set to enable the paging feature 1 Card List Route CLIS Card type must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 5 General Numbering Plan Route NPL 0 11 Ckt 24 Use the field 11 Bell of the Update menu to designate dial numbers to the UNA bell ports in the system Refer to Chapter 5 Numbering Plan in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details 6 Port List Route PLIS Port type must show UNA in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 24 Use this field to assign a short full name to this port If you choose 0 Physical Location type Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 24 If you choose 1 Dial Number choose field 7 BELL Refer to Chapter 6 System Port List in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more d
114. numbers to which power fail trunks are transferred must be entered in the system database Refer to Power Fail Trunk Definition in Chapter 8 of the Program Interface Reference Manual for more information Power Failure Trunk Definition Route TRK 4 FROM TO DIAL Enter the required range of Loop Start analog trunks DEST Set this parameter to determine the power fail station system dial number to be connected to the trunk during power failure Figure 5 5 Power Fail Wiring to Single Line Telephone Set PSTN Central Office Lightning Protection Trunk circuit Loop Start with PF option 4T Office 4T CID Office 8T Office 8T CID Office Coral IPx Office system 45 Office 8S Office 205 Office Modular Jack E gt E a S S Y S 00 2500 ingle Line Set 192 5 16 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Data Communication Ports RS 232E The Coral IPx Office switching system is capable of switching digital data information as well as voice signals Coral IPx Office system data communication devices are available for packet switched data for low volume applications The packet data communication devices are provided using the APA Application Processor Adapter or APDL Applications Processor Data Link The data communication devices provide a serial interface wired as Data Communication Equipment DCE That is transmit data is data
115. panel See Figure 7 5 WARNING Contact with live wires in the power supply unit could cause shock burn or death Do not remove the power supply from the IPx Office system when the power switch is turned ON and power is connected 4 Unfasten the two removable screws on the front panel of the PS Office AC and safeguard them for future reassembly See Figure 7 1 5 Carefully remove the PS Office AC from its slot 6 Place the PS Office AC over the anti static material with the component side facing upwards 4 Troubleshooting The PS Office DC unit does not include an alarm LED indicator The front panel of the IPx Office unit includes eight 8 diagnostic LED indicators For information on troubleshooting see Figure 6 3 page 6 3 Power supply failure generally results in the loss of one or more output voltages However protection circuitry in the power supply regulator may shut down a regulator due to a current overload caused by an external fault maintenance activities are to be carried out by a qualified service technician If the power supply is turned ON and power is not present in the system check the following m AC power cord See Figure 7 5 m AC power failure Blown main or circuit fuse breaker in the building electrical panel m Faulty PS Office AC Blown fuse FSI or F2 on the PS Office AC Replace fuse as described on Replacing the PS Office AC Fuses page 7 10 gt 5 T D
116. peripheral interface cards that will be inserted into card slots 1 through 12 Observe any order previously directed by a system designer or any established convention of the distributor Card placement diagrams Figure 2 15 through Figure 2 16 may be used as a worksheet by the system designer to establish card placement prior to installation Refer to Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual Section 2 and Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual If no other convention exists plan the card placement as follows m Ina system with one expansion cage insert a shared service card into slot 1 of the expansion cage m Ina system with two IPx 800 expansion cages insert a PX card into slot 1 of the first expansion cage and insert a shared service card into slot 1 of the second expansion cage m Insert the digital trunk interface cards into slots 4 and 5 of the designated cage s Slots 4 and 5 are wired as the secondary and primary external clock source respectively The cards inserted in these slots can be used to synchronize the Coral system clock with a network clock signal via a digital trunk circuit Refer to Digital Trunk Synchronization page 10 9 and Coral Synchronization via Digital Trunks section in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual for more information on synchronization m Insert peripheral cards into slots 2 through 12 of the expansion cages 8 Remove the peripheral interface cards from their ship
117. refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual for further details 3 10 Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 5 Attach the Program Interface PI device cable to KB0 programming port connector on the front panel of the IPx Office unit if not already attached The installation of shared service and peripheral interface cards into a Coral system has considerable impact on the system database Refer to Chapter 6 of the Program Interface amp Database Reference Manual for more information Using the PI verify that each of the parameters detailed below contain the appropriate information 6 Access the card list branch of the PI Route CLIS to verify that the cards are properly recognized and initialized by the IPx Office MCB Office processor The following table appears on the PI terminal shelf slot I P_TYPE CDB version subversion status 1 SLOT No NAME CARD NAME XXX ACTIVE The following is an explanation of the CLIS fields Shelf Number The IPx Office unit is designated shelf 1 the first expansion cage is labeled shelf 2 the second expansion cage is labeled shelf 3 Slot Number Identifies the slot location of the indicated card for display In the IPx Office unit the range of slot numbers is 2 11 in the expansion cage the range of slot numbers is 1 10 P NOTE E There are five physical card slots l
118. small networking currents must also carry unwanted radio frequency energy impulse noise and lightening surges that might otherwise interfere with system operation The ground connection includes an M4 threaded terminal pole that is fixed onto the surface of the rear panel by the manufacturer a serrated washer between each terminal connection a flat washer and an M4 nut Electrical Hazard Incorrect ground wire connections to the system can cause shock burn or death Verify that the ground wires 10 AWG stranded conductor Verify that all ground connections are made directly from the cage ground connection to the master ground not interconnect cage ground terminals between the Coral units Ring terminals retain wires onto the terminal lug when the connection is loosened Verify that all ground wires include ring terminals at both ends only a Protective Earth PE to the Coral system Do not connect a separate Telecommunications Reference Conductor TRC Resistance from the master ground to the building electrical ground should never exceed 1 0 ohm The master ground bar should be located in the switching room as close as possible to the Coral system Any ground connection of equipment related to the switching Coral system should ultimately connect to the master ground A 5 Ry 2 18 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Ma
119. that is sent to the APA APDL and receive data is data that is received from the device The APA provides a proprietary data link to an external applications processor The link uses an asynchronous RS 232E V 24 serial data interface operating at a data rate of up to 19 2Kbps The interface appears at an RJ 45 jack connector on the rear panel of the and FlexSet 280S 281S APDL with APA or PEX APA Through the link a proprietary signaling protocol allows the Coral system master processor to send call status messages to the applications processor and the applications processor to send call control instructions to the APA APDL Application processors available for the Coral system include the Computerized Attendant Position CAP the ACD group supervisor and management position Coral CallMaster CCM Coral World Wide Office WWO TAPIdriver GKT PC Utility or any other application that complies with proprietary API products Use the following RS 232 cables m Catalog no 7244 6914055 for FlexSet 280S 281S APDL with APA or PEX APA with APA or FlexSet 80 GKT Figure 5 6 lists the pin designations for the RS 232 interface of the APA APDL For more information refer to the Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual External Connections 29 17 N e A n 8 S ta S 2 3 E o S 5 Q Figure 5 6 FlexSet 80 2805 2815 APDL
120. the database in accordance with the procedure provided in System Database Control page 4 5 n E gt n R N S E S oo 8 34 j Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Removing the IMC8 16 The IMC8 16 release button enables the removal of the IMC8 16 card Before each removal of an IMC8 16 card press the RESET button When replacing an IMC8 16 card with another card that contains upgraded software the new card will not contain a database It is therefore important to make a binary backup of the database before removing the card See the Database Binary Backup PC Utility Reference Manual for further details n M n Ry E S Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 35 4 Specifications Storage Capacity 8 388 608 Bytes 8MB Memory Configuration 16 bits asi Standard Compatible n E M n R N E S oo 8 36 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual n X n 3 5 oo Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 2 8 37 n lt el 3 oo oO 8 38 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Compact Flash Disk 1 Introduction
121. the Database Flash Menu Route ROOT 0 10 2 2 branch The Database Flash menu appears as follows FLASH MENU SAVE LOAD DBS SHOW FILE INFO AUTO BACKUP ERASE E ta D n 3 S S Q S N 2 a Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Software Installation Procedure 4 5 5 5 YV S lt 5 Q S x 2 29 Saving to 8 or IMC16 The Database Save feature allows the system database to be copied to IMCS at any time The procedure is as follows 1 Verify that the system time and date are correct press Control T to check Update through the Time and Date branch Route TIME of the system database if necessary 2 From the Database Flash menu press 0 to save the database to a file on the IMCS card The system prompts for the selection of a destination file number either DBO DEF or DB1 DEF with DEST FILE 0 1 0 The DBO DEF file may be saved automatically at a preset time each day and so is usually more up to date than the DB1 DEF file See Automatic Daily Backup page 4 11 The DBI DEF file is referred to as the technician s copy of the database and should be saved each time installation or maintenance personnel make changes to the database 3 Press O or 1 according to the table below to begin saving the system database to a file The default entry is 0 or DBO DEF Database File Name PI Entry File Description DBO DEF Backup automatically at a pres
122. the technician to plan accordingly when configuring the URC configurations A maximum of 120 Time Slots is allowed per URC2 card Therefore the Full Assembly is never used Allocate your resources such that you use a maximum of 120 Time Slots For example increasing the number of 3 way circuits forces you to decrease one or more of the other resources Table 9 11 defaults per URC2 Resource TM Default Max ae pus Configuration per eeded per Resource Type Full 5 See Table Assembly CKT Max Time Slots CKTs Needed DTMF Receiver 24 1 24 1x24 Table 9 13 on page 26 DTR CONF Meet Me 6 16 2 16x2 Table 9 15 on page 28 3 WAY 24 4 8 4x8 Table 9 16 on page 29 3 R Caller ID CID 32 1 16 1x16 Table 9 17 on page 30 N DTD 32 1 16 1x16 Table 9 18 on page 32 N TOTAL 118 66 120 D 2 5 Shared Service Cards 29 23 Feature Authorization Route FEAT 1 m URCDIME URCCLID 3WAY CONF Separate Software Authorization is required to allocate the resources Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 3 Feature Authorization URC Configuration NUMBER OF RESOURCES Route CDB 11 DTMF m Meet Me m 3WAY CID DTD URC Card DB GAIN Route CDB 11 2 The Gains may be adjusted in this branch and not in the Feature Control branch as with other cards m DTMF GAIN m DTD GAIN URC Card DB Meet Me Conference Route CDB 11 2
123. times per second This rate matches both A u law PCM voice transmission rates to facilitate complete digital integration with the local telephone network The time switching matrix acting on command by the system processor is responsible for forwarding PCM voice samples from an incoming transmit time slot assigned to one port to a complementary outgoing receive time slot for the recipient port Using Time Slots A call between two ports requires one transmit and one receive time slot on a single peripheral highway Therefore the group controller is capable of establishing calls between any 1000 time slots and any other 1000 time slots This switching matrix allows for a Constant Frame Delay operation mode S S X 5 D S Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 13 2 Software Authorization Management The MCB Office supervises the feature authorization using the SAU Software Authorization Unit lock device The SAU is a small encapsulated device that is plugged into a connector on the left side of the MCB Office Figure 8 5 illustrates four views of the SAU The SAU enables a set of permissions and feature authorizations associated with its unique identification number The Coral software detects and verifies the permission settings of the SAU on the control card MCB Office enabling the system to function properly The SAU provides the system ident
124. to Backplane Description Indicates whether the 48VDC power output is operational A 5A 250V slow blow fuse that protects the input voltage See Replacing the PS Office AC Fuses page 7 10 A 5A 250V slow blow fuse that protects the DC voltage after conversion from AC See The PS Office AC includes two fuses page 7 10 Circuit board that houses the module responsible for converting the AC input voltage to 48 VDC Circuit board that houses the module responsible for converting the 48 VDC output to the other voltage levels Connects the power supply to the cage backplane Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 7 2 PS Office AC Card Layout y 48V power output LED indicator DC to DC converter circuit board F2 Intermodule fuse 5A 250V S B AC to DC converter circuit board TALL 111 Do FS1 Power input fuse 5A 250V S B Figure 7 8 PS Office AC Card Rear View 48V output AC to DC converter LED indicator circuit board Backplane DC to DC converter Connector circuit board D D 5 5 un D 2 x D S WY lt Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 3 D gt A 5 lt D 3 n 2 Circuit Description The PS Office AC includes an AC to DC converter to produce 48V and a DC
125. to be cooled effectively the cool ambient air must be drawn in from the left panel only Operating the IPx Office unit while the cover is not closed will cause the cool air to be drawn into the fans from above bypassing the internal circuitry of the unit Heat buildup within the unit could cause damage to the system Do not operate the unit before closing the cover Figure 6 12 Heat Flow Schematic Cover open cool air bypasses system components Cover closed cool air is forced over system components 6 18 Cage Description Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cooling Fans The unit includes three fans mounted inside the left panel of the unit They draw cool ambient air in from the right panel of the unit that cools the internal components of the IPx Office unit and and then expel the warm exhaust air from the left panel of the unit The fans can be replaced when necessary P NOTE E When one fan needs to be replaced replace the other fans as well Removing a Fan 1 Figure 6 13 Fan Dismounting Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Open the IPx Office unit cover See Figure 6 13 and Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 Remove the fan power wires from its connector on the MBP Office Release the top fan plugs from the fan and the MBP Office and the bottom fan plugs from the IPx Office unit holes 1 Disconnect fan wires from connector Release bottom fan plugs from unit Cage
126. to the rack 2 14 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual IPx Office Unit Mounted onto Rack Figure 2 5 Fasten support brackets to rear side y Lift unit and fasten SOOOGODOOOOOSe 9 SIDOOODUODUT uo v1su juaudinby Hardware Installation Procedure gt 2 15 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Dismounting the IPx Office Unit from the Rack 1 Turn OFF ON OFF switch on the PS Office unit 2 Do one of the following m For DC powered systems shut down the facilities power supply unit that supplies power to the system and disconnect the DC power connector from the PS Office DC power supply unit m For AC powered systems disconnect the AC power cable Electrical Hazard This procedure requires handling power wires Contact with live cables could cause shock burn or death Verify that no power cables are connected to the system before handling and that the power switch is OFF 3 Disconnect all I O cables from the rear panel 4 Disconnect the ground wire from the unit ground terminal Do not disconnect the ground connection from the master ground 5 Unfasten the four screws that secure the unit to the rack on each side of the unit WARNING Ergonomic Hazard The cage weights are provided in Table 2 2 on page 2 3 Serious back injury could result as a result of improper handling Use proper lifting techniques to remove the unit from the rack 6 Remove the
127. top section of the first expansion cage 2 Plug the female end of the H500 1 cable into the male D type connector labeled FROM CONTROL UNIT OR FIRST EXPANSION UNIT located in the top section of the second expansion cage 3 Tighten the screws on both sides of the cable to secure it S E 5 5 Saj Defining Expansion Cage Numbers Skip to Strapping the Configuration J umpers page 2 23 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure gt 2 33 12 Installing the DC Power Supply This section describes how to insert the DC power supply card into its slot The IPx Office unit is shipped from the manufacturer with the AC power supply installed If a DC power supply is to be installed remove the existing AC power supply and insert the DC power supply in its place See Figure 2 17 and Figure 2 18 for power supply placement in the IPx Office unit Circuit cards contain static sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by electro static discharge ESD Always wear a static dissipating wrist strap connected to the unit while handling circuit cards See Figure 2 11 on page 2 24 Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces Handle with care and do not drop 1 Verify that the IPx Office is properly grounded See Ground Wiring page 2 18 2 Verify that the power switch is turned OFF downwards See Figure 2 17 3 Grasp the power supply horizonta
128. unit from the rack using proper lifting techniques A 5 Ry 2 16 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 2 6 Removing IPx Office Unit from Rack Y n Y z Unfasten screws from front bracket ONIN um um Remove unit from rack ji ra wu wu ua E 8 S S YV 5 ky Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 17 8 Ground Wiring Proper system grounding is critical to reliable system operation System grounding is only as effective as the ground point itself To ensure adequate protection from interference by radio frequency energy electrical impulse noise and lightening or power line surge the building electrical ground point must comply with grounding recommendations of the National Area Code Article 800 and or applicable local building and electrical codes The object of ground circuit design is to establish a low resistance path to the ground and to conduct a multitude of currents in such a way as to minimize the interaction of any two or more currents In essence the ground connection is used as a common conductor for many circuits some carrying wanted signals and others carrying unwanted signals The same ground that carries
129. used 55 9 28 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Table 9 16 URC Three Way Conference C3WAY PI Configuration URC Configuration PI Route DTB 11 PI Route PLIS Total pu Time Slots Shelf Slo Ckt Dial No NL Needed 1 4 1 7 56 C3WAY 2 8 1 T 57 C3WAY 3 12 1 7 58 C3WAY 4 16 1 7 59 C3WAY 5 20 1 7 60 C3WAY 6 24 1 7 61 C3WAY T 28 1 7 62 C3WAY 8 32 1 7 63 C3WAY 9 36 1 7 64 C3WAY 10 40 1 7 65 C3WAY 11 44 1 7 66 C3WAY 12 48 1 7 67 C3WAY 13 52 1 7 68 C3WAY 14 56 1 7 69 C3WAY 15 60 1 7 70 C3WAY 16 64 1 7 71 C3WAY 17 68 1 7 72 C3WAY 18 72 1 7 73 C3WAY 19 76 1 7 74 C3WAY 20 80 1 7 75 C3WAY 21 84 1 7 76 C3WAY 22 88 1 7 TI C3WAY 23 92 1 7 78 C3WAY 24 96 1 7 79 C3WAY The ports listed above the double line indicate the default range See Table 9 11 on page 9 23 Shared Service Cards 9 29 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Cards U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Cards Table 9 17 URC iDSP CID Caller ID Transmitters PI Configuration URC Configuration PI Route DTB 11 PI Route PLIS
130. with live wires could cause shock burn and death Do not open the Coral IPx Office cover before removing power from the system 2 If necessary remove the unit cover See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 Verify that the hard disk if supplied and the MRC are installed 4 Unfasten the three three M3 screws and remove the washers that are already on the MCB Office card Safeguard them for re assembly See Figure 11 4 Mount the NTU Office card onto the MCB Office n 6 Fasten the NTU Office card to the MCB Office with the three screws and washers removed in Step 4 7 Connect all cables connected to the NTU Office card including the line harness the USB cable the reset button harness and the power harness 8 Turn ON the NTU Office card ON OFF switch lt gt For a description of external LAN WAN printer connections see LAN WAN and Printer Connections page 5 35 5 n E E D S E z 11 10 System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Figure 11 4 NTU Office Card Fasteners Three M3 screws m for fastneing NTU Office card Figure 11 5 NTU Office Card Assembly MBP Office card MCB Office card Power harness
131. within the expansion cage only after powering the IPx Office unit and the first expansion cage and verifying that the control cards have initialized properly otherwise the cards in the second expansion cage may not initialize 2 Insert the peripheral cards completely into their card slots See Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card page 3 10 Insert the cards fully one by one from right to left slot 1 10 in adjacent card slots so that the installation corresponds with the uniform numbering plan 3 On the front panel of the power supply unit verify that the green power indicator is lit while the red alarm indicator is not lit 2 852 15 E O D 3 D 5 D X D 3 14 j Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 10 Cable Installation The I O cables are connected to the cage after all the corresponding cards are in place 1 Determine the route of Input Output I O cables from the MDF to the I O connectors of the relevant peripheral cards If required measure the longest distance from an I O connector on the card cage to the corresponding cable punch block if such blocks are installed on the MDF 2 For each peripheral card that includes a Champ M connector fabricate cables of the length determined above with a male 25 pair connector on one end for each I O connector on the cards P X NOTE E Each I O cable must be fabricated such that it
132. 0 defines the position of P2 for the music selection M2 P Paging External music External music M2 P connector can be used as voice paging output The selection between the external music source or voice paging output is accomplished by P3 Jumper located on the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards See Figure 9 15 Table 9 21 defines the position of P3 for the music selection Shared Service Cards 29 69 m 3 T 9 S S S 9 m s 2 5 S E S S 5 3 re o 5 5 3 Configuring the Music M1 J umper to External or Internal The system music source M1 may be either from an internal or an external source Figure 9 13 displays the jumper settings for the source type Table 9 20 1 Internal External Selection P2 Jumper Setting Figure 9 12 Music 1 Simplified Diagram Figure 9 13 Music 1 Internal External Selection P2 Jumper Setting PCM Bus Digital Analog Converter P2 1 2 2 3 1 Internal External External Connectors Internal Music Source INTERNAL EXTERNAL M1 Music 1 Function P2 1 Internal Music 2 3 1 External Music 2 9 70 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual i P6 P5 o o o oj Stereo Phone Jack External Source 4
133. 00 bps m 1 remote maintenance modem V 92 ITU T standard to 56Kbps 8DRCM IPx 800X discontinued Same as 8DRCF but with Bell 103 212A or ITU V 21 V 22 300 1200bps remote maintenance modem 8DTD IPx 800X discontinued 8 circuit DialTone Detector and call progress tone analyzer Shared Service Cards 9 3 E S w S 5 5 v E S S E 8 5 S 5 3 E 5 E 9 un un Card Cage Description 8DTR IPx 800X 8 circuit DTMF Receiver and decoder card CNF IPx 800X Dual 15 party or eight 3 way digital Conference Bridge card One card required for each mode 2 x 15 party or 8 x 3 way iDSP IPx 800X FSK tone generator card Required for displaying Caller ID for SLT users 16MFR IPx 800X 16 MFC tone dialing Receiver circuits RMI IPx 800X discontinued Includes the following functions m 1 internal or external music interface m 1 external music interface m 1 external voice paging interface or public address and relay contacts 1 auxiliary or major minor alarm relay contacts 1 universal night answer or central bell relay contacts 3 RS 232C programming maintenance interfaces 300 to 9 600 bps m 1 Bell 103 212A or ITU V 21 V 22 300 1200bps remote maintenance modem These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Shared Service cards may be installed in any av
134. 16 5 24 Table 5 10 Block 66 MDF Pinout 4 8 205 8 16 24SFT 5 25 Table 5 11 Block 66 MDF Pinout 4S8F 4516 858 8S16F 5 26 Table 5 12 4T 4T CID Office Pinout i 5 28 Table 5 13 8T 8T CID Office Pinout i 5 29 Table 5 14 4TBR Office ui e 5 30 Table 5 15 UDT Office PRI 23 T1 Pinout 1 ii 5 31 Table 5 16 PRI 30 Office Pinout i 5 32 Table 5 17 30 Tv Office ruit Rail 5 33 Table 5 18 LAN WAN uuu a 5 38 Table 6 1 Front Panel Features 6 3 Table 6 2 Blank Panel Description 6 16 Table 6 3 IPx Office System Configuration Options nnne 6 23 Table 6 4 Number of Universal I O Slots per System Configuration 2 6 24 Table 6 5 IPx Office System Expansion Options nennen nen 6 30 Table 6 6 Timeslot Distribution in Coral IPx Office Main 6 34 Table 6 7 Timeslot Distribution in IPx Office Expansion Cages i 6 35 Table 8 1 RS 232E Interface Pin Functions enne 8 18 Table 8 2 UGW RS 232E Interface Pin Functions sess 8 19 Table 8 3 Assembly Parts Used MRC Assembly 8 29 Table 8 4 Assembly Parts Used in
135. 2 requires IPx 800X expansion cage 3 lt M1 M2 Music On Hold and Background Music Uses Music On Hold MOH s Background Music Capacitor coupled transformer non grounded Impedance 6000 Nominal Input Level 15 dBm Nominal E MUSIC Connectors le Connector Type Stereo 3 5 mm phone plug 3 5 S a 5 Shared Service Cards 29 75 m S S T 5 R S R 3 4 2 S lt lt 9 5 9 76 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Voice Paging Public Address and Relay 1 Public Address Introduction The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards provide one external paging interface public address one port Station users can access an external voice paging system connected to the Coral IPx Office by dialing access code Circuit Description Figure 9 17 15 a simplified circuit diagram of the Paging Interfaces and the relay contacts Each U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office or MR Office card provides one paging output the external voice paging port operates by using both the relay circuit RLY 1 and the PAGE circuit The PAGE circuit is used for public address The External Paging PAGE Interface is electrically identical to the Music interfaces Audio signals from the system are passed through the audio coupling transformer t
136. 20 45 Yellow Slate 519 19 5 21 46 Violet Blue A B20 22 47 Violet Orange A B21 23 48 Violet Green A B22 24 49 Violet Brown A B23 25 50 Violet Slate P S o S External Connections 2 5 25 Table 5 11 displays the pinout connection on the block 66 MDF connection for the 4S8F Office 45162 Office 8S8F Office and 8S16F Office peripheral cards Table 5 11 Block 66 MDF Pinout 4S8F Pin Color 4S8F Office 4S16F Office 8S8F Office 8S16F Office 4S16F 8S8F 8S16F 4S 8Fx 4S 16Fx 8S 8Fx 8S 16Fx 1 26 White Blue 50 50 50 50 2 27 White Orange SI 51 51 51 3 28 White Green 52 S2 S2 S2 4 29 White Brown S3 S3 S3 S3 5 30 White Slate S4 S4 6 31 Red Blue S5 S5 7 32 Red Orange S6 S6 8 33 Red Green S7 S7 9 34 Red Brown A BO A BO A BO 10 35 Red Slate 1 1 1 1 11 36 Black Blue A B2 A B2 A B2 A B2 12 37 Black Orange A B3 13 38 Black Green A B4 A B4 A B4 A B4 14 39 Black Brown A B5 A B5 A B5 A B5 15 40 Black Slate A B6 A B6 A B6 A B6 16 41 Yellow Blue A B7 A B7 A B7 A B7 17 42 Yellow Orange A B8 A B8 18 43 Yellow Green A B9 A B9 19 44 Yellow Brown A B10 A B10 20 45 Yellow Slate A B11 A B11 21 46 Violet Blue A B12 A B12 22 47 Violet Orange A B13 A B13 23 48 Violet Green A B14 A B14 24 49 Violet Brown A B15 A B15 25 50 Violet Slate O D 3
137. 24 ports total 8 SLT and 16 SFT The 16Fx Office expansion piggyback optional card adds 16 SFT ports to the 4S Office and 8S Office cards See Figure 10 25 on page 10 45 n ES RS S 29 S S N ES un Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 23 Table 10 6 U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office features Features U RMI 0 RMI MR 1 internal or external music interface e e e e 1 external music interface or 1 external voice paging interface or public address and relay contacts 1 auxiliary or major minor alarm relay contacts 1 universal night answer UNA or central bell relay contacts m 2relay contacts 1 remote maintenance modem V 92 ITU T e e standard up to 56Kbps m 16 DTD circuit dial tone detector and call e e progress tone analyzer 32 24 circuit receiver and decoder card for touch tone digits max 24 m Eight 3 way conference max 24 m Meet me bridge conference for 14 parties max 6 m 16 Caller ID circuit transmitters adapted to Bellcore standards which includes the time and Caller Name Num display max 32 Required for the 4 8T CID Office card NOTE Separate authorization SAU is required to allocate the DTMF DTR 3 way and conference circuits supported by the URC NOTE max The maximum number for the resources is dependant on the num
138. 3 Use the 12 Page field of the PI in the Update Menu to designate dial numbers to the Public Address Page in the system Refer to Chapter 5 Numbering Plan in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details Port List Route PLIS Port type must show PAGE in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 23 Use this field to assign a short full name to this port If you choose 0 Physical Location type Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 23 If you choose 1 Dial Number choose field 6 PAGE Refer to Chapter 6 System Port List in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for more details Special Port Facilities Route PDB 5 Use this field to assign this port to a specific tenant group Refer to Chapter 23 Public Address Page in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for more details Class Of Service Route COS 0 PAGE Use the PAGE parameter to determine whether a specific station user is allowed to dial and access the External Voice Paging system Refer to Chapter 7 Station and Trunk COS in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for more details Shared Service Cards 9 81 nm 5 S 2 5 3 m 5 Re S nm nm 5 S gt 5 R x do 5 S 2 6 External Connections Each U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office or MR Office card provides a voice page interface for external paging and
139. 8 Type I B Half sized panel used to cover slot 2 3 and 4 5 77444000069 Type 1 Half sized panel used to cover slot 2 3 and 4 5 CLE Electrical Hazard Contact with live internal components could cause shock burn or death During system operation peripheral card slots that are not occupied must be protected by a blank panel Other problems likely to be caused by not covering an empty slot with a panel include m Rendering the system susceptible to RFI disturbances m Increasing the risk of damage to the system caused by the influx of electrostatically charged dust and particles m Poor aesthetic appearance 2 ta oh n 3 2 S 6 16 Cage Description Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 6 11 Office Halt Size with Blank Panels I A Type I B e 1 Full Size Type II S 5 o E 5 3 D S D Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cage Description gt 6 17 S S amp o a un 3 D S S 5 Heat Removal Heat 15 removed from the IPx Office unit by forced convection Three DC fans mounted on the inside of the right panel draw cool ambient air from the left side of the unit The cool air absorbs the heat from the circuitry inside of the unit and is then expelled through the fans via the right panel In order for the unit
140. 9 11 Remote Maintenance 9 61 9 12 Data Seral POMS ARS 9 67 9 13 MUSIE S 21 26 9 69 9 14 Voice Paging Public Address and Relay 1 9 77 Relay 2 9 85 6 Accessory OF Alami R elays3 umanuan 9 91 9 99 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 1 3 Shared Service Circuitry Installation General Description The shared service circuits provide functions such as media gateway MG channels dial and call progress detection MF tone dialing reception multi party conferencing and more Shared service circuits reside on the peripheral bus but do not provide a physical interface to external devices such as stations and trunks Shared Service Cards in the Main Unit The Coral IPx Office main unit is equipped with the following shared service cards m One MRC module optional One of the following four OFFICE cards U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office or MR Office The main shared service functions of these cards are described in Table 9 1 Card Handling Procedures For card handling procedures and general installation procedure see Peripheral Card Installation page 10 1 MRC Cards Shared service circuits in the MRC cards are embedded in DSP units The MRC module is a daughter board installed on the MCB Office card in a piggyback fashion See
141. 9 62 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Database Programming This function requires installation of an additional jumpers P5 and P6 pins 1 and 2 must be connected on the U RMI Office and RMI Office cards Described on page 9 61 The Modem requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required for the modem When the modem exists and is initialized the PI shows 1 Card List Route CLIS Card type must show RMI F in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 1 Port List Route PLIS Port type must show MODEM in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 26 Use this field to assign a short full name to this port If you choose 0 Physical Location type Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 26 If you choose 1 Dial Number choose field 5 MODEM Refer to Chapter 6 System Port List in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details 2 General Numbering Plan Route NPL 0 13 Ckt 26 Use the 13 MODEM field of the Update Menu to designate dial numbers to the modem ports in the system Refer to Chapter 5 Numbering Plan in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details 2 Special Port Facilities Route PDB 6 Use this field to assign this port to a specific tenant group Refer to Chapter 23 RMI Modem in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manu
142. A D 2 Q D S n Figure 7 7 PS Office DC Card Layout F1 Power input fuse 6 3V 250V S B Figure 7 8 DC Power Supply Rear View Backplane Connector 5 2 3 n D S 2 A D z n 7 16 Power Supply Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Circuit Description Figure 7 9 presents a block diagram of the PS Office DC power supply Power Input Section The DC input includes a passive filter inrush current and a power switch The DC input is protected against reverse polarity DC Output Power The DC to DC converters convert the 48VDC power to the following outputs m 5 m 3 3VDC m 48VDC 48VDC Output Power The PS Office DC also filters and limits the 48 VDC input to feed the peripheral card slots Ripple and Noise Filtering circuitry minimizes ripple and noise on the 48VDC feed to the peripheral cards The filtering circuitry produces an output voltage that is approximately 0 5V to 1 0V lower than the input voltage VIN to the PS Office DC If the voltage input is less than 38 0 5 or greater than 58 0 5VDC then the power supply shuts down The power supply will turn on when the voltage is less than 58 0 5 or greater than 45 0 5VDC D gt A D 2 Q D S n Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Power Supply 7 17
143. Alarm Device Coral IPx Office U RMI Office Relay Contacts 1 2 when P4 is connected between legs 2 3 8 4 when P4 is connected between legs 3 4 Shared Service Cards 29 97 E lt S RE ES 5 n S D 5 lt S e S nm nm D lt 7 Relay Electrical Limitations The relay contacts have specific electrical limitations See Relay Contacts on page 9 99 Do not exceed these limitations In addition the type of load the relay contact operates can have a great significance 8 Additional RLY3 Contacts in the Optional IPx 800X Cage Additional relay contacts for major and minor alarm or accessory interface may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes one auxiliary or major minor alarm relay contacts among other functions These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 9 Specifications RELAY Number of Circuits E lt S 5 5 U RMI Office 1 0 when Page and Bell UNA are used S gt U MR Office card 1 0 when Page and Bell UNA are used RMI Office card 1 0 when Page and Bell UNA are used gt MR Office card 1 0 when Page and Bell UNA are used 3 SDRCF card
144. B9 B9 19 ATO A10 S 44 B10 B10 2 20 ATI ATI 45 B11 B11 21 12 12 S 46 B12 B12 E 22 A13 A13 S 47 B13 B13 23 14 14 48 B14 B14 24 A15 A15 5 49 B15 B15 O 25 50 5 24 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Direct Pinout of the Connection Table 5 10 displays the pinout connection on the block 66 MDF connection for the 4S Office 8S Office 20S Office 8SFT Office 16SFT Office and 24SFT Office peripheral cards Table 5 10 Block 66 MDF Pinout 4 8 20S Pin Color 45 8S 20SOffice 8SFT 16SFT 24SFT 8 16 24SFT Office Office 8S 12Sx Office Office Office 1 26 White Blue S0 S0 S0 A BO A BO A BO 2 27 White Orange 51 51 51 1 1 1 3 28 White Green S2 S2 S2 A B2 A B2 A B2 4 29 White Brown S3 S3 S3 A B3 A B3 A B3 5 30 White Slate S4 S4 4 4 4 6 31 Red Blue S5 S5 A B5 A B5 A B5 7 32 Red Orange S6 S6 A B6 A B6 A B6 8 33 Red Green S7 S7 A B7 A B7 A B7 9 34 Red Brown S8 A B8 A B8 10 35 Red Slate S9 A B9 A B9 11 36 Black Blue 510 10 10 12 37 Black Orange 511 11 11 13 38 Black Green 512 12 A B12 14 39 Black Brown 513 A B13 A B13 15 40 Black Slate 514 14 A B14 5 16 41 Yellow Blue 515 15 15 8 17 42 Yellow Orange S16 A B16 5 18 43 Yellow Green 517 17 5 19 44 Yellow Brown 518 A B18 S
145. Backup of the Database i 4 3 Installing the IMC8 IMC16 Card i 4 3 Upgrading the UGW Software eene nennen 4 4 4 2 System Database nenne 4 5 Accessing the Database Flash 4 5 Saving to IMC8 or IMG 16 aaa 4 6 Loading Restoring from IMC8 or IMC16 ii 4 8 Show File Information 4 10 Automatic Dally Backup sin iaia ana 4 11 Erasing Flash Memoty c TAO 4 12 Backing up the Hard Disk onto the Compact Flash Card ii 4 13 Loading Restoring from the Compact Flash Card 4 13 Chapter 5 External Connections 5 1 Main Distribution Frame MDF i 5 1 5 2 sandali eee 5 5 Station EQUIP MERE iaia dedu Dee ci ni elle c eet 5 5 Wired Stations Eo ee t abe E cine end 5 5 Wireless and VoIP Stations ii 5 8 Related rata pg ER epe t eee aaa 5 8 aut i Lo lo o 5 9 Auxiliary Connections tr bb epe te b ed dene udi Eee aeta 5 10 5 3 Protection Devices x cete ete mee td a e redet ted teens 5 11 Introduction to Primary and Secondary Protection D VICES 5 11 Surge Arrestor Magazine ptt ice leali 5 14 5 4 Power Fail PF T
146. CF card 3 requires IPx 800X expansion cage Relay Contacts 1 2 and 3 4 Contact Type Isolated Dry Form A SPST NO Voltage Limit 50VDC Maximum Current Limit 0 5A Maximum non inductive Power Limit 30VA Maximum E Re N Re gt a 5 5 o gt D 9 102 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 10 1 Peripheral Card Installation 1 General Information The Coral IPx Office system divides peripheral interface functions among several different station and trunk card types Each card contains 4 8 16 20 or 24 circuits Some analog trunk peripheral cards support power fail transfer as described on Power Fail PF Transfer Circuits page 5 15 Coral IPx Office systems convention suggests that peripheral interface cards are installed in specific card slots as described in Table 10 4 on page 10 19 Each Peripheral card is described in detail in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 2 Card Handling Procedures Each of the Coral IPx Office cards contains circuitry sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Failure to observe safe handling procedures for static sensitive circuitry may result in permanent damage to a card An anti static wrist strap connected to the ground terminal pole and tightened w
147. Configuration page 9 26 o Q Shared Service Cards 29 47 5 Specifications DTR Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 24 max 24 default U MR Office 24 max 24 default Office card 0 MR Office 0 8DTR card 8 requires IPx 800X expansion cage card 8 requires IPx 800X expansion cage Detection SV El arsenale 28 to 0 dBm Detection Threshold 32 dBm Min Signal Duration 50 ms Min Interdigit Time 50 ms Min Frequency Less than 1 5 Frequency Reject More than 3 5 Sizing the number of DTR receivers must take into account the use of DISA FlexiCall and IRSS Freedom features as well as the number of DTMF phones a S Q 9 48 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Dial Tone Detector DTD 9 1 General Description The U RMI Office and U MR Office cards provide 16 max 32 port DTD Dial Tone Detector circuits for enhanced dialing such as busy outside number auto redial Po NOTE E max The max number is dependant on the
148. Connection when an NTU 2 Office Card is not GE Supplied Up to 240 endpoints FlexSet IP 2805 a FlexIP SoftPhone Coral Teleport FXS FXO SIA ml ay Fax ELTELTELLIT Switch 7 Figure 5 15 Network Connection when an NTU Office Card is Supplied 22225 FlexSet IP 2805 3l EJ Printer d up to 24 FlexIP SoftPhone dali Coral Teleport FXS FXO T 1 me gt FS p py gt Printer lt gt External Connections 5 35 LAN WAN and Printer Connections 1 Connecting to the LAN The Coral IPx Office connects directly to the LAN whether or not a NTU Office card is supplied with the system See Chapter 11 System Networking for more information A switching device device can be added allowing additional IP endpoints to be cascaded within the system up to 240 altogether See Figure 5 14 and Figure 5 15 Connecting to LAN when an NTU Office Card is Supplied When an NTU Office card is supplied with the system the dynamic IP addresses can be provided either by the NTU Office card or by the DHCP server at the customer s site Connecting to the LAN when an NTU Office Card is not Supplied When an NTU Office card is not supplied with the system the dynamic IP addresses are provided by the customer s DHCP server In addition the LAN can be accessed from the WAN port when configured to do so
149. Database Programming apiu a entren 9 47 Specifications DIR 9 48 9 7 Dial Tone Detector DTD a 0 2 9 49 General Description uqa ala ln dai ced o alia laura 9 49 Database Programming asr raer diit ii aiar aaa 9 50 Additional D TD Circits ei RR e aee e ee ae es 9 51 Specifications b a naka ee B e eae cerea PARE dee Duo epu spe cadat 9 51 9 8 CallerD for SET IDSB aS qu ce eate i ia 9 53 General Descriptior oo doeet de e dedere a exea cg lee v Se 9 53 Database Programming 9 54 Additional CID Circuits ia niin le e Ed a eL dt dea 9 55 Specifications a tiic d ti efie enceinte aa 9 55 9 9 Receiver ii 9 57 General Description ipa aaa 9 57 Available MF Fi CIIGUIfS israeliana ditat e ep aede ra ii 9 57 Specifications MER 9 57 9 10 VoIP Media Gateway MG 9 59 xii General Description ili Data a dn e ii 9 59 Additional Media Channel Circuits a 9 59 9 11 Remote Maintenance Modem ene 9 61 General Descriptio is iis tpe n alari 9 61 Modem Jumpers Enable Disable 9 61 Database Programming
150. ETSI standard 30B D at 2 048Mbps E1 rate NOTE PRI 30 office are not for use in the North American market RMI office I A 6 7 Even RMLF Table 10 6 on page 10 24 Odd Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards gt 10 21 Service and Peripheral Cards 22 Y MX S S E S 2 UDT office IB 8 9 10 11 Even T1 See Figure 10 8 on page 10 28 Odd T1 or PRI 23 application card jumper selection m 1 24 channel T1 digital trunk interface card Even PRI 23 Odd m PRI 23 channel PRI Primary Rate Interface digital trunk card ISDN compatible digital interface North America ANSI standard 23B D at 1 544Mbps DSI rate U MR office LA 67 Evem MR See Table 10 6 on page 10 24 Odd URC2 U RMI office LA 6 7 Even RMI F See Table 10 6 page 10 24 Odd URC2 These cards are combination of two cards 10 22 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Table 10 5 Coral IPx Office Piggyback modules for Peripheral Cards IPx Office Piggyback modules for Peripheral Cards Item Description 4CID Office The 4CID Office is installed on the 4T Office card in Coral IPx Office systems See Figure 10 23 on page 10 43 The 4CID Office card is used for detecting CID Caller ID information modulated in FSK Frequency Shift Keying sent from the PSTN over Loo
151. FT office 1x Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 8 on page 5 23 and Table 5 10 on page 5 25 30T office 1 x RJ 45 8 9 10 11 Table 5 17 on page 5 33 4S office 1 Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 8 on page 5 23 and Table 5 10 on page 5 25 4S16F Office 4S 16Fx 1x Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 9 on page 5 24 and Table 5 11 on page 5 26 4S8F Office 4S 8Fx 1x Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 9 on page 5 24 and Table 5 11 on page 5 26 n 3 S 3 D X a Y S O R nm o S O E O o A 4T Office 4 x RJ 45 10 11 Table 5 12 on page 5 28 4TBR office 4 x RJ 45 8 9 10 11 Table 5 14 on page 5 30 External Connections 5 19 I O Card Connections For Coral Peripheral Interface Cards External I O Connectors Pinout Card Name Connector Card Table Page Slot 4T CID Office 4T 4CID 4x RJ 45 10 11 Table 5 12 on page 5 28 8Fx Office 4S8F or 8S8F 1 Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 9 on page 5 24 and Table 5 11 on page 5 26 8S Office 1 Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 8 on page 5 23 and Table 5 10 on page 5 25 8S16F Office 8S 16Fx 1 Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 9 on page 5 24 and Table 5 11 on page 5 26 8S8F Office 85 8Fx 1x Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 9 on page 5 24 and Table 5 11 on page 5 26 8SFT office 1x Champ 2 3 4 5 Table 5 8 on page 5 23 and Table 5 10 on page 5 25 8T office 8 x RJ 45 2 3 4 5 Table 5
152. FlexSet IP and Wireless sets 3 way for stations and analog lines is standard support for Silent Monitoring and the Coral Message Center s Silent Record feature See Three Way Conference 3 Way page 9 35 14 party Conference Bridge Meet Me Yes Enables a conference of a maximum of 84 participants Two max 6 meet me bridge conference for 14 parties See Multi Party Conference CONF page 9 39 iDSP Caller ID transmitters Yes 16 max 32 Caller ID circuit transmitters adapted to Bellcore standards which includes the time and Caller Name Num display PN NOTE E max The maximum number for the embedded resources is dependant on the number of URC time slots Therefore increasing one of these resources requires decreasing another o D 3 5 x 3 Dd SS Dd 9 22 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual URC2 Database Programming U RMI Office and U MR Office cards The URC provides the features listed in Table 9 10 The URC in a Coral system has considerable impact on the system database Use the PI to verify that each of the parameters detailed in this chapter is defined correctly Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details Maximum URC Resources Each system resource circuit uses Coral times slots The Coral enables a maximum of 120 time slots per URC2 Table 9 11 lists the time slots needed per circuit and enables
153. HIOUON sso Srila un 9 77 M2 P Paging External 9 77 Relay Contacts 1 2 Paging Relay i 9 78 Configuring the Paging M2 P Jumper to Paging a 9 79 Configuring the Relay Contacts 1 2 Jumper to Paging sse 9 80 Database Programming E 9 81 External Connections a Ha E UR e gi 9 82 Relay Elecincal Eimitalions iiid diee ee tete edd ipei ta 9 83 Additional Paging Interface in the optional IPx 800X 9 83 Specifications Paging 9 84 935 4UNA Belland Relay 2 allagata ai 9 85 9 85 CircuibDDescriplion 9 85 Configuring the Relay Contacts 3 4 Jumper to sss 9 86 Database Programming ica eet e atte i adero dete nes 9 87 External Connections uso eate gau quete ve v epu 9 88 Relay Electrical Limitations u nennen nnne nnn nennen 9 89 Additional UNA and Relay Contacts in the Optional IPx 800X 9 89 Specifications s BELL UNA cie u ala 9 90 9 16 Accessory or Alarm Relay 3 9 91 11116616 112 19 etase eaa NEAN ENEE EENE ANAE AEE
154. Handling lt 10 1 General Installation Procedure usasqa manai aaa 10 2 Diagnostic LED Indication nennen nennen nennen ns 10 2 FED Constantly serrer eem dp netter e pa eet 10 3 LED Flashing aio ia 10 3 10 2 Peripheral Card Description 10 5 General Description un Re d aede tee Ee eti arianna 10 5 XXXOfICe e tesis teet Oo lid Ee D X 10 5 Peripheral Card types ttp op e eer tt ce ice ga 10 5 10 3 Digital Trunk Synchronization i 10 9 Slave Clock Mode 10 9 How The System Derives The External Clock Signal eene 10 9 Synchronization Slots the Main and Expansion 10 10 Synchronization Slot Selection i 10 10 Conditions for Slave Clock Mode Operation i 10 10 System Switch from Slave Clock Mode to Master Clock Mode 10 10 Choosing the Best Synchronization 10 12 Optional Synchronization Cards 10 12 Order or Preference iet omen 10 13 Synchronization Instructions aiite
155. IMC16 Flash Cards 8 1 General Information The 8 16 Flash Memory is a removable component of the Coral IPx Office common control section It is installed on the MCB Office The IMC8 card incorporates 8 MB of Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory flash EPROM The IMC 16 card incorporates 16 MB of Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory flash EPROM The IMC8 16 card is used to store the generic feature software version of the Coral IPx Office system The generic feature software determines the feature operation of the Coral IPx Office system In addition the IMC8 16 is used to store the database backup as well as the boot code Figure 8 13 illustrates the IMC8 16 flash memory card Figure 8 13 IMC8 Flash Memory Card Left side IMC8 16 provides an extremely reliable and non volatile storage medium yet allows field software update capability Once programmed the flash EPROM memory retains its contents indefinitely without power However by using a precisely controlled erase procedure the entire EPROM contents can be flash cleared and then reprogrammed to update the operating software of the system IMC8 16 FlashLite Linear PC Card provides an easy simple data storage in a standard PCMCIA Type I form factor The FlashLite PC Card provides a rugged removable linear flash data storage solution for mobile embedded systems and Telecom n E MX n R E S oo oO applicatio
156. IPx 500x Expansion Tipi NS wawas Figure 6 19 System with Three Units IPx Office and Two IPx 500X Cages 18 universal slots gt _O _exm_NVYY P P P P PTP PTP _TPAPAT AAAq nhag t o o o o i OO G W q P jj iii fllUUu o ioioii i q ii t t t ___ar_rnt 0 0 n o x 2 2 o o z a 4 Office card VO slots Common control 231ffO suoud 8 wajsks Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 6 26 Cage Description Figure 6 20 System with Two Units IPx Office and IPx 800X suoud 1 wajsks Coral IPx 800x Expansion ChE 35 gt Da 55 o5 oo So ES 20 o go 59 5 gt P 2 o 22 Cage Description 2 6 27 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Yeyu System with Three Units IPx Office IPx 500X and IPx 800X Figure 6 21 Coral IPx 800x Expansion ESOS DI Coral IPx 500x Expansion BL o oo oe 5 E 2 E 5 S pa o hi slot 1 power supply PS19 I mM CC T ER S TOO S ROO 10 universal I O slots __ Sono
157. If more than slight resistance is encountered partially slide out the card from the cage and verify the alignment of the guide ridges with the card edge guides If alignment appears to be correct remove the card from the slot and inspect the multi pin connectors for bent pins and debris in the pin holes 5 Secure the power supply unit to the cage with the two removable screws on the left and right sides of the front panel See Figure 7 1 on page 7 2 The screws on the front panel must be tightened properly to prevent dangerous electrical shock 7 6 Power Supply Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Operating the PS Office Follow these steps 1 Verify that the cage ground wire is connected and the ground nut is tightened See Figure 2 7 2 Verify that the two removable screws on the left and right side of the front panel are tightened 3 Verify that the Power switch is turned OFF downwards CETO Contact with live wires in the power supply unit could cause shock burn or death Do not remove the power supply from the IPx Office system when the power switch is turned ON and power is connected 4 Route the AC power cable to the customer s AC power outlet as described in AC Powered Systems page 2 35 5 Insert the female connector of the AC power cable into the front panel socket of the PS Office AC power supply See Figure 2 7 6 Insert the male plug of the AC power cord into the line outlet or primary power rec
158. Manual Chapter 17 Terminal Setup Route 0 for instructions on the database programming required 8 18 gt Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 6 UGW RS 232E Programming Port The serial interface of the UGW programming port on the MCB Office conforms to the EIA RS 232E specification It is wired as a Data Terminal Equipment DTE device using a popular 9 pin male D type connector The interface allows connection to the LAN Figure 8 6 illustrates the pin assignments of the DB 9S Table 8 1 lists the pin functions See Program Interface Device Connection page 2 39 for detailed connection information and terminal setup Table 8 2 UGW RS 232E Interface Pin Functions Pin Designation Function Receive Data Input to MCB Office Transmit Data Output from MCB Office Data Terminal Ready Output from MCB Office Signal Ground Signal return Data Set Ready Input to MCB Office Request to Send Output from MCB Office Clear to Send Input to MCB Office Figure 8 7 UGW Pin Assignment O 5 SIGNAL GROUND N C 9 O O 4 DATA TERMINAL READY CLEAR TO SEND 8 O O 3 TRANSMIT DATA REQUEST TO SEND 7 O O 2 RECEIVE DATA DATASET READY 6 O O 1 NC UGW Setup The baud rate is set during first initialization at 115200 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit VT 100 The baud rate is set to 115200 bps Consult the Program Interface Reference Ma
159. Modem Jumper Configuration i 9 62 Figure 9 12 Music 1 Simplified Diagram 4 sss enne 9 70 XX Figure 9 13 Music 1 Internal External Selection P2 Jumper Setting 9 70 Figure 9 14 Music 2 Simplified Diagram 9 71 Figure 9 15 Music 2 M2 P Music Paging Selection Jumper Setting 9 71 Figure 9 16 Music Wiring to External Music 9 74 Figure 9 17 Paging amp Relay Contacts 1 2 Simplified Diagram i 9 78 Figure 9 18 Paging Simplified Diagram i 9 79 Figure 9 19 Paging M2 P Music Paging Selection Jumper 9 79 Figure 9 20 Paging Relay Simplified i 9 80 Figure 9 21 Relay Contacts 1 2 PAGE RELAY Selection P4 Jumper Setting 9 80 Figure 9 22 Page Wiring To Paging Amplifier 9 82 Figure 9 23 Page Wiring To Amplified Speakers i 9 82 Figure 9 24 UNA amp Relay Contacts 3 4 Simplified Diagram sse 9 85 Figure 9 25 Bell Relay Simplified Diagram ii 9 86 Figure 9 26 Relay Contacts 3 4 BELL RELAY Selection P4 Jumper Setting 9 86 Figure 9 27 UNA Bell Wiring to Tone
160. N N 2 If Y is selected the system prompts to select a source file number either DBO DEF or DB1 DEF with FILE 0 1 0 3 Press 0 or 1 according to the table below to begin loading the database stored in IMC8 Database File Name PI Entry File Description DBO DEF Daily backup automatically at a preset time DB1 DEF Technician copy for manual backup The following prompt appears 5 5 YV S lt 5 Q S DS 2 EXECUTE Y N N 4 If you type Y the system goes through the following retrieval conditions check sequence 4 8 Software Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IP x Office Installation Manual a Verify that the internal flags are present in the database to be loaded b Verify that the database is not corrupted the system executes the checksum test procedure If the procedure checking the database DBS retrieval conditions found the above conditions fulfilled the following message will appear Restore DBS Upon finishing the restoring procedure the system reports Restore Successful Next the system will execute the partial initialization If the conditions mentioned above were not met one of the following messages will be displayed Operation denied DBO DEF is not O K Operation denied DB1 DEF is not If only one backup file was present when the technician requested DB1 DEF retrie
161. Office card 0 MR Office card 0 IDSP 64 requires IPx 800X expansion cage a ua a e S 5 2 S o Shared Service Cards 29 55 NOTES a e 9 un K S S S S o 9 56 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Receiver MFR Multi Frequency Code Receiver Circuit General Description The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards do not provide circuits for MFC Multi Frequency Code Receiver It is required to support telephone equipment or trunks which send MFC R2 inter office tone dial signaling to the Coral system for the purpose of activating system features or selecting other ports Available MFR Circuits resources cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The cards include Card Cage Description 16 circuit Multi Frequency Code MF or MFC tone Receiver and decoder card 16MFR x IPx 800X These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Specifications Number of Circuits U RMI Office 0 U MR Office card 0 Office card 0 MR Office card 0 16 16 requires 800X expansion cage Shared Service Cards 29 57 E O Y da Y
162. Px Office and the Expansion Cages This section describes how to interconnect the units within the Coral IPx Office system For a full description of the different system configurations see Interconnecting the IPx Office Unit and the Expansion Cage page 6 30 A IPx Office expansion cable is supplied with the ESIM card and is used to connect the backplane of the cage to the IPx Office unit The IPx Office expansion cable has one female D Type 50 pin connector at one end and a a SCSI female connector at the other end When the IPx Office system includes expansion cages the ESIM Office card is installed into the IPx Office unit in slot 8 9 and the IPx Office expansion cable is attached to the SCSI female connector on the front panel of the ESIM Office card Interconnecting the IP x Office Unit and the Expansion Cage 1 Verify that the ESIM Office peripheral card is installed in slot 8 9 of the IPx Office unit 2 Plug the male end of the IPx Office expansion cable into the female SCSI connector on the front panel of the ESIM Office peripheral card 3 Plug the female D type connector of the cable into the connector labeled FROM CONTROL UNIT OR FIRST EXPANSION UNIT on the the first expansion cage 4 Tighten the screws on both sides of the cable to secure it Interconnecting the 1st Expansion cage and 2nd Expansion Cage 1 Plug the male end of the H500 1 cable into the female D type connector labeled TO SECOND EXPANSION UNIT located in the
163. RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards The MR RMI F is displayed in PI CLIS in Shelf 1 Slot 6 of the IPx Office as MR or RMI F MR RMI F Features The RMI F software includes the following shared service functions Figure 9 10 MR RMI F Features Function RMI F MR RMI Office MR Office U RMI Office U MR Office remote maintenance access modem V 92 Yes No ITU T standard Described on page 9 61 Auxiliary functions Yes Yes m One external music interface for music on hold and background music Described ON page 9 m Oneinternal or external music interface jumper selection for music on hold and background music Described on page 9 69 m One external voice paging interface for public address Described on page 9 77 m Two relay contacts Described on page 9 99 9 18 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual MR and RMI F Database Programming The MR and RMI F provides the features listed in Table 9 8 The MR and RMI F in a Coral system has considerable impact on the system database Use the PI to verify that each of the parameters detailed in this chapter is defined correctly Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 6 System Port List for more details Sizes Def Route SIZ m 8DRCF 8DRCM RMI ASU parameter shows the current capacity for U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office MR Office SDRCF 8DRCM RMI ASU cards
164. S 7 SCT external view a Figure 5 5 on page 5 16 illustrates wiring interconnections between the trunk card station card and a single line station set Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 29 Figure 10 10 4T CID Office Card 220227 0 1 2 3 uem 4T CID Office S 1 TRUNK 0 1 2 3 2 STR 8 3 STT LLU 4 TR ZA 5 2 RJ 45 plug male 1 clip at rear 6 SCR RJ 45 socket female 7 SCT external view 8 nw xy Figure 5 5 on page 5 16 illustrates wiring interconnections between the trunk card station card and a single line station set 10 30 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 11 8SFT Office Card 8SFT Office Coral IPx Office Installation Manual FlexSet Peripheral Cards gt 10 31 n o 5 M S D S D S E D Figure 10 12 16SFT Office Card 16SFT Office FlexSet 22 Y MX S E S 2 10 32 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 13 245 Office Card e 24SFT Otfice FlexS
165. T RJ 45 socket female 6 SCR external view 7 SCT 28 STT STR SCT and SCR power failure transfer connections See Figure 5 5 on page 5 16 for power failure transfer wiring interconnections diagram and database programming External Connections 2 5 29 n S w S RS S R By n E S w E S 5 n O D 3 D D X A D S O S n S 9 o D S S O E O NS 4TBR Office Card The external network connections to the 4TBR Office digital circuit card are made via the RJ 45 telephony connector on the front panel See Table 5 14 and Figure 5 10 PN NOTE E For further information on how to make the connection refer also to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Table 5 14 4 Office RJ 45 Nomination Functions Pinout Pin TE Pin 1 Not Used Not Used Fms TRE Hec Numi Figure 5 10 ATBR Office Pinout 4TBR Office Line 0 1 2 3 Es RJ 45 socket female external view RJ 45 plug male clip at rear 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PSN NOTE E For synchronization jumpers see Figure 10 6 on on page 10 26 5 30 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual UDT Office 1 or PRI 23 The external
166. TRUNK See Chapter 10 niversal YO Card Type E 27 c gt 27 o Sec Sync Slot 5 lt Power Supply PS19 AC DC Note Requires a PX card in slot 1 if a second expansion cage is installed S gt E Y E amp 5 Rh Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 31 Figure 2 16 2nd Expansion Cage 800X Card Placement Coral IPx 800X ond EXPANSION CAGE Shelf Number SHARED SERVICE Type Universal O Card Type H Universal YO Card Universal O Type ve H Universal lO Card Type DIGITAL TRUNK See Chapter 10 I I 1 I I I L 35 c o c gt c E Sync Slot 1 1 1 1 1 Universal lO Type nf Universal lO Type 1 1 1 1 Universal O Card Type I I I I L Universal O Card Type Card Type Card Type Card Type Power Supply PS19AC DC S 5 S E D 5 5 55 2 32 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 11 Interconnecting the I
167. URC Feature Authorization Route FEAT 1 m URC 3WAY URC Configuration Route CDB 11 1 m 3WAY Defines the maximum number of 3 way Conference bridge resources to be enabled by the system URC cards Each 3 way conference circuit requires 4 card time slots therefore eight 3 way circuits require 32 TS When the 3 way conference exists and is initialized the PI shows Card List Route CLIS Card type see Table 9 3 on page 9 7 must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 URC2 in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Port List Route PLIS 0 Port type must show C3WAY in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Ckt 56 79 max See Table 9 16 URC Three Way Conference C3WAY PI Configuration page 9 29 Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 6 System Port List for more details o D Q lt o fri D 5 5 o gt D 9 36 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Additional 3 Way Circuits Additional digital Conference Bridge cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description CNF IPx 800X Includes one of the following functions m Eight 3 way conference 8 x 3 way or m Dual 15 party conference 2 x 15 party One card is required for each mode and is database selectable 2 x 15 party or 8 x 3 way 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes
168. acing the LED Office Card iii 8 26 3 4 Gard i 8 27 General Infotmalion eie 8 27 Functional iii 8 27 MED EE 8 28 Installing the MRO siero ge geese kae SEDE 8 29 Preparing for Installation U i 8 29 Installing the MRC Card i 8 29 Removing th ie alieni 8 31 8 5 IMC8 and IMC16 Flash CardSs ener nnne nnne inns 8 33 General Information 8 33 Installing the IMC8 16 u s a ge eee gene ta E LL I i e Hp EH dalia 8 34 Removing the IMC8 18 qun ua uay aaeei Waya sasay qa Ca sentent 8 35 amp x 8 36 8 6 Compact Flash Disk ia dv Ep dee o dor D de des 8 39 fine 8 39 Inserting he CFD ieee e Ne ce pue E 8 39 8 7 DBM X Card m EET 8 41 General Informatio M ra seas sneeu iani ua aana aada paba daa Da aoa deara kaian ONEA iao Ei iapa ada diaais 8 41 When is a DBM X card required ennemis 8 42 Installing the DBMEX irlanda 8 43 Preparing for InstallationN 8 43 Installing the DBM X Gard u i 8 43 Removing the DBM X iii 8 45 Specifications DBM X iii 8 46 Chapter 9 Shared Service Cards 9 1 Shared Service Circuitry ii 9 1 General Descriptio
169. ailable peripheral card slot in the optional expansion unit m the PI system database the expansion units are shown as m The first IPx 500X expansion unit includes shelf 1 slot 41 to slot 10 m The second IPx 500X expansion unit includes shelf 2 slot 1 to slot 10 m The first IPx 800X expansion unit includes shelf 1 slot 1 to slot 12 m The second IPx 800X expansion unit includes shelf 2 slot 1 to slot 12 Refer to Chapter 6 of the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for additional details 9 4 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual MRC 8 16 32 64 Modules Media Resource Card General Description Figure 9 1 illustrates the card circuit layout Shared service circuits in the MRC cards are embedded in DSP units The main shared service functions and the maximum number of resources that can be supported by the various cards are described in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Features MRC Features MRC 8 MRC 16 MRC 32 MRC 64 G 711 32 64 64 128 G 729 8 16 32 64 G 723 8 16 32 64 Card Location The MRC is a daughter board installed on the MCB Office card in a piggyback fashion Database Programming Card List Route CLIS In the PI system database the MRC shared service circuits are displayed as m UGW Location Shelf 6 Slot 5 PN NOTE E This slot does not physically exist but is embedded onto the MCB Office card This slot number is recogni
170. al for more details 3 Class Of Service Route COS 0 MODEM Use the MODEM parameter to determine whether a specific station user is allowed to dial to MODEM Refer to Chapter 7 Station and Trunk COS in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more 5 D s 5 S lt 3 E 3 D details Shared Service Cards 9 63 4 Terminal Setup Route TERM 0 Use this field to set up the communication parameters for the data applications Refer to Chapter 17 in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details 5 Gains Table Route ROOT 0 1 3 Entry 10 of the gains table can be used to set gain parameters to the modem These parameters set the transmission value levels of the modem while in CONNECT state with any possible port in the system For more information see Chapter 19 in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference And Database Manual 5 US D Q E S lt D w 5 gt E SD x 9 64 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 4 Additional Modem in the Optional IPx 800X Cage Additional modem ports may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Description 8DRCF Includes the ITU T V 92 up to 56Kbps remote maintenance modem among other functions These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation M
171. al IP x Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 15 6 Configuring the Networking Software Configure the networking software as described in the documentation provided by the NTU Office card software vendor at http www draytek com The NTU Office card is called the Vigor 2900 by the vendor 5 n E E D S E z 11 16 System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 7 Specifications NTU Office Card Hardware Interface NAT Firewall VPN Coral IPx Office Installation Manual LAN m port 10 100 Base TX Switch with port based VLAN WAN selleria 1 port 10 100 Base TX port with a RJ 45 connector 14611 MN 1 port USB for connecting to USB printer WAN Protocol PPPoE DHCP PPTP Static IP Multi NAT DMZ Port Redirection Open Ports Pass thru VPN VoIP NetMeeting MSN Messenger ICQ Quake etc IM blocking Multi NAT DMZ host port redirect open port Stateful Packet Inspection DoS DDoS protection User configurable packet filtering Up to 32 Tunnels Protocol PPTP L2 TP IPSec L2TP over IPSec Encryption AES 128 bits RR MPPE 40 128 bits cli ia Hardware based DES 3DES 56 168 bits Authentication MD5 SHA 1 IKE Authentication Pre shared Key Connection Teleworker to LAN
172. anual Shared service cards may be installed in any available peripheral card slot in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion unit 5 Specifications Modem Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 1 RMI Office card 1 U MR Office 0 MR Office card 0 card requires IPx 800X expansion cage Modem Operating Modes V 92 ITU T up to 56Kbps Client to Server DataComm supports V 92 or K56flex Modem Compatibility ITU V 92 K56flex A gt Data communications via the modem use the 7 bit American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII character set although each port may be programmed to send and receive a dummy 8th character bit Data is exchanged in asynchronous character transmission mode 5 D s lt S lt 3 5 3 D Shared Service Cards 29 65 NOTES AN S S Y w 5 3 E YV lt 9 66 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Data Serial Ports RS 232E KB0 KB1 KB2 KB3 1 General Description The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards do not provide Serial ports The Coral IPx Office provides one EIA RS 232E Asynchronous ASCII serial data interfaces via the MCB Office for the following functions m System data
173. anufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to requirements specified by the battery manufacturer and or local regulatory agencies a S o S E 3 8 Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Interface Card Initialization 1 Introduction This section describes how to initialize the peripheral cards Perform this section only after the MCB Office control card in the IPx Office has been initialized properly If the peripheral cards are inserted before the IPx Office system has initialized they will not initialize properly either The card installation is described on Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card page 3 10 The IPx Office system peripheral cards installation and initialization procedure includes the following steps 1 Preparing for Initialization 2 Office Unit Initialization 3 First Expansion Cage Initialization 4 Second Expansion Cage Initialization 5 S S 23 D o S S 3 D 5 D Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests 3 9 2 852 15 E O Y 3 D Y X D a Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card 1 Connect a static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the strap See Figure 2 11 on page 2 24 CAUTION Circuit cards contain static sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by
174. apter 10 Peripheral Cards For more detailed information about the expansion cage refer to Chapter 6 of the Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual for the Coral IPx 500 and IPX 800 systems Expansion Cage IPx 800X One IPx 800X cage may house up to 11 universal peripheral cards Slot 2 through slot 12 are universal I O slots and may house any combination of shared service and peripheral CORAL cards Slot 1 is used to house a shared service card or a PX card Refer to PX Card page 6 38 Table 6 4 Number of Universal I O Slots per System Configuration 6 24 Cage Description System Main 1st Expansion 2 d Expansion Total System Configuration Unit Cage Cage Universal Slots x Office 4 4 TPx Office 500X TPx Office 500X 500X 4 310 0 oo TPx Office 800X 4 15 Office 500X 800X 4 10 IPx 500 11 800 oo Office 800X 800 4 11 11 26 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 6 17 System with One Unit IPx Office 231ffO suoud 1 wajsks Coral IPx 500x Expansion DL co x ce On z EG 80 o TL gt DH 52 og e So ES r4 84 20 go 2 gt o9 37 E o o z 8 lt SY 55 ES LE 9 298 SS TRA Cage Description gt 6 25 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IPx 500 Expansion Coral
175. are not connected via the MDF Related Documentation For further information about Coral voice terminals not covered by this section consult the following documentation Station Type Manual IP device FlexSet IP 2805 Coral Teleport FlexIP SoftPhone Coral VoIP Installation Manual Peripheral device FlexSet 120 280 121 281 APDL series Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual D E 5 5 Saj 5 D 5 8 s Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Trunk Circuits Generally trunk circuits are connected to the Coral IPx Office system simply by cross connecting the trunk interface circuit of a Coral IPx Office trunk card to the point of demarcation where the trunk circuits from the Telephone utility Company TELCO appear For more specific data regarding all trunk types supported by the Coral IPx Office systems refer to Peripheral Card Description page 105 Refer also to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Protective devices are regularly provided by the TELCO on circuits originating outside the building Determine if the TELCO protective devices meet the specifications provided in Protection Devices page 511 and if necessary install secondary protector devices that meet these specifications To be effective the protective devices whether TELCO or customer provided must be grounded to the same ground point as the IPx Office system Figure 5 3 illustrates typical trunk circ
176. arm the Coral IPx Office system uses its internal clock source and the system free runs 5 5 S EN x o E a 5 20 Q Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 11 3 Choosing the Best Synchronization Source Optional Synchronization Cards In the Coral IPx Office main unit m PRI PRI 30 Office UDT Office PRI 23 a TI UDT Office m El 30T Office m BRI 4TBR Office In the Coral IPx 500X expansion cage PRI 23ipx PRI 30ipx UDTipx PRI 23 m TI Tlipx UDTipx T1 m El 30Tipx BRI 4TBRipx 8TBRipx In the Coral IPx 800X expansion cage PRI 23 PTRI 30 UDT PRI 23 m TI TI UDT T1 m El 30T x BRI ATBR 8TBR t gt If an IPx 500X Expansion cage is installed UDTipx PRI 23 or 1 30Tipx PHI 23ipx PRI 30ipx 4TBRipx and 8TBRipx digital trunk interface cards are available refer to the Coral IPx 500 Installation Guide NOTE If an IPx 800X Expansion cage is installed UDT PRI 23 or T1 PRI 23 PRI 30 4TBR and 8TBR digital trunk interface cards are available refer to the Coral IPx 800 Installation Guide 4TBRP 8TBRP 4TBRPipx and 8TBRPipx cards with Power supply cannot be used in the synchronization slots M E 5 50 Q 10 12 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual t gt BRI L
177. ash Disk page 8 39 Networking Card The networking card integrates full networking capabilities within the IPx Office For further information see Chapter 11 System Networking 5 gt A 3 D D WiFi Card The WiFi card integrates full WiFi capabilities within the IPx Office For further information see Chapter 11 System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cage Description 6 13 S 3 5 o Q S 2 un 3 D D o 4 Unit Interior Rear Section The rear section of the unit interior includes the peripheral card slots and the power supply slot The slots are aligned horizontally from top to bottom The top two slots slot 2 3 and slot 4 5 house full size cards A vertical partition is positioned beneath these slots forming an additional three slots slot 6 7 slot 8 9 and slot 10 11 that are used to house half sized cards Figure 6 10 IPx Office Rear Section without Cards Installed 6 14 Cage Description Card Slots Guides aligned horizontally along the rear section of the IPx Office unit enable the cards to be connected to multi pin connectors mounted on the MBP Office The guides and associated connectors comprise a card slot See Figure 6 10 The connectors provide metallic paths from the cards to the various power and signal buses of the system and for peripheral cards to the Input Output I O connec
178. ax The max number is dependant on the number of URC time slots The iDSP is required for displaying CID Caller ID for SLT users The iDSP application converts ASCII text information received from the Coral main processor into FSK tone m BellCore GR 30 or m ETSI 300 659 1 para 6 1 1 The FSK tones are supplied for direct injection onto the Coral PCM highways The iDSP application provides up to 32 individual FSK tones simultaneously each on a different PCM channel and call The CID display feature for SLT requires Authorization for SLT CID and an FSK compatible display unit installed on the SLT port The following information modulated in FSK is sent to an SLT interface by the iDSP application between the 1st and 2nd ring m Date m Time m Number the last 10 digits m Name the first 15 characters enabled through programming in the configuration database 2 a un S 5 2 S o The CID display unit detects this information and transforms it back into ASCII codes Up to 32 SLT sets can receive CID information simultaneously from a single URC 1DSP application Multi appearance and waiting call s information is not supported Shared Service Cards 29 53 2 Database Programming The CID requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required The following parameters must be
179. ay contacts contacts 1 2 3 4 9 14 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual P2 M1 internal music 3lo t M1 external music P3 1 M2 P 2 Pm 2 external music P paging Relay contacts 1 2 and 3 4 1 2 RLY1 PAGE 1 2 RLY3 RELAY 4 RLY3 RELAY 4 RLY2 BELL 3 Configuration J umpers The U RMI Office RMI Office U MR Office MR Office cards are equipped with jumpers P2 P that enable or disable various functions The enabling or disabling is accomplished by jumper straps PN NOTE E Before installing the card the jumpers are set to their correct positions See Figure 9 3 on page 9 11 through Figure 9 6 on page 9 14 Table 9 5 U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office Jumper Purpose Configuration Jumpers P2 Enables when installed selection of the M1 Music source as internal or external See Configuring the Music M1 umper to External or Internal on page 9 70 P3 Enables selection of the M2 P as Music source or Paging output See Configuring the Music M2 P J umper to Music on page 9 71 See Configuring the Paging M2 P J umper to Paging on page 9 79 P4 Enables the selection of two out of three relay functions m External Voice Paging PAGE RLY1 m Universal Night Answer UNA and Central Bell BELL RLY2 m Dial Operated Accessory Alarm RELAY RLY3 These functions are operated through relays See Configuring the Relay Contacts
180. ay Contacts on page 9 99 for complete specifications To operate a highly inductive load such as a mechanical bell the relay should operate an external AC powered or non inductive relay with an appropriately rated contact which in turn operates the mechanical bell Figure 9 27 UNA Bell Rel Wiring to Tone Generator Contacts Contact Operated Tone Generator Coral IPx Office Figure 9 28 UNA Bell Wiring to Mechanical Bell Relay Contacts Coral IPx Office U RMI Office Bell Power Supply Table 9 7 on page 9 17 lists the function of each interface connector as they appear on the card front panel Figure 9 8 on page 9 17 illustrates that connector RQ 5 9 DI EY n lt DO 8 EY lt D S Qe S 9 88 gt IPx Office Installation Manual 6 Relay Electrical Limitations The relay contacts have specific electrical limitations For further detail see Relay Contacts on page 9 99 These limitations must not be exceeded In addition the type of load the relay contact operates can have a great significance Do not exceed the contact ratings listed in the specifications 7 Additional UNA and Relay Contacts in the Optional IPx 800X Cage Additional relay contacts for central ringing bell interface may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The addit
181. b g compliant Wireless client list 64 128 bit WEP WPA WPA2 802 111 VPN over WLAN Hidden SSID MAC address access control Regulatory Approval EN 55022 301489 17 300328 2 Frequency Band 2 4 GHz Transmission Rate Up to 54 MHz Channels Suppott US Canada 11 channels 1 11 Japan 14 channels 1 13 or 1 14th Major European country 13 channels 1 13 France 4 channels 10 13 3 E a 5 o S 3 2 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 19 3 n E E D S E z 11 20 System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Connecting to the Network without NTU Office Card The Coral IPx Office system can connect directly to the LAN without a network card To connect to the WAN requires the addition of an external customer supplied router To enable the Coral IPx Office to connect to the LAN 1 If necessary unplug the power cord that supplies the Coral IPx Office system Electrical Hazard Contact with live wires could cause shock burn and death Do not open the Coral IPx Office cover before removing power from the system 2 If necessary remove the unit cover See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 3 Connect the WAN cable supplied by the manufacturer between the two i
182. base programming m Diagnostics and system maintenance See KB0 RS 232E Programming Port page 8 18 Shared Service Cards 29 67 2 2 5 2 5 2 5 gt 5 N e n E S 29 S 3 E S A 2 RS 232E ports in the Optional IPx 800X Cage RS 232E Serial ports may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description Includes three RS 232E programming maintenance interfaces 800 to 115 200 bps among other functions 8DRCF x IPx 800X This card is described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 8DRCF cards may be installed in any available peripheral card slot in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion unit The 8DRCF card provides three EIA RS 232E Asynchronous ASCII serial data interfaces KB1 KB2 and KB3 for the following functions m System database programming m Diagnostics and system maintenance m Displaying reports such as station message detail recording SMDR Displaying wake up reports m Displaying call charge m Printing the Malicious Call Trace reports The KB1 KB2 and data ports may only be used to communicate with the system processor for programming and maintenance purposes or for retrieving station message detail recording SMDR data or wake up reports It may not be used as switched data ports 3 Specifications RS 232E Number of Circuits lt lt 5 2
183. ber of URC timeslots Therefore increasing one of these resources requires decreasing another see Chapter 9 Shared Service Circuitry for more information about service cards For U RMI Office card see Figure 9 3 on page 9 11 For RMI Office card see Figure 9 4 on page 9 12 For U MR Office card see Figure 9 5 on page 9 13 For MR Office card see Figure 9 6 on page 9 14 n o S D XI 5 D S D 8 D un 10 24 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 5 30T Office Card Not this card Primary green Secondary yellow 30T Office 4 RxB 2 RxA ff 3 GND shield 4 TxB 8 5 TxA RJ 45 plug male clip at rear 7 RJ 45 socket female external view n o S M 5 S S ES N E ua Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 25 Figure 10 6 4TBR Office Card Synchronization Source Not this card yellow Primary green BRI line indicators On Not active Off Active qm 5 e oe e 9 SYNC 4TBR Office BRI line 0 1 2 3 1 1111 225 RJ 45 socket female external view 8 RJ 45 plug male clip at rear 2 o 5 D D
184. ce 3 Way Conference Circuitry 1 General Description The U RMI Office and U MR Office cards provide eight max 24 independent 3 way conferences Consultation Broker service conversation circuits They can be used for m Digital voice ports such as SKK IPG UGW PRI 23 PRI 30 4TBR 8TBR STBRP or 30T x to participate in a 3 way conference call 3 way for SLT stations and analog lines is standard m The Silent Monitor feature m The Coral Message Center s Silent Record feature PSN NOTE E Separate authorization is required to allocate the 3way circuits supported by the U RMI Office and U MR Office cards max The max number is dependant on the number of URC time slots The 3 way conference circuitry is completely digital During the conferencing session each participant hears the voices of other participants Database Programming The 3 WAY circuit requires some database settings Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required for C3WAY The following parameters must be set for 3 way conference and Silent Monitoring Sizes TAB Route SYSGEN RESOURCES Shared Service Cards 29 35 ET 23 E o D 5 E o gt ME D 5 5 5 o 2 Class of Service Route COS 0 BROKER CONSULT 3 WAY ALL SILENT_MONITOR Numbering Plan Route NPL 0 SILENT_MONITOR field 9 index 171
185. ce Installation Manual 3 Additional DTD Circuits Additional DTD resources cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description 8DTD IPx 800X discontinued 8 circuit DialTone Detector and call progress tone analyzer 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes 8 DTD circuit dialtone detector and call progress tone analyzer functions among other functions These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Specifications DTD Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 32 max 16 default U MR Office card 32 max 16 default Office card 0 MR Office card 0 SDRCF card 8 requires IPx 800X expansion cage Detection Level 28 to 0 dBm Rejection Level 32 dBm Minimum Shared Service Cards 29 51 5 gt 8 S 5 D A D E E 5 lt NOTES S S K 2 N 9 E S 3 9 52 gt IPx Office Installation Manual Caller ID for SLT IDSP 9 1 General Description The U RMI Office and U MR Office cards provide 16 max 32 iDSP ports 5 gt NOTE Separate authorization is required to allocate the iDSP circuits supported by the U RMI Office and U MR Office cards m
186. cedure 2 27 S E 5 5 Saj Figure 2 12 Coral IPx Office Card Placement Coral IPx Office Shelf Number 1 MAIN UNIT pg Office Type E cai oe Not the and expansion Secondary in cage in any exp cage any exp cage Primary Secondary Primary yellow in green in o lt Q Q N 3 00 c Q D S 5 gt E D E 5 5 Saj 2 28 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 2 13 1st Expansion Cage 500X Card Placement Coral IPx 500X Shelf Number 1st EXP CAGE Card M Card Card Type Card Type Card Card _ 0210 N 5 7 52 LO 42 gt 42 O 42 17 4 Card Type DIGITAL TRUNK See Chapter 10
187. ces should be installed on any circuit requiring primary lightning protection which connects electrically to an interface of the Coral system Lightning and over voltage arrestors are used to protect the user and the system from lightning and other electrical hazards that may occur on external circuits connected to the system Any cable that passes through open air under open ground i e across parking lots fields road beds etc across a bridge or along the exterior or under the non metallic roof of a building is exposed to lightning and electrical hazards Telephone circuit protection devices fall into two distinct design categories m Primary lightning protection devices that limit voltages on a telephone circuit below levels which do not present a hazard to the user Table 5 4 lists minimum specifications m Secondary surge and impulse protectors that further limit voltages on a telephone circuit to prevent damage to electronic equipment Table 5 5 lists the specifications n 9 gt 8 3 N Primary protection absorbs the major impact of infrequent but dangerous catastrophic surges while secondary protection suppresses constantly occurring External Connections 25 11 kel E Q 2 ta 3 w e impulses These impulses while not dangerous can cripple valuable and many cases essential communication facilities Generally leased or switched circuit
188. circuit card meet mating connectors on the backplane and engage Push against the front panel until the front panel of the card is flush with the front frame of the card cage Do not force the circuit card into the slot If more than slight resistance is encountered remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris Never place a card in a slot other than the dedicated one Refer to Table 2 6 to determine peripheral interface card types Table 2 6 lists the peripheral interface card types that may be inserted into each card slot in the Coral IPx Office system NOTE E Peripheral Interface cards listed in Table 2 6 may require changes to jumpers on the card that determines the electrical characteristic or operation of each interface circuit Refer to specific card descriptions in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual for details 5 Determine the position of peripheral interface cards that will be inserted into card slots 2 3 through slots 10 11 in the IPx Office unit and slots 1 through 10 in the IPx 500X cages or 1 through 12 in the IPx 800X cages Observe any order previously directed by a system designer or any established convention of the distributor Card placement diagrams Figure 2 12 through Figure 2 16 can be used as a worksheet by the system designer to establish card placement prior to installation Refer to Table 2 6 to determine peripheral interface card type
189. connected 5 14 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 5 Power Fail PF Transfer Circuits With the installation of trunk cards to support the PF Power Fail transfer option four trunks per trunk card may be directed to station sets if power to the Coral IPx Office system is interrupted This arrangement referred to as power failure transfer completely bypasses the system allowing specific stations to originate outgoing calls and or continue answering incoming calls Physical Connection Stations The SLT single line telephone set can be used as a power failure station Figure 5 5 illustrates wiring interconnections between the trunk card station card and a single line station set Pa NOTE E Coral FlexSet cannot be used as power failure stations Trunks In the Coral IPx Office system the following analog trunk peripheral cards support power fail transfer m The following four trunk cards each provide four 4 ports with PF transfer connections 4T Office and 4T CID Office in slots 10 11 m The following eight trunk cards each provide four 4 ports with PF transfer connections 8T Office and ST CID Office in slots 2 3 and 4 5 NOTE only circuits 2 3 4 and 5 support power failure transfer connections External Connections 5 15 2 3 S gt E RI S E D a 2 Database Programming To use the power fail transfer features of the Coral system the station dial
190. connections to the PRI 30 Office digital circuit are made via the RJ 45 telephony connector on the front panel See Table 5 16 and Figure 5 12 NOTE E For further information on how to connect to the PSTN LTU CSU refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Table5 16 PRI 30 Office RJ 45 Nomination Functions Pinout Pin X Receive Data tip from Network Cable Shield 48VDC Return Transmit Data ring to Network Transmit Data tip to Network Not Used Pin 1 RxB Receive Data ring from Network 48VDC Power for CSU LTU Ping GND Cable Shield 48VDC Return Figure 5 12 30 Office Pinout RJ 45 socket female external view RxA GND shield TxB TxA RJ 45 plug male clip at rear 48VDC GND PRI 30 Office 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 Nominal Line Impedance PN NOTE E For synchronization jumpers see Figure 10 7 on on page 10 27 5 32 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 30T Office Card The external network connections to the 307 Office digital circuit are made via the RJ 45 telephony connector on the front panel See Table 5 17 and Figure 5 13 PN NOTE E For further information on how to make the connection to the PSTN LTU CSU refer also to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Table 5 17 30T Office RJ 45 Nomination Functions Pinout Pin
191. cribed in Figure 2 13 and Figure 2 14 E S 3 S D 5 5 4 800X expansion cages configure the jumpers as described in Figure 2 15 and Figure 2 16 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 23 5 E 5 w 5 YV E amp 5 x 10 Peripheral Card Installation Circuit cards contain static sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by electro static discharge ESD Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling circuit cards See Figure 2 11 Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces Handle with care and do not drop Inserting a Coral Peripheral Card 1 Connecta static dissipating wrist strap connector not provided by the manufacturer to the cage and put on the strap Figure 2 11 ESD Strap Connection to Cage 2 Toinserta circuit card into a card slot grasp the card with both hands and fingers on the edge of the card near the front side 3 Verify that the card is oriented correctly the red diagnostic indicator on the front side is oriented toward right of the card 2 24 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 4 Align the edges of the circuit card with the card edge guides in the card cage and gently slide the card straight into the card slot A slight resistance will be felt as the multi pin connectors on the
192. csi ae illude 6 23 Main Unit 6 24 1 500 arre ie eeu lee ae daaa 6 24 Expansion Cage 800X nnne ens 6 24 Interconnecting the IPx Office Unit and the Expansion 6 30 Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution 6 34 Unit Em 6 34 Expansion Gages 5 5 1 dee oU ace ilaele Lidia 6 34 Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion Cage sse 6 36 Qeneral gaa M 6 36 Card SlolStuu EE 6 36 Port tote bee dav ave t eve te p deeds 6 36 P 6 36 6 36 Setting the Configuration Jumpers i 6 36 Connecting the IPx 500X Cage to the IPx Office i 6 37 Related Documentation ii 6 37 Optional Coral IPx 800X Expansion nennen 6 38 General oc vai weenie iu ea i a 6 38 Card SOS 6 38 Port Capacity rp cs iii a iaia iui 6 38 P Wer SUPPLY AMNES 6 38 PX e e Seen 6 38 When an 800X Expansion Cage is Used in an IPx Office System 6 39 Setting the Configuration Jumpe
193. ct an RS232 E serial cable providing access to the LAN Default configuration 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit VT 100 See UGW RS 232E Programming Port page 8 19 LAN Connectors Used to connect the NTU Office card to the LAN Any one connector can be used WAN Connector Used to connect the NTU Office card to the WAN Printer Connector Used to connect the system to a printer NTU Office card reset push button Resets the NTU Office card and restores factory default settings Reset push button Forces the Coral system to restart Used to partially initialize the system cause a warm restart procedure simulating the procedure that occurs automatically when power is applied to the system Forcing initialization by pressing RST immediately disconnects all calls in progress but does not default the database However resetting the Main Processor while the database is being programmed may corrupt the database If this happens the database must be restored MCB Office Reset Button CAUTION Pressing the RST button will cause a partial initialization All calls in progress will be terminated E gt 22 D Q S 2 D o 6 4 Cage Description Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Rear Side The rear side of the unit houses the peripheral cards and the power supply card See Figure 6 4 When installed the front panels of the peripheral cards and the power supply car
194. d fall between 3 30 and 3 35 volts If the voltage measured across a battery is less than 2 50 volts the battery must be replaced For first time use release the protective battery insulator See Figure 8 8 Replacing the Lithium Battery In the following procedure do not apply too much pressure to the battery clasp as this could cause it to snap 1 Carefully raise the battery clasp Do not use any metal tool to release or insert the battery Doing so could result in a short circuit and damage the battery 2 Insert the new battery with the positive symbol appearing on top Explosion and Environmental Hazards There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to requirements specified by the battery manufacturer and or local regulatory agencies S S S D S gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 2 8 21 Figure 8 8 MCB Office Card Battery Insulator Release PS Office connector Compact flash Battery Insulator Pull up to remove Release button MBP Offic connector S 5 o E S D p S 8 22 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 9 Specifications MCB Office Microprocessor
195. d completely overlay the rear section of the unit Since the front panel of all cards installed from the rear are RFI protected the unit cover does not need to protect the rear side of the unit Therefore the cards can be installed and removed without removing the unit cover The rear side includes the slots for inserting the power supply card and the peripheral cards The peripheral card slots are designated slot 2 3 slot 4 5 slot 6 7 slot 8 9 and slot 10 11 Each card slot is recognized by the programming interface as two separate slots The rear side is designed to house full size as well as half size cards See Peripheral Card Description page 10 5 The front panel of the half size cards come in three different sizes For that reason some of the half size cards must be installed in specific slots See Table 2 6 on page 2 27 for further detail Slot 2 3 and slot 4 5 house the full sized cards Slot 6 7 slot 8 9 and slot 10 11 house the half sized cards When any of the peripheral slots are not used the openings must be covered by an appropriate blank panel See Blank Panels page 6 16 Electrical Hazard Exposure to live circuits could cause shock burn and death Do not operate the IPx Office system without covering empty card slots with a protective panel The rear side also includes the unit ground terminal including the M4 threaded pole a serrated washer a flat washer and an M4 nut Figure 6 4 Hear Side of the IPx Offic
196. de n o S M 5 S S ES N E ua Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards gt 10 37 gt Y MX S S E S 2 Figure 10 18 20 Office 10 38 Peripheral Cards Ring Frequency 20Hz 25Hz JU1 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 19 458 SH S 4S16F 8S8F and 8S16F Office JU1 1 Ring Frequency m JU3 O 4S or 8S 8SFT or 16SFT diagnostic LED diagnostic LED 20Hz 25Hz ani 8Fx Office Pins FlexSet n o 5 M S D S D S E D 4S8F Office 4S Office 8Fx Office 4S16F Office 4S Office 16Fx Office 8S8F Office 85 Office 8Fx Office 8S16F Office 8S Office 16Fx Office Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards gt 10 39 22 Y MX S S E S 2 Figure 10 20 8 Office Card 10 40 Peripheral Cards e 8T Office TRUNK 0 1 6 7 TRUNK 2 3 4 5 4 1 0 7 1 2 2 STR 3 3 STT 4 TR 4 TR RJ 45 plug male oh ii clip at rear 5 _ _
197. directed pickup 2 Circuit Description Figure 9 24 is a simplified circuit diagram of the UNA and RLY2 relay contacts The relay provides form A single pole single throw and normally open contacts for activating external circuitry and devices Operation of the relay is determined by the system database Contacts RLY2 are designated to operate in conjunction with UNA for central ringing applications Figure 9 24 UNA amp Relay Contacts 3 4 Simplified Diagram Relay Contacts RLY 2 UNA or Central Bell Incoming Call Shared Service Cards 29 85 Ro D S nm lt X 50 gt S 2 S D Re 3 gt S RQ N 5 9 DI SR EY n lt DO 8 EY lt D S Qe S 37 Configuring the Relay Contacts 3 4 J umper to Bell The relay contacts 3 4 may be either RLY2 BELL or RLY3 System Alarm or Dial Operated contacts Figure 9 21 displays the jumper settings for the page feature Table 9 24 Relay Contacts 3 4 BELL RELAY Selection P4 Jumper Setting Figure 9 25 Bell Relay Simplified Diagram P4 4 5 3 4 Relay Contacts 3 4 BELL RLY2 RELAY RLY3 Relay System Alarm or contacts Dial Operated P4 3 rg Ec p RLY 2 A 4 3 0 RLY3 RELAY 4 gt i Sho
198. dware Installation Procedure 2 13 E 8 S S YV 5 ky 7 Mounting Rack Units Preparing the Unit for Mounting onto the Rack 1 Aligna front rack mounting bracket such that the three holes are adjacent with the holes on the unit 2 Insert three of the M4X8 screws provided into the three holes and fasten the right bracket to the unit 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 for the other front rack mounting bracket Preparing the Rack for Unit Mounting The IPx Office unit is supported from the rear by two brackets that are attached to the rack To install the support brackets see Figure 2 5 1 Fasten the left rear rack mounting bracket to the rack 2 Fasten the right rear rack mounting bracket to the rack t z gt The fasteners that secured to the rack are not included Mounting the Unit onto the Rack 1 Verify the unit mounting position on the rack See Space Requirements page 2 2 2 Grasp each end of the unit and lift it to the mounting position on the rack CL Weight Hazard The weight is provided in Table 2 2 on page 2 3 Serious injury could result due to improper handling Use proper techniques to mount and secure to the rack poeni EN UL d 3 Rest unit on the support brackets installed while continuing to support the A 5 Ry unit from the front and fasten the left and right bracket
199. e Card FastenerS nennen nensem 11 11 xxi Figure 11 5 NTU Office Card AssemblY 11 11 Figure 11 6 WiFi Card Assembly u i 11 14 Figure 11 7 WiFi Antenna Assembly eee 11 15 Figure 11 8 Networking Connection without an NTU Office 4 11 21 xxii Coral IPx Office Installation Manual About this Manual 1 1 Document Description The Coral IPx Office Installation Guide and Hardware Reference Manual is designed for field use by Coral system installation and service personnel It describes the installation of the Coral IPx Office system This manual is divided into two primary parts systematic installation procedure m complete hardware reference Chapters 2 3 4 5 and 6 include all installation procedures These chapters listed below outline the step by step process of performing a complete new Coral IPx Office system installation Peripheral devices can be installed at any time after system installation For peripheral device installation refer to the Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual Where is it What is it about When to use it Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Start the installation process with this chapter Procedure Follow its instructions to ensure that the Coral IPx Office system will be properly unpacked installed and ready for operation Chapter 3 Initial Pow
200. e Coral IPx Office unit are made via m Standard 25 pair Input Output I O Champ telco connectors located on the front panel of the full size peripheral cards See Table 5 1 and Figure 5 1 m RJ 45 connectors located on the front panel of full and half size peripheral cards See Table 5 1 and Figure 5 1 For information on LAN WAN connections see Chapter 11 System Networking It is recommended to terminate all the connectors available in the system on punch blocks at the MDF even if some cables are not initially used This saves time and effort when the system expanas 5 D E 5 E S 5 5 5 E Q A S gt 5 2 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Table 5 1 External I O Connectors for Coral IPx Office Peripheral Cards Card Name Number of Connectors Card Slot Champ RJ 45 Special 8 16 24SFT office 1 2 3 4 5 4 85 Office 1 205 office 85 125 1 4S8F office 45 8 1 4S16F office 45 16Fx 1 8S8F office 8S 8Fx 1 8S16F office 85 16Fx 1 8T office 8 8T CID office 8T 8CID 8 IPC SFC uCMC WiCMC office see Figure 10 22 MR office 2 stereo 6 7 3 5 mm RMI office phone plugs and 2 relay wire U MR office pairs see U RMI office Figure 9 8 ESIM office Expansion 8 9 cable A E S 30T office 1 8 9 le 10 11 5 4TBR office 4 5
201. e Unit slots 2 3 slots 4 5 lots 6 7 225 slots 10 11 slot 1 slots 8 9 S n Q S 5 ta 2 S Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description 2 6 5 n E 2 S 6 6 Cage Description Side Panels The side panels of the IPx Office cover include perforations that allow the flow of cool ambient air to the system with the aid of three convection fans See Figure 6 5 and Figure 6 6 The right side panel also includes the Software Authorization Unit SAU connector See Software Authorization Management page 8 14 Top Side The top side is part of the cover No space needs to be maintained above the unit cover for maintenance purposes the IPx Office unit can be positioned directly below other equipment Bottom Panel The bottom panel includes five circular indentations that mark where the five rubber supports are to be affixed when the unit is mounted onto a table See Mounting Table Units page 2 13 No space needs to be maintained beneath the bottom panel the IPx Office unit can be positioned directly above other equipment Installation Kit The cage is supplied with a kit that includes components for mounting the cage onto a table or a rack For table mounted systems five rubber supports are affixed to the bottom panel of the IPx Office unit See Figure 6 1 on pa
202. e appears If the backup file save operation fails the following message appears SAVE FAILED During the save operation no database updating will occur S ta o D n S 5 S S Q 3 2 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Software Installation Procedure 4 7 3 Loading Restoring from IMC8 or IMC16 A system database stored in IMCS can be loaded into the database memory on the MCB Office card at any time P NOTE E Loading the database from IMC8 generally takes several minutes During this process the Coral system is non operational Loading a database can be useful for installing the database of an existing system into the database memory of another system that will have a substantially similar configuration Similarly a database can be created by programming a system off line at another location perhaps at the distributor s facilities The database can then be loaded at a convenient time at the intended site CAUTION Loading a database from IMC8 into the system database memory destroys the original database information stored in the database memory and overwrites it with information in the IMC8 database file Once overwritten the original database cannot be recovered 1 From the Database Flash Menu press 1 to load a database from IMCS The system will display the following message CAUTION Database contents will be lost amp system will restart Proceed with restore Y
203. e cards See Figure 9 20 Table 9 23 defines the position of P4 for the paging selection Figure 9 17 Paging amp Relay Contacts 1 2 Simplified Diagram External Connectors M2 P Voice Page Output Stereo Phone Jack Converter CODEC PCM Bus Digital Analog Relay contacts RLY 1 PAGE 5 9 78 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Configuring the Paging M2 P J umper to Paging The system paging output M2 P may be either music source or a voice page output Figure 9 19 displays the jumper settings for the music source Table 9 22 M2 P Music Paging Selection P3 Jumper Setting Figure 9 18 Paging Simplified Diagram PCM Bus Figure 9 19 Paging M2 P Music Paging Selection Jumper Setting Ow Se 25 DO A P3 2 3 1 2 M2 P Paging Output External Music Input External Connectors Music 2 Source M2 P Page Stereo Phone Jack Output M2 P Function P3 1 Paging Output 2 3 1 External Music 2 Input 3 U 0 0 o o Shared Service Cards 29 79 nm 5 S 2 5 3 m 5 Re nm 9 S gt 5 R x do 5 S EY 2 Voice Paging Public Address Relay 1 Public Address 4 Configuring the Relay Contacts 1 2 J umper to Paging The relay contacts 1 2 may be either RLY1 PAGE o
204. ead of the DMM to the positive red terminal and the negative lead to the negative black terminal The reading must be 48 volts PSN NOTE E If a minus sign appears in the meter display the polarity of the 48VDC power to the cage is reversed Verify the meter settings and connections If the meter is properly set and connected carefully examine the wiring between the external 48VDC main power supply determine the location of the polarity reversal and correct the wiring error before continuing 6 Insert the DC power input connector into the receptacle of the PS Office DC unit 7 Perform the DC power supply test for expansion cages as described in Chapter 3 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual or Coral IPx 800 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Figure 3 2 Office DC power wires Unit DC Power To facilities DC power source Connections 5 Ground wire N To master ground A amp D lots 2 3 51015 e f aL slots 4 5 9 slots 6 7 O sots48 9 805 10 1 e di Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests 3 3 NOTES 5 S gt s D S 3 4 Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Test This section deals with the Common Control Test 1 Control Initial
205. ective strip has been removed all control and NTU Office cards are properly installed that all internal cables are properly connected and that the NTU Office card ON OFF switch is turned ON Verify that the internal space within the unit is free of foreign objects Position the internal side of the front panel adjacent to the front side of the IPx Office unit and lift the rear side of the cover upward From the rear panel of the unit attach the LED panel cable to the IPx Office unit Close the unit cover Fasten the fifteen M3 screws with a Phillips screwdriver Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 6 8 Closing the Cover Coral IPx Office Installation Manual m TE Connect cable Lower cover downward Fasten all 15 screws General System Description Cage Description gt 6 11 S 3 5 o Q S 2 un 3 D D o 3 Unit Interior Front Section The Main BackPlane MBP divides the interior of the IPx Office unit into two sections the front section and the rear section See Figure 6 9 Figure 6 9 IPx Office Rear Unit Interior section MCB Office card DBM X card Compact Flash Disk Network card Front section The front section includes the control cards and the networking cards The control cards include the m Main Control Board MCB Office m Optional expansion DataBase Module DBM X card m
206. ed Backup voltage is supplied by the MCB Office motherboard lithium battery The DBM X does not occupy a card slot within the IPx Office system unit Rather it is installed as a baby card onto a memory interface connector on the MCB Office main processor card The P1 connector on the DBM X card is installed onto the P13 connector of the MCB Office card See Figure 8 15 The DBM X connectors are not 4 A Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 2 8 41 compatible with the DBM X connectors Only DBM X card can be installed in the IPx Office unit When is a DBM X card required A DBM X card is required when m The Coral Directory Traffic and Call Log features are used m The CoraLINK Adapter circuitry is relevant to your system version Consult the Program Interface Reference Manual Chapter 4 Size Definition Route SIZ CHECK MEMORY to display the database memory status a 8 42 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Installing the DBM X The DBM X is secured to the MCB Office by a threaded spacer The parts used to attach the spacer to the MCB Office are listed below FN NOTE E The DBM X assembly kit includes additional parts However you only need to use the parts listed below Table 84 Assembly Part Quantit Parts Used in DBM X y Assembly Kit Phillips screw M3X6 6 Washer spring curved M3 3 Male female standoff hex M3X6 3 Pre
207. ed gateway for IP phones trunks and keysets SLTS and trunks require a Coral Teleport It provides the capacity to drive up to 240 Coral IP ports regardless of their physical location and provides full Coral services to these sets Certain Coral features require the intervention of the Media Resources Card MRC The MRC is mounted on the MCB Office in piggyback fashion It provides media channels used to convert PCM calls to IP Packets and vice versa Media channels are also needed when one of the calling parties is not an IP host No media channels are needed for pure IP to IP connections direct connects See MRC Card page 8 27 for further information S S S D S gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 2 8 9 1 Group Controller Circuit The group controller embedded circuit serves as the communication link in the Coral IPx Office system between the MCB Office and the peripheral cards via the MBP Office backplane The group controller circuit contains the High Level Data Link Control HDLC bus interface circuitry Pulse Code Modulation PCM bus interface circuitry clock circuitry to synchronize the peripheral section of the system and digital tone generators dial busy ringing ringback DTMF and test Additionally the group controller contains circuitry to synchronize the Coral peripheral clock to an external clock derived from
208. eference Manual Figure 3 3 MDF Connector Configuration a a a aY N w D S o 5 3 16 Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Installation Wrap up 3 1 Remove any other items from the shipping containers Remove all empty packages crates and debris gt Verify that you have provided all of the necessary instructions documentation to the system operator I NOTE E Once the system is completely installed and operating it is no longer necessary to keep the shipping containers n S Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests gt 3 17 NOTES T S w 5 S ta n 5 3 18 Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Generic Feature Software Upgrade 1 Introduction The Coral IPx Office is delivered to the site with factory loaded software on the IMC8 or IMC 16 card The IMCS card is an 8MB flash memory card The IMC16 card is 16MB flash memory card See IMC8 and IMC16 Flash Cards page 8 33 for details The IMCS card is installed on the front panel of the IPx Office system The software initialization procedure is described in Common Control Test page 3 5 The IMC8 and IMC 16 cards contain three types of data m Generic Feature Software Versi
209. em processor The audio side of the modem circuitry directly accesses the switching matrix is assigned a dial number in the system database and may answer incoming calls in virtually the same manner as any other port in the system The modem can be configured to transmit or receive data This is useful when maintenance from a remote workstation is necessary During normal system operation it is advisable to set the modem transmit and receive function to Off for more secure system operation Figure 9 11 displays the jumper settings for the modem Shared Service Cards 29 61 x nS D Q E S S 8 S S S E Re US D Q E S D 5 3 E D Re Figure 9 11 Modem Jumper Configuration 4 Function P6 Function P5 1 1 Rx Modem On 2 Tx Modem On 2 3 3 1 1 Rx Modem Off 2 Tx Modem Off 2 3 3 P6 P5 P4 o P3 P2 The modem may only be used communicate with the system processor for programming and maintenance purposes or for retrieving station message detail recording SMDR data or wake up reports lt may not be used as a switched data port Setting the Transmit or Receive function of the modem to On during normal system operation exposes the Coral IPx Office system to penetration by unauthorized parties
210. embedded on the MCB Office control card as well as the NTU Office Network Unit card that is installed within the system at specific customer request The NTU card functions as a router enabling direct connection to the WAN A WiFi card can be installed upon the NTU card supplied at specific customer request In addition it also enables direct connection to a printer via a USB port 2 System Operation without an NTU Office Card The Coral IPx Office system enables seamless connection to the digital and IP world with or without an NTU Office card Without an NTU Office card the Coral IPx Office can connect to the WAN only after an external customer supplied router has been connected See Figure 11 1 Media Stream from the Digital World to the LAN and WAN PCM streams are directed from the Coral to the MRC which converts the PCM streams into RTP packets See MRC Card page 8 27 for more information The RTP packets are directed through the UGW internal switch The switches direct the packets to LAN ports 1 8 The DHCP server provides the dynamic IP address to the devices enabling connection to the endpoints on the LAN An external customer supplied SS 5 a D Q D 3 S D router directs the packets to their destination over the WAN Coral IP x Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 3 Media Stream from the LAN and WAN to the Digital World Packets are directed from a customer supplied rou
211. ent and the receiver c Connect the equipment on an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected d Consult with the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician To ensure continued compliance with specified radio energy emissions limits of FCC Rules the following precautions must be observed while installing and operating the equipment 1 Install the equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 2 Verify that the power supply and associated A C powered equipment are connected to a properly grounded electrical supply and that power cords if used are unmodified Verify that the system grounding including Master Ground D C power system and equipment cabinets is in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and connected to an approved earth ground source Always replace the factory supplied cover or keep the cabinet doors closed when not servicing the equipment Make no modification to the equipment that would affect its compliance with the specified limits of FCC Rules Maintain the equipment in a satisfactory state of repair Verify that emissions limiting devices such as ferrite blocks and radio frequency interference mod ules are properly installed and functional If necessary the operator should consult their supplier or an experienced radio television engineer for additional suggestions The following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission FCC may be
212. eptacle designated for the system 7 Verify that the IMC8 and the flash cards are fully installed Peripheral cards may be inserted or removed from the system with power applied Turn on the power supply units in the expansion cages only after powering the IPx Office unit and verifying that it has initialized properly and the Power indicator on the front panel of the IPx Office unit does not illuminate Otherwise the cards in the peripheral expansion cages might not initialize 8 Turn the PS Office AC power switch ON and verify that the green Power LED indicator on the front panel of the IPx Office is lit 9 Turn the PS Office AC power switch OFF D gt 5 T D 2 S o lt D E Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 7 Figure 7 5 IPx Office AC Power Connections To master ground To AC power outlet PS Office AC slots 2 3 m slots 4 5 8 slots 6 7 slots 8 9 slots 10 11 e slot 1 D gt s 2 a lt D 2 S WN lt 7 8 Power Supply Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Removing the Power Supply 1 Locate a desk or a table top If the surface can be damaged by sharp objects place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar material over the top surface 2 Turn the PS Office AC power switch OFF downwards 3 Unplug the AC power cord from the front
213. equest you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved The following repairs can be done by the customer No repairs allowed This equipment is hearing aid compatible It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected This is to avoid damaging the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment is capable of providing user s access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of equal access codes Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities may be a violation of the telephone operator consumer services improvement act of 1990 and part 68 of the FCC Rules Canadian DOT Compliance Statement NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in s
214. er S M y E lt 1 12 gt introduction Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Site Inspection 1 Installation Environment The Coral IPx Office system should be installed in restricted access areas dedicated equipment rooms equipment closets or the like in accordance with articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the national electric code ANSI NFPA 70 Access to the system should be limited and controlled to prevent unauthorized tampering The system uses hazardous working voltages and extremely high short circuit currents and the area must be protected against damage by and injury to unqualified personnel Due to these considerations an installation area must be chosen in accordance with the following guidelines 1 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Verify that the installation area is clean dry and protected from weather extremes Verify that the floor of the installation area is covered with linoleum vinyl ceramic wooden flooring or polished sealed concrete Carpeting is not acceptable Verify that the ceiling of the installation area is finished or treated to prevent particle discharge Verify that the installation area is well lit and that the light is uniformly diffused without shadows Adequate lighting should provide a comfortable reading level and allow wire insulator color identification without undue eye
215. er Up After completing installation use this chapter to enable the IPx Office system to process calls Chapter 4 Software Installation Use this chapter to upgrade the IPx Office software Procedure and save the database Chapter 5 External Connections The pinout tables for peripheral card and LAN WAN connections are found here The tables are used during the installation procedure performed in Chapter 2 Also surge arrestors are installed here S 5 43 5 ES lt Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Introduction 21 1 S 3 S 43 ta 3 XS lt 1 2 Introduction Chapters 6 7 8 9 10 and 11 describe the hardware reference These chapters offer detailed technical information about IPx Office system hardware including cage specifications internal power supplies and interface circuit operation Where is it Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 What is it about Cabinet Description Power Supply Description Control Cards Shared Service Peripheral Interface Cards NTU Office Card and WiFi Card When to use it To learn about the main unit and expansion cages Whenever reference information about power supplies is required or whenever adding or re installing a power supply item For general information installation procedures and card handling advice regarding the common control card set For reference mat
216. er source is made according to local requirements 1 The PS Office DC power supply unit is supplied with a 6 6ft 2m long pair of 16 AWG wires one red and one black If this is not long enough to connect the facilities power source to the cage fabricate an extension at the customer s site with two wires that are identical to the ones above 2 Route each power wire to the DC connection on the front panel of the PS Office DC Take care not to let the free end of the cable cause damage by swinging loose or making contact with another electrical connection 3 Do not insert the DC power input connector at this time Leave the DC power input connector unplugged 4 Connect the other ends of the wires to the 48VDC facilities power source and a circuit breaker as shown in Figure 2 19 and Figure 2 20 and according to local regulatory requirements m Negative black wire to the circuit breaker or 48V busbar panel m Positive red wire to the 48VDC terminal or 48V busbar panel 5 Skip to Chapter 3 Initial Power up Tests 2 R 5 Ry 2 36 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 2 19 DC Power Wiring for One IPx Office Unit DC power wires To facilities DC power source Ground wire To master ground Figure 2 20 DC Power Wiring for Three Units Coral IPx Office Installation Manual slots 2 3 T slots 4 5
217. eral service 5 5 amp 2 Ke controller Applicable in Applicable in Applicable in IPx 800 500X IPx 800X 1024 time Slots 128 time slots lax 16GC TZ Tone generator 64 time slots reserved 64 time slots B6 128 time slots A7 7 5 5 S S 8 12 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Circuit Description Clock Selection The external clock synchronization selector monitors the two inputs for the presence of an 8 0 KHz clock signal which may be derived from a digital trunk card A primary and secondary clock source may be defined in the system database to synchronize the PCM clock of the group controller to the digital trunk In the absence of an external clock source the group controller always reverts to an internal clock Clock failure is reported in the Program Interface Digital Tone Generator The digital tone generator generates the audio call progress tones used to notify the caller of the status of the call The stored tone patterns are output directly to the digital PCM bus when required PCM Streaming Each PCM stream operates at a data rate of 4 096 bps Each PCM stream consists of transmit and receive signals each of which are divided into 128 time slots Each time slot is eight bits wide sampled every 125 us or 8 000
218. erence number is displayed on the user s keyset However different members in the same chained conference may see different conference numbers on their display URC Meet Me Conference Modes The Meet Me conference can be defined to operate in one of two different modes m Summation Enables all conference participants to be heard simultaneously during the conference m Strongest Win Enables only the loudest speaker to be heard during the conference The technician is able to define a maximum number of participants when using the Summation mode When this maximum is exceeded the system automatically switches the conference to the Strongest Win mode see PI Branch CDB 11 2 CONF MEMBERS page 9 43 and CONF SWITCH DELAY page 9 43 on URC Card DB Meet Me Conference Route CDB 11 2 page 9 43 5 E E v gt E gt 29 2 3 M S D S S 9 40 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Database Programming The Meet Me Bridge Conference Circuit CONF requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required for CONF The following parameters must be set to enable Multi party conferencing and Group Calls Special Port Facilities Route PDB 3 Use this field for the following m To assign this port to a specific tenant group m To determine
219. erial U RMI Office U MR Office or MRC For reference material or if you are installing a peripheral interface card Also see the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual For reference material or if you are installing and registering the NTU Office card Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Related Documentation For further information not in the scope of this manual about Coral service cards Coral peripheral cards voice terminals VoIP devices etc consult the following documentation Table 1 1 Related Documentation Item Coral systems All FlexSet types Coral Database Coral Software IPx 500X Expansion Cages for IPx Office IPx 800X Expansion Cages for IPx Office Peripheral cards Peripheral device Shared Service cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Subject General description and specifications for marketing Description Programming Backup Installation and Upgrade Descriptions and Installation Procedure Descriptions and Installation Procedure Descriptions and Installation Procedure Installation and Troubleshooting Descriptions and Installation Procedure Manual Coral Product Description Coral Product Description 1 PI Program Interface and Database Reference Manual 2 CVA CoralVIEW Administrator User Manual 3 CVD CoralVIEW Designer Guide 1 PI Program Interface and Database Reference Manual Chapter 21 2 Database Bi
220. ernal circuitry and devices Operation of the relays is configured at the PI system database Contacts RLY3 are designated for use as either a major or minor system alarm signal or an auxiliary dial operated relay contact Do not exceed the contact ratings listed in the specifications Figure 9 29 RLY3 1 Simplified Diagram RLY3 Major Minor Alarm Signal or Auxiliary Dial Operated Accessory Relay Contacts 1 2 when P4 is connected legs 2 3 3 4 when P4 is connected between legs 3 4 E S 5 S n gt S D S lt aA n D 9 92 gt Office Installation Manual 3 Configuring the Relay Contacts 1 2 J umper to RLY3 The relay contacts 1 2 may be either RLY1 PAGE or RLY3 System Alarm or Dial Operated contacts Figure 9 31 displays the jumper settings for the page feature Table 9 25 Relay Contacts 1 2 RLY3 PAGE Selection P4 Jumper Setting Figure 9 30 RLY3 Contacts 1 2 Simplified Diagram PAGE P4 2 3 1 2 Relay Contacts 1 2 RELAY RLY3 PAGE RLY1 Relay System Alarm or Dial Operated Figure 9 31 Relay Contacts 1 2 RLYS PAGE Selection P4 Jumper Setting RLY1 PAGE contacts i H RLY 3 T x RLY3 RELAY Relay Contacts 1 2 Function P4 RLY3 RELAY Ca N RLY1 PAGE a A N
221. ersation HDLC and PCM highways clock and synchronization signals as well as alarms are constantly exchanged between the cages data transfer is carried out via the IPx Office expansion cable The IPx Office expansion cable is connected from the IPx Office unit to the first expansion cage If an additional expansion cage is connected an H500 1 cable is connected from the first expansion cage to the second expansion cage One IPx Office cable 47 2 120 cm long is supplied with each ESIM Office card The cable includes a 50 pin male SCSI straight connector that connects to the female connector on the front panel of the ESIM card The 50 pin angled SCSI connector is connected to the first expansion cage The IPx 500X expansion cage includes two 50 pin connections the top connection is female the bottom connection is male The top female connection connects the first expansion cage to the second expansion cage The lower male connection connects either to the female connection on the main cage or to the female connection on the first expansion cage The IPx 800X expansion age includes two 50 pin cable connections the lower connection is female the top connection is male The lower female connection gt ke E 5 8 E 3 20 5 o S 5 n connects the first expansion cage to the second expansion cage The top male connection connects either to the female connection on the main cage or to
222. esentative of the carrier Otherwise before opening move the container as close as possible to the installation area 3 Usinga utility knife carefully cut the tape securing the top flaps of the container and open the flaps 4 Remove any parts in the depressions of the top foam insert 5 Remove the top foam insert and set aside 6 Using an assistant to prevent personal injury grasp the ends of the cage and lift it out of the container Place the cage on a stable surface 7 Inspect the cage and covers for shipping damage 8 Check the part list and verify that all the items are present Table 2 5 lists the components that are supplied with the Coral IPx Office system 9 Remove any other items from the shipping container and move the container so that it does not interfere with the remaining installation procedures 2 R 5 Ry 2 8 Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Table 2 5 Part List ltem Description Quantit Items per IPx Office p y Unit Main unit IPx Office including one MCB Office card 1 For systems that include expansion cages IPx 500X or IPx 800X one ESIM 1 Office card ordered at specific customer request for connection to the first expansion cage including a IPx Office expansion cable with a female D type 50 pin connector and a male SCSI connector PS Office AC or DC power supply unit AC supplied by default DC ordered at
223. et n o S M 5 S S ES N E ua Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards gt 10 33 Figure 10 14 45 Office Card 8 16Fx Office connector 8 16Fx Office connector Ring Frequency Jus O 20Hz 25Hz e 4S Office SLT Station 50 51 52 53 22 Y MX K U 2 10 34 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 15 85 Office SH S Card 0010 8 16Fx Office 12Sx Office HI Im 125x and kai 8 16Fx 77 connector Ring Frequency 16970 20Hz 25Hz 8S Office Pins SLT Station n o 5 M S D S D S E D un Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards gt 10 35 22 Y MX S S E S 2 Figure 10 16 12Sx Office Card Top Side 10 36 Peripheral Cards Mounting holes for plastic screws and spacers for connecting to 8S Office NS SS Y S Plastic Plastic Plastic screw spacer SS screw 12Sx Office 8S Office Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 17 125 Office Card Rear Si
224. et time DB1 DEF Manual backup typically used by a technician 4 When the prompt EXECUTE Y N N appears type Y to begin the save process or N to cancel and return to the Database IMC8 menu The PI command prompt will return immediately but the system will process the command as a background low priority task Pa NOTE E Saving the database to a file generally takes several seconds While the database is being saved it is important to note that changes to the system configuration such as changing the system to Night Service setting a Call Forward or Do Not Disturb instruction at a station even turning on or off Background Music at a key set are disabled until the database save process is completed If the system is unable to save the database one of several messages will be generated by the system 4 6 Software Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual When the flash memory space is insufficient for saving the database DBS the following message will appear NO SPACE FOR SAVING DATA BASE When at least one of the flags cannot be recognized the following message will appear CORRUPTED DBS 5 When the backup is valid the save operation continues with Caution Previous backup will be lost Proceed with backup Y N N Type Y to continue the save operation The following message appears SAVING If the backup file is saved successfully the following messag
225. etails 7 Special Port Facilities Route PDB 7 Use this field to assign this port to a specific tenant group Refer to Chapter 23 Bell UNA in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details 8 Class Of Service Route COS 0 UNA Use the UNA parameter to determine whether a specific station user is allowed to dial the Bell port Refer to Chapter 7 Station and Trunk COS in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details 9 Sizes Def Route SIZ BELL UNA ai 3 D n lt ta ie lt 5 amp D x Q s lt S 3 E z d Use the BELL UNA parameter to determine the number of Bell Universal Night Answering UNA groups Shared Service Cards 29 87 5 External Connections Incoming trunk calls may be directed to activate a relay contact at certain times of the day typically after normal business hours The relay contact sounds a tone over a paging or public address system or operate a mechanical bell Upon hearing the tone or bell the trunk is then answered by dialing a specific feature code at any station allowed to answer calls Figure 9 27 and Figure 9 28 illustrate connections to a contact operated tone signal and to a mechanical bell Note that due to electrical limitations the contact may not be used to switch loads requiring high voltage or high current See Rel
226. f the These tables display the direct connector Champ Card Connection pinout of the I O connector page 523 Champ 50 connected to the card Block 66 MDF Direct Pinout of the MDF These tables display the Block 66 Connection page 525 MDF connections Figure 5 7 45 Office and 8S Office Jumper Settings Ring Frequency JU1 JU3 20Hz 25Hz n O D 3 D D X A D S O S n S 9 o D S S O E O NS 5 22 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Direct Pinout of the Champ Card Connection Table 5 8 displays the pinout connection directly on the Champ card connection for the 45 Office 85 Office 205 Office 8SFT Office 16SFT Office and 24SFT Office peripheral cards Table 5 8 Champ 50 Pin 4S Office 8S Office 205 8SFT Office 16SFT Office 24SFT Office Connector Card Pinout 894 12Sx 4 8 20S 8 16 24SFT 1 SRO SRO SRO AO 0 AO 26 STO STO STO BO BO BO 2 SRI SRI SRI A1 A1 A1 27 ST1 ST1 ST1 B1 B1 B1 3 SR2 SR2 SR2 A2 A2 A2 28 ST2 ST2 ST2 B2 B2 B2 4 SR3 SR3 SR3 A3 A3 A3 29 ST3 ST3 ST3 B3 B3 B3 5 SR4 SR4 A4 B4 B4 30 ST4 ST4 B4 A4 A4 6 SR5 SR5 A5 A5 A5 31 ST5 ST5 B5 B5 B5 7 SR6 SR6 A6 A6 A6 32 ST6 ST6 B6 B6 B6 8 SR7 SR7 A7 A7 A7 33 ST7 ST7 B7 B7 B7 9 SR8 A8 A8 34 ST8 B8 B8 10 SR9 A9 A9 35 ST9 B9 B9 1 SR10 A10 ATO 36 ST10 B10 B10 12 SR11
227. facilities provided by the local telephone utility company are equipped with primary protection devices installed with the circuit However privately owned aerial or buried cable feeding from one building to another may not be equipped with protection devices Always consult with whoever provided the circuits to determine whether protection devices are present and if so what type Never assume that protection devices have been provided by another party or that existing protection devices are adequate The secondary protection must include a leakage current protector in series with every wire tip and ring on every port that is either connected to the public telephone network or to any cable located outdoors The requirement is in accordance with UL Specification 60950 Third Edition or CSA C22 2 No 60950 The required protectors can be mounted directly on a 66 block in the MDF Table 5 4 Telephone Circuit Primary Protection Device Specifications Specification Measurement Construction Primary Element 3 Electrode Gas Tube Fail safe Metallic Shunt 1 00 to Ground Max Vent Safe Spark Gap Per UL 497 Heat Coil recommended 1 0A 100 Sec Max Clamp Points per REA PE 80 DC 350VDC Max 2kV S 400VDC Max 100V uS 500VDC Max 10kV uS 800VDC Max Vent Safe 100V uS 1600VDC Max DC Impulse Current 8x20uS wave 10KA Nom AC Discharge Current 60Hz 1S 10A Nom DC Holdover per IEEE 465 1 160VDC Max 5 12 Coral IPx Of
228. fatigue Lighting should be comparable to an office work environment with a minimum level of 70 foot candles at each work surface As a general rule in a room with an 8 ft 2 5m ceiling one 48 inch fluorescent tube provides sufficient illumination for 20 25 sq ft 1 9 2 4 m2 E 2 3 un Hardware Installation Procedure 22 1 5 Verify that ventilation of the installation area is capable of maintaining an ambient temperature of 32 104 F 0 40 C and a relative humidity of 20 80 non condensing considering the system nominal heat dissipation 700 BTU hr These figures are for each cage only and do not take into account heat generated by other equipment 6 Verify that the installation area is free of caustic or corrosive liquids substances or materials Check local building codes for additional requirements 7 Verify that the installation area is located no closer than 20 ft 6 1m from electric devices that produce large electro magnetic fields or high levels of radio frequency energy Possible sources are radio transmitters electric arc welding machines copying machines electric motors refrigeration units power transformers electric load centers and main circuit breaker panels 8 Verify that the installation area provides reasonable security to the system Room construction should include solid reinforced walls and a locking door 2 Space Requirements This section describes the C
229. ffice U RMI office 8 9 30T Office 4TBR office PRI 30 Office UDT office ESIM office 10 11 30T Office 4TBR office PRI 30 Office UDT office 4T Office 1 4T CID Office 4T 4CID These cards are combination of two cards n o D E S gt lt 5 52 S 5 gt Q 5 o 5 D RR D a 10 8 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Digital Trunk Synchronization 1 Slave Clock Mode Operation The Coral IPx Office system is capable of operating in either master clock mode or slave clock mode The selection between modes is made via the PI software How The System Derives The External Clock Signal The Coral IPx Office uses digital trunk interface cards to synchronize its internal clock with the PSTN clock or with another switching system clock When operating in slave clock mode the data stream transferred on the digital trunk is fed into the MCB Office Main Control Board incorporating the external clock rate into the Coral IPx Office internal clock To allow the clock signal to be fed into the Coral IPx Office internal clock the ESIM and the digital trunk interface cards are properly strapped to accept those signals Two synchronization sources can be defined for a system One serves as the primary source and the other serves as a secondary synchronization signal source The following digital trunk cards can retrieve synchroni
230. fice Installation Manual Table 5 5 Telephone Circuit Secondary Device Type Specification Measurement Protection Device Specifications Clamp Points DC 230VDC Max 2kV S 230VDC Max Surge Impulse Puis 10 5 30VDC Protector Sneak Current 350mA Max Protector Fusing Time Characteristics 100 of Rating 4 Hr Min 150 of Rating 10 Sec Nom 210 Sec Max n E gt 5 Q 2 O 3 w e 29 External Connections 2 5 13 Cei D E gt D ta N Surge Arrestor Magazine To prevent serious damage to the Coral IPx Office system the analog trunk and station circuits whose cables are laid outside the building must be protected from the electrical peaks caused by lightning Magazine 10 surge arrestors must be mounted on the MDF where telephone circuits are cross connected Figure 5 4 Magazine with 10 Surge Arrestor and Voltage Protector Units Surge Voltage E Protector Magazine 10 Surge Arrestor The mounting procedure is as follows 1 Identify the MDF disconnecting strips used for telephone connections 2 Place a magazine 10 surge arrestor catalog no 7244 3190009 on each MDF strip used for telephone 3 Identify the MDF cross connection points that are used for each telephone The connecting cables will be visible 4 Insert a surge voltage protector catalog no 7244 2350001 in the magazine 10 surge arrestor where a telephone is
231. formation The LED card includes the eight 8 diagnostic LED indicators that appear on the front panel of the IPx Office system These LEDS are Figure 8 9 LED Office Card Coral IPx Office Installation Manual POWER green indicates whether the 5V power output is functional GC ACT green indicates 16GC activity status MRC green indicates whether the MRC card is functioning Maint red indicates whether the UGW or MCB circuit is in maintenance mode Fan red indicates whether the fans are functional GC red indicates the GC status UGW red indicates whether the UGW is in maintenance mode CPU red indicates the MCP circuit status S 5 Common Control Cards 2 8 25 2 Disconnecting the LED Office Card from the MCB Office Card The LED Office card is attached to the MCB Office main control card and to the Coral IPx Office cover If the cover is removed without disconnecting the flat cable from the MCB Office card first the cable will tear and the LED Office card will not function Verify that the cable is detached prior to removing the unit cover See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 3 Replacing the LED Office Card This section describes how to remove the LED Office card from the unit cover and replace it with a new one To replace the LED Office card 1 2 8 26 gt Common Control Cards Open the unit cover See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 Pos
232. g Circuitry The PS Office AC also limits the 48VDC output to feed the peripheral card slots D D S o S S un 29 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 5 D gt A 5 lt D 3 n 37 Installation and Operation The power supply unit is inserted into the Coral IPx Office unit in the right side of the IPx Office unit from the rear Installing the Power Supply 1 Verify that the IPx Office unit ground wire is connected and the ground nut is tightened See Figure 2 7 2 Verify that the power switch is turned OFF 212772 Contact with live wires in the power supply unit could cause shock or death Do not connect the power cord or turn ON the power switch of the power supply before inserting it into the IPx Office system 3 Position the two guide ridges located on the lower panel of the power supply at the right and left into the card edge guides The power supply slot is positioned adjacent to the fans in the rear section of the IPx Office unit 4 Slide the power supply gently but firmly until fully inserted into the card cage A slight resistance should be felt as the multi pin connectors engage at the rear of the power supply and backplane Do not force the power supply into the card cage Irreparable damage may occur if the multi pin connectors misalign while attempting to insert the unit into the card cage
233. ge 6 2 For more information see Mounting Table Units page 2 13 For rack mounted units two bracket are attached to the unit cover and the unit itself The bracket and unit assembly are then attached to the rack Two additional brackets are mounted onto the rack and provide additional support from below See Figure 6 2 on page 6 2 For more information see Mounting Rack Units page 2 14 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Unit Cover The unit cover protects internal circuitry during normal operation from damage and RFI while still allowing access to the interior for maintenance activities The cover also enables forced convection cooling of the components See Figure 6 6 The unit cover includes m Ventilation openings on the left and right sides that enable cool air intake from the right panel and warm exhaust air from the left m Openings for the numerous LEDs and connectors and holes that enable the unit to be attached to the rack Figure 6 5 Left View of the IPx Office Unit Cover Cool air intake Front Panel Figure 6 6 Right View of the IPx Office Unit Cover Warm air exhaust Front Panel S 5 5 o nm D D 3 D Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cage Description 6 7 Opening the Unit Cover 1 Verify that the ON OFF switch on the PS Office unit is turned OFF 2 Remove the AC power cord or DC wires from the PS Office unit Electrica
234. ground music during voice pages The control of high voltage high current or inductive loads should be avoided Table 9 7 on page 9 1 7 lists the function of each interface connector as they appear on the card front panel Figure 9 8 on page 9 17 illustrates that connector Relay Electrical Limitations The RLY1 relay contacts have specific electrical limitations which are described in detail in Relay Contacts on page 9 99 These limitations must not be exceeded In addition the type of load the relay contact operates can have a great significance Additional Paging Interface in the optional IPx 800X Cage Additional Paging ports may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes the following functions among others m 1 external voice paging interface or public address m 1 paging relay contacts These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Shared Service Cards 9 83 nm 5 S 2 5 3 A 5 Re nm nm 5 S gt 5 R x do 5 S EY 2 9 Specifications Paging Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 1 0 when Music 2 is used U MR Office card 1 0 when Music 2 is used Office card 1 0 when Music 2 is used MR Office card
235. h satisfactory results if the volume is set relatively low and background noise is not objectionable The music connectors are stereo 3 5 mm phone plugs see Figure 9 9 on page 9 1 7 Figure 9 16 Music Wiring to External Music Source External Connectors 1st Music Source Music on Hold and Background Music M1 Coral Balanced 600 Ohm Output 2nd Music i Source Music on Hold and M P2 Background Music Table 9 7 on page 9 17 lists the function of each interface connector as they appear on the card front panel Figure 9 8 on page 9 17 illustrates that connector 9 74 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 1 Additional Music Interfaces in the Optional 800X Cage Additional Music ports may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes the following functions among others m 1 internal or external music interface 1 external music interface These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 8 Specifications Music Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 2 1 when paging is used U MR Office card 2 1 when paging is used RMI Office card 2 1 when paging is used MR Office card 2 1 when paging is used SDRCF card
236. he card cannot initialize This situation can be rectified only through restructuring the memory allocation of the system Initializing the database and reprogramming the system restructures the memory allocation LED Flashing The Coral IPx Office system continuously runs diagnostic routines to monitor the performance and integrity of its database and circuitry When the circuitry on a particular card fails to perform as expected the system instructs the card to flash its diagnostic LED If on a subsequent execution of the same routine that reported a failure the circuitry passes the test the card is instructed to extinguish the LED Occasionally circuitry may fail a diagnostic test even though it is not truly defective S S D lt So 29 If a card diagnostic LED is observed flashing but no problem is wait 60 minutes and check the card again If the LED is no longer flashing the test failure was Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 3 probably insignificant If the flashing continues however the card is likely to be malfunctioning even if no problem can be identified S 5 S S n 3 D SS 5 D 10 4 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Card Description XXX Office Cards 1 General Description Peripheral interface cards are described in the Cora Service and
237. he different units and MDF is identical to the schematic diagram displayed in Figure 2 9 or Figure 2 10 7 Connect the to the master ground according to the manufacturer s recommendations Figure 2 9 System Ground Connection d aster round 10 AWG stranded wires with ring terminals O IPx Office Unit MDF R 1 0 ohm max Building Entrance Ground E S 3 S D 5 5 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 21 Figure 2 10 System 10 AWG stranded wires Ground with Three Units wWith iind terminals Master Ground Expansion 7 Cage 2 MDF Y O Co m O O Es V 2 a Cage 1 MDE R 1 0 ohm max IPx Office Unit Customer Building supplied Entrance HIDE Ground S 5 S E D 5 5 55 2 22 Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 9 Strapping the Configuration J umpers This section describes how to remove and insert the shorting plugs of the various jumpers In the Coral IPx Office system some of the peripheral cards include jumpers that configure the shared service functions For a specific card description see Chapter 9 Shared Service Cards a
238. i ue eth Expansion Card Slots Number of Peripheral Number of Distribution IPx Office Card Slots Timeslots Expansion Cages 2 3 1 2 3 4 4 slots 128 2 9 5 6 7 8 4 slots 128 23 9 10 for IPx 500X 2 slots for IPx 500X 128 9 10 11 12 for IPx 800X 4 slots for IPx 800X Figure 6 28 IPx Office i IPx Office Main Unit System PCM Timeslot Distribution 128 time slots 0 BO 128 time slots A1 B1 IGC 51212 Peripheral 2 2 2 2 amp IPx 500X 800X IPx 500X 800X group 151 Expansion Cage 2nd Expansion Cage controller 384 time slots 1024 time slots 2 B3 A4 B4 Applicable in Applicable Applicable IPx 800X IPx 500X IPx 800X D T gt 5 8 3 O 5 o S n Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description gt 6 35 gt E 5 8 E 3 20 5 o S 5 n 4 Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion Cage 6 36 j Cage Description General The Coral IPx 500X expansion cage is a small rack or wall mounted extension to the IPx Office Coral IPx 500M or Coral IPx 800M cage It supports any of the Coral FlexiCom 200 and IPx 500 fami
239. ice 2 3 4 5 Even 8T C See Figure 10 20 on 10 40 8 port Loop Start trunk interface card Includes 4 ports with power failure PF transfer Provides a multi pin connector to attach an optional 8CID card in piggyback fashion 8T CID Office 2 3 4 5 4 See Figure 10 21 on 10 41 Combination trunk 8T Office 8CID cards on 8T Office board in piggyback fashion 8 ports total The 8CID card is used for detecting Caller ID information ESIM office B 8 9 Even See Figure 10 4 on page 10 17 Odd When the Coral IPx Office system includes Coral IPx 500X 800X expansion cages the ESIM Office card is installed into the Coral IPx Office unit and the Coral IPx Office expansion cable is attached to the connector on the front panel of the ESIM Office card IPC office Il 2 3 4 5 223 See Figure 10 22 on page 10 42 SFC Odd Voice mail TBD IPC office 2 3 4 5 Even juCMC See Figure 10 22 on page 10 42 uCMC Odd Voice mail TBD IPC office Il 2 3 4 5 Even See Figure 10 22 on page 10 42 WiCMC Voice mail I A 6 7 Even MR See Table 10 6 on page 10 24 PRI 30 office 18 8 9 10 11 Even PRI30 See Figure 10 7 on page 10 27 Odd 30 channel PRI Primary Rate Interface digital trunk card ISDN compatible digital interface European
240. ice ON OFF switch Verify that the LED indicators on the front panel light as described in Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Procedure 7 Turn OFF the PS Office ON OFF switch Equipment Installation 8 Disconnect the power cable s 9 Disconnect the ground wire 2 10 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 4 Installing the Control NTU Office cards The control and NTU Office cards are installed in the front section of the system Opening the Unit Cover Remove the unit cover See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 Installing the Main Resources Card Install the Main Resources Card MRC if supplied See Installing the MRC page 8 29 Installing the DBM X Card Install the DBM X card if supplied See Installing the DBM X page 8 43 Installing the NTU Office Card Install the main NTU Office card if supplied See Installing the NTU Office Card page 11 10 Installing the Internal LAN Cable Install the internal LAN cable if an NTU Office card is not supplied See Connecting to the Network without an NTU Office Card page 11 21 Installing the WiFi Card and Antenna Install the optional WiFi NTU Office card and antenna if supplied See Installing the WiFi Card page 11 13 Removing the Battery Insulator Carefully remove the battery insulator from underneath the lithium battery on the MCB Office card See Figure 8 8 on page 8 22 S E
241. ification number i e a serial number Each system identification number is unique In addition the SAU stores a market identification number which indicates the general geographical area in which the Coral system is installed The system identification number is used to identify a particular Coral system installation site During software installation the SAU serial number is compared with the features authorization data to verify the authorized use of enhanced Coral system features During regular system operation the SAU is checked to ensure that it remains attached to the MCB Office card However if necessary the SAU can be removed for short periods a maximum of two weeks without interrupting system operation If the SAU is removed for more than two weeks the system ceases to process calls CAUTION The Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days for any of the following reasons m The SAU serial number does not match the corresponding IMC8 16 SAU serial number m The Coral generic version contained in the IMC8 16 is higher than is authorized by the SAU m An SAU device is removed from the MCB Office front panel Relevant system messages appear on the PI warning that the system will not operate without the proper SAU Replacing an MCB Office card necessitates removing the SAU from the old card and installing it onto the replaced MCB Office card 5 5 S
242. in Unit Shelf Function Card Slots Timeslots 2 8 4 5 8 9 10 11 S 1 6 7 1 128 Expansion Cages Both expansion cages IPx 500X and or IPx 800X share time slots 256 639 384 time slots between a maximum of 24 card slots The timeslots are evenly divided to three groups of 128 timeslots and distributed between slot sets as detailed in Table 6 7 Therefore slots 1 4 share 128 timeslots slots 5 8 share 128 timeslots and slots 9 10 in IPx 500X or slots 9 12 in IPx 800X share an additional 128 timeslots Figure 6 28 illustrates the distribution of PCM highways in Coral IPx Office systems To ensure efficient use of timeslots of the IPx 500X and IPx 800X expansion cages it is recommended to distribute heavy consumer cards cards with a large number of ports 30T T1 PRI 30 PRI 23 or UGWipx with MG 30 or MG 60 units evenly among the slot sets i e one heavy consumer card per slot set The least blocking sets are the slot sets that have the highest ratio of Number of Timeslots to Number of Peripheral Card Slots in Table 6 7 If three PRI 30 cards are installed it is recommended that one of them be installed in any one of slots 1 4 the second card in any one of slots 5 8 and the last card in any one of slots 9 10 in IPx 500X or slots 9 12 in IPx 800X gt ke E 5 8 E 3 20 5 o S 5 n 6 34 Cage Description Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Table 6 7 Timeslot
243. ines for Synchronization 1 BRI lines used for synchronization must be defined in the PI Route DTDB 4 SYNC YES See PI Manual Chapter 26 ISDN for more information 2 It is not recommended to use BRI lines defined as PERMANENTLY ACTIVE CHANNEL NO as synchronization sources P NOTE E It is not recommended to use a PRI card with IPAT IC hardware issue 4 chip as a synchronization source Order of Preference The possible digital trunk synchronization sources are listed in order of preference 1 card all types connected to PSTN type stratum 3 TANDEM switch North America only 2 PRI or T1 E1 all types connected to PSTN type stratum 4 End office 3 or T1 E1 card all types connected to a private network There are three possibilities listed in order of preference a The network is synchronized on PSTN stratum 4 or less b The private network contains a stable internal clock c The private network is synchronized to the Coral do not use for synchronization When the Coral operates in Master Clock mode and the private network is synchronized by the Coral it is prohibited to insert Digital Trunk cards in the synchronization slots 4 and STBR card all types connected to the PSTN 5 ATBR and STBR card all types connected to a private network The three possibilities are the same as listed in order of preference in possibilities 3 a 3 c above
244. ing messages will appear MCB Office BATTERY LOW This message indicates that the MCB Office card battery has an insufficient voltage level In this event the Coral system database is in jeopardy of being lost during a power failure If this message appears the database should be saved and the battery replaced at the first opportunity To ensure that the system database is not lost save the database to the IMC8 IMC16 card via the database controls branch of the system database ROUTE ROOT 0 10 2 2 0 For details see System Database Control page 4 5 If the system loses power or is reset for any reason and the database is lost from memory the system will copy the database from the IMCS card into database memory as the system restarts Once the system database is safely saved on the IMCS card power to the Coral system may be turned off at a time that will cause the least disruption of service to the user At that time the battery on the MCB Office may be replaced and the system restarted Pa NOTE E To replace the lithium battery carefully raise the battery holder clip and then insert the new battery with the positive symbol appearing on top Do not apply too much pressure to the battery holder clip as this could cause the clip to snap Explosion and Environmental Hazards There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the m
245. ings for all serial programming ports of the Coral system Determine the connector type and pin assignments for the data interface of the PI device Figure 2 21 shows the connections for using personal computers with a DA 9P connector for the serial interface Obtain or prepare a serial data cable to connect the PI device to the KBO serial programming port on the front side of the unit The KBO port end of the serial programming cable requires a male DA 9P style connector wired as shown in Figure 2 21 If the PI device is a personal computer equipped with a DA 9P connector wire the connectors according to Figure 2 21 For installations with a permanent PI device route the serial data cable from the PI device to the front panel of the unit and connect it to the KBO connector Hardware Installation Procedure 2 39 E o D D D Q D S D 50 Figure 2 21 9 Program Interface Device Connections to KB0 015 SIGNAL GROUND 5 O 4 DATA TERMINAL READY 4 O O O TRANSMITDATA 3 O De ccu 2 RECEIVE 2 O e O 6 O 1 CARRIER DETECT 1 O KBO PROGRAMMING PORT 9 PIN PC ASYNC SERIAL PORT USE FEMALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR R o Y S S O Y 9 So Q Y 3 x 50 2 40 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual
246. ion Manual LED Constantly Lit If the LED stays lit for more than two or three minutes a problem may exist within the card The most likely problem is a conflict with the system database although it also may be an actual malfunction of the card circuitry Table 10 1 LED State Indication Diagnostic LED Indications Extinguished Off No problem with the card it is operating OK Steadily lit ON Card has not received a card database from system Flashing Diagnostic test failed by circuitry on card The system database will prevent a card from initializing m When the card is inserted into a card slot that has been initialized with another card type Check the Card List branch Route CLIS in the database to determine whether the card slot has been previously initialized with a different card type If the STATUS field shows CARD REPLACED and the TYPE for the card slot shows a different card type enter CARD to clear the slot m There are insufficient system resources allocated in the System Sizes Definition to support the new card The STATUS field in the Card List branch Route CLIS shows NO RESOURCES Check the Sizes branch Route SIZ in the database to determine the maximum number of ports of the type provided by the problematic card and then determine how many of these ports are already installed If the additional ports provided by the new card exceed the maximum number allocated in Sizes t
247. ional cards include Card Cage Description 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes the following functions among others m 1 universal night answer or central bell 1 bell relay contacts These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Shared Service Cards 29 89 Ro D S n lt X 50 gt S 2 S E D Re 3 gt S 8 Specifications BELL UNA Number of Circuits U RMI Office 1 0 when Accessory Alarm Relay is used U MR Office card 1 0 when Accessory Alarm Relay is used RMI Office card 1 0 when Accessory Alarm Relay is used MR Office Card 1 0 when Accessory Alarm Relay is used BDRCE card 1 requires IPx 800X expansion cage Relay Contacts 3 4 RLY2 Contact Type Isolated Dry Form A SPST NO Voltage Limit 50VDC Maximum Current Limit 0 5A Maximum non inductive Power Limit 30VA Maximum RQ 5 9 DI SR E EY nm lt 20 8 EY lt D S Qe S 9 90 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Accessory or Alarm Relay 3 Major
248. ith the wing nut should be worn while inserting removing or handling any card in the system Each card is shipped inside an anti static plastic bag Cards should be kept in this bag whenever handling is not required Before removing a peripheral card disconnect the connectors Pa NOTE E After a peripheral card is removed wait for at least 2 seconds before re inserting the card If not the card will not function properly S S E O 3 D X2 5 D Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 1 S 5 S S 5 o 3 D lt S D 10 2 3 General Installation Procedure Peripheral Cards Peripheral card installation and initialization are done through automatic identification by the hardware application called Plug and Play plug in and start working All the technician has to do is to install the card into the required slot and connect its respective I O cable The MCB Office card will identify the peripheral card define it for the system and display all details on the PI screen The PI Card List branch Route CLIS Snap Mode shows details of every new peripheral card that is installed or removed There is a short delay between installation removal of the card and PI screen display peripheral cards may be inserted into a card slot only if the card slot has not been previously initialized by another card type Befo
249. itiert 5 30 Figure 5 11 UDT Office PRI 23 T1 Pinout 5 31 Figure 5 12 PRI 30 Office Pinout 5 32 Figure 5 13 Office Pinout ie 5 33 Figure 5 14 Network Connection when NTU Office Card is not 5 35 Figure 5 15 Network Connection when NTU Office Card is 5 35 Figure 5 16 LAN WAN PINOUT ce 1 ret elia iaia aria 5 38 Figure 6 1 Front View of the Table Mounted IPx Office Unit i 6 2 Figure 6 2 Front View of the Rack Mounted IPx Office Unit seen 6 2 Figure 6 3 Front Panel sui ce erret de de eene Reti 6 3 Figure 6 4 Rear Side of the IPx Office Unit rennen 6 5 Figure 6 5 Left View of the IPx Office Unit Cover i 6 7 Figure 6 6 Right View of the IPx Office Unit Cover i 6 7 Figure 6 7 Removing the Unit Cover 6 9 Figure 6 8 Closing the Cover iii 6 11 Figure 6 9 IPx Office Unit Interior ii 6 12 Figure 6 10 IPx Office Rear Section without Cards Installed sse 6 14 Figure 6 11 IPx Office with Blank Panels enne nennen nennt nennen 6 17 xix Figure 6 12 Heat Flow Schematic een nennen nennen 6 18
250. ition the unit cover upright such that the front panel is resting on a flat surface Unfasten the three M3X6 screws that connect the LED Office card to the unit cover and safeguard for re assembly Remove the LED Office card Position the new LED Office card such that the holes in the LED Office card are aligned with the threaded holes on the unit cover Fasten the LED Office card to the unit cover with the three M3X6 screws Close the unit cover See Closing the Unit Cover page 6 10 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Card 1 General Information Functional Description The MRC module provides media channels used to convert PCM calls to IP Packets and vice versa Media channels are also needed when one of the calling parties is not an IP host No media channels are needed for pure IP to IP connections direct connects See Figure 8 10 for an illustration of IP to IP connections versus non IP to IP connections in the Coral Figure 8 10 Description of MRC FlexSet 5 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 27 Layout The MRC card includes two connectors P1 and P2 that connect to connectors J4 and J7 respectively The card is initialized via the MCB Office there is no MAC number label on the card and the MAC number has no significance for PI programming Figure 8 11 MRC Card Layout Bottom View Bottom view Connector P2
251. ization The MCB Office control card layout is shown in Figure 8 1 1 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual In the main cage and in the expansion cages verify that the PS Office power switch is in the OFF position turned downwards Verify that all peripheral cards in the IPx Office unit are completely installed Verify that all peripheral cards in the expansion cages protrude from the cage by approximately 1 inch 2 5 cm Verify that the the SAU is attached to the connector on the right side of the IPx Office unit See Chapter 8 Verify that the IMC8 IMC16 flash memory card and the compact flash memory disk have been inserted into their respective drives located on the front panel of the IPx Office unit See IMC8 and IMC16 Flash Cards page 8 33 Attach the Program Interface PI device cable to the KB0 programming port connector on the front panel of the IPx Office unit Verify that the PI device is configured to match the data rate word length parity and stop bits of KBO Default settings for are 9600 bps 8 data bit no parity and 1 stop bit respectively Turn ON the power switch on the PS Office power supply on the rear panel of the IPx Office unit On the front panel of the IPx Office unit see Figure 6 3 on page 6 3 verify that the indicators illuminate as follows m The green POWER indicator turns ON a S E S o m Red indicator turns ON until the system initializes and the
252. l Hazard Contact with live internal components could cause shock burn or death During system operation the unit cover must always be closed Disconnect any cables attached to the front panel Remove the flash card if installed Remove the compact flash disk if installed Remove the SAU if installed Unscrew the WiFi antennas if installed IS mb 9 Using a Phillips screwdriver unfasten the fifteen M3 screws that clamp the cover to the unit See Step 1 of Figure 6 7 9 Using moderate force lift the cover from the rear section and disconnect the LED Office card cable from the unit See Step 2 of Figure 6 7 Do not remove the cover until the LED Office card cable has been disconnected from the unit otherwise it will be damaged 10 Remove the cover completely 5 o E x A un 3 D D 6 8 Cage Description Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 6 7 Removing the Unit Cover Remove all 15 screws Lift cover upward Caution Do not remove cover before disconnecting the LED Office panel cable 3 Disconnect cable S 5 5 o nm D D un 3 D Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cage Description gt 6 9 S 3 5 o Q E S 5 3 D D 6 10 Cage Description Closing the Unit Cover 1 Verify that the Office battery prot
253. l in the following sections Refer to these subsections for more information E S S g 85 ES un S MX un 9 2 j Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 7 Additional Shared Service Cards the Expansion Cages Additional shared service cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 500X and 800X expansion cages Additional shared service cards include but are not limited to the following Card Cage Description MRC IPx 800X 8 16 32 or 64 w PUGW provides 8 16 32 or 64 media gateway channels Lebe NOTE PUGW and PUGWipx support SIP and MGCP w PUGWipx points 800 MG 24 48 72 96 120 w UGW E provides 24 48 72 96 or 120 media gateway channels DIE NOTE UGW E and PUGW Eipx support MGCP vi end points 4VSN IPx 800X discontinued 4 ports used to deliver prerecorded announcement messages 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes the following functions m 8DTD circuit dialTone detector and call progress tone analyzer m 8 DTR circuit receiver and decoder m 6 x 3 way conference m 1 x 6 party conference m 1 internal or external music interface m 1 external music interface m 1 external voice paging interface or public address and relay contacts 1 auxiliary or major minor alarm relay contacts 1 universal night answer or central bell relay contacts m 3 RS 232E programming maintenance interfaces 300 to 115 2
254. ler Name Num display max 32 Required for the 4 8T CID Office card NOTE Separate authorization SAU is required to allocate the DTMF DTR 3 way and conference circuits supported by the URC NOTE max The maximum number for the resources is dependant on the number of URC timeslots Therefore increasing one of these resources requires decreasing another P NOTE E Separate authorization is required to allocate the DTMF CLID 3way and CONF circuits supported by the U RMI Office and U MR Office cards max The max number is dependant on the number of URC time slots Therefore increasing one of these resources requires decreasing another o D 3 5 x 3 Dd SS Dd 9 8 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 9 2 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Architecture Shared Service Controller URC MR RMI F U73 Office U60 GG 71581 DTM Receivers Call Progress Tone Detectors DTD 2 Relays Music 41 Interfaces MOH BGM 1 Extern Intern 1 Extern Paging 11 1 External Paging System TL Caller ID Circuits IDSP Interface U RMI and RMI Office Three P arty 1 Remote Conferences 3 Way Prog Maint Modem Fourteen P arty Conferences The number of URC shared
255. lly with both hands fingers near the left and right of the power supply near the front panel 4 Align the two guide ridges located on the bottom panel of the power supply right and left in the card edge guides Slide the power supply gently but firmly until fully inserted into the unit 5 Fasten the two M3 screws located on the top and bottom of the power supply front panel thus securing the card to the cage as well as grounding the unit Do not proceed until the screws have been fastened If the screws are not fastened the power supply unit will not be grounded and could be subject to hazardous voltages Figure 2 17 PS Office DC Front Panel PS Office DC Cat No 77440950300 OUTPUT ta A 5 Ry Removable screws 2 34 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 13 Connecting the Power Wires The Coral IPx Office can operate as an AC powered system or as a DC powered system For DC powered systems skip to DC Powered Systems page 2 36 AC Powered Systems This section describes how to connect the power wires to the IPx Office unit for AC systems when the PS Office AC power supply card is installed See Figure 2 18 1 Route the AC power cord from the AC power receptacle to the DC connection of the PS Office AC unit PSN NOTE E For 115 volt operation when the power supply cord is not factory supplied the cord should be selected as follows
256. lots and may house any combination of shared service and peripheral cards Slot 1 is used either to house a shared service card if there is only one expansion cage in the system or a PX card if the IPx 800X cage supports a second expansion cage These card types are described in detail in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Manual Port Capacity One IPx 800X cage supports up to 264 combined trunk and wired station ports Power Supply The expansion unit is compatible with 48VDC or 115 230VAC power The expansion cage is either powered by the PS19 AC PS19 DC or PS19 DC D power supply unit There is no option to install a backup battery for the IPx 800X cage PX Card The PX Peripheral eXpansion buffer card occupies slot 1 of the first IPx 800X expansion cage in an IPx Office IPx 800X IPx 800X system configuration Coral IPx Office Installation Manual When an IPx 800X Expansion Cage is Used in an IPx Office System There are situations where it is worthwhile to include an IPx 800X cage in an IPx 500 system m allow the use of Coral features not supported by IPx Office unit interface cards XXX Office such as iDSP IPG 8DRCF magneto stations 85 Long Loop SLT VIC etc m To allow the use of IPx 800X cages or standard CORAL cards that are already in stock m See Additional Shared Service Cards in the Expansion Cages page 9 3 Setting the Configuration J umpers For information on setting the configuratio
257. ly digital During the conferencing session each participant hears the voices of other participants as their amplitude voices are added The Meet Me bridge allows the establishment of a conference call at an appointed hour by dialing a special conference destination number The multi party conference feature allows a conference of up 14 84 simultaneous conversations in a conference mode The conference bridge is a Meet Me feature Station users can dial the programmable access code and or transfer or be transferred to the conference call Access to the conference bridge may be defined through the Tenant feature E 5 E 5 Q S oO v 3 5 oO S oO S Ax Shared Service Cards 29 39 2 Feature Descriptions The Meet Me Bridge Conference Circuit CONF in the Coral IPx Office system enables m Group Call m Multiparty conference URC Chained Meet Me Groups The URC has 6 circuits that may be allocated as Conference ports Each of these ports can enable one conference of 14 participants Alternatively these conference ports can be chained together internally by the URC without using extra time slots so that a conference with a maximum of 84 participants can be created The chain definition is created via the PDB branch see Special Port Facilities Route PDB 3 page 9 43 PSN NOTE E 84 participants requires URC Software Versions 2 xx or higher The conf
258. ly small factor and peripheral cards Any combination of up to two IPx 500X and IPx 800X expansion cages can be connected to one IPx Office unit The key features of the IPx 500X cage capacity and functions are described below Card Slots One 500X cage may house ten peripheral special form factor cards These card types are described in detail in Chapter 10 of the Coral IPx 500 Hardware and Installation Manual Port Capacity One IPx 500X cage supports up to 160 combined trunk and wired station ports Power Supply The expansion unit is compatible with 48VDC or 115 230VAC power The expansion cage is either powered by the P5500 AC or PS500 DC power supply unit There is also an option to install a backup battery for the IPx 500X cage This battery pack known as the BATTipx can be ordered at specific customer request MDFipx An MDF may be supplied with the IPx 500X cage at specific customer request Whenever an MDFipx unit is included with an IPx 500X cage it can function as a master ground and be connected directly to the building master ground For further information see Chapter 6 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Setting the Configuration J umpers For information on setting the configuration jumpers on Coral IPx 500X cages refer to the Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual Section 6 3 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Connecting the IPx 500X Cage to the IP
259. ment sse 2 32 Figure 2 17 PS Office DC Front Panel 2 34 Figure 2 18 AC Power Connection for One IPx Office Unit sese 2 35 Figure 2 19 DC Power Wiring for One IPx Office 2 2 37 Figure 2 20 DC Power Wiring for Three 2 37 Figure 2 21 9 Pin Program Interface Device Connections to 2 40 Figure 3 1 Coral IPx Office Unit AC Power Connections seen 3 2 Figure 3 2 IPx Office Unit DC Power Connections sese 3 3 Figure 3 3 MDF Connector Configuration 3 16 Figure 5 1 Connecting via an MDF 5 4 Figure 5 2 Modular Wired Station Jack Wiring Diagram i 5 7 Figure 5 3 Typical Trunk Circuit Wiring Diagram ii 5 9 Figure 5 4 Magazine with 10 Surge Arrestor and Voltage Protector 5 14 Figure 5 5 Power Fail Wiring to Single Line Telephone 5 16 Figure 5 6 FlexSet 80 280 2815 APDL APA or PEX APA RS 232E v 24 Pinout 5 18 Figure 5 7 4S Office and 8S Office Jumper Settings 5 22 Figure 5 8 4T 4T CID Office PINOUt ii 5 28 Figure 5 9 8T 8T CID Office PiNOUt ii 5 29 Figure 5 10 4TBR Office Pinout irr
260. must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 1 Music Sources Route SYSGEN 4 Use this field to determine the number and the location of music sources in the system Refer to Chapter 4 Music Sources in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for more details 2 Page Q Route ROOT 0 7 Use this field to determine which music source will be used when a call is placed on a specific queue Refer to Chapter 23 Page_Q Music in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for more details 3 SLT Def Route SLT Use the MUSIC ON HOLD TRANSFER field to determine which music source will be used when a call is placed on hold by the relevant port 4 amp Def Route TRK 1 Use the MUSIC HOLD TRANSFER field to determine which music source will be used when a call is placed on hold by the relevant port 5 KEYSET Def Route KEY Use the MUSIC field to activate or cancel background music for a specific keyset Use the MUSIC NUM field to determine which music source will sounded Use the MUSIC ON HOLD TRANSFER field to determine which music source will be used when a call is placed on hold by the relevant port 6 Hunt Group Route HUNT Use the MUSIC SOURCE field to determine which music source will sounded for callers that queue on the group Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Use the RETAIN HUNT MUSIC SOURCE field as described in Chapter 9 in the Program Inte
261. n dara iran 9 1 Shared Service Cards in the Main sse eee 9 1 Handling Procedures 9 1 EE ET 9 1 U RMI U MR RMI and MR Office CardS nennen nennen 9 2 Shared Service Features in the Main Unit essen nnns 9 2 Additional Shared Service Cards in the Expansion 9 3 9 2 8 16 32 64 Modules ette eter Ere P tero dert 9 5 General Description XH e ERR AE Re S ii 9 5 hare lets 9 5 Database Programming ariani ala 9 5 Layoutand Installation te aaa aiar Aria 9 6 9 3 U RMI U MR RMI MR Office CardS eene enne 9 7 General Description 9 7 Gard Eocatloni suce etm ee e Pn rette ee aka 9 7 xi Database Programming a 44222554 aqsu qu secco au a iaia aaa 9 7 DELI mH IEEE 9 8 Configuration Jumpers 9 15 E A E E E S 9 16 1 uui dite eh diee anal 9 17 EPROM 060 ia ai 9 18 MR RMIFE Features 9 18 MR and RMI F Database Programming i 9 19 WAG PROM UZI aaa Aia 9 21
262. n Upgraded IMC8 IMC16 Card This section provides instructions on inserting the IMC8 IMC16 flash memory card after it has been programmed with a new or upgraded software version Creating a Binary Backup of the Database Before installing an IMC8 or IMC16 card with a new generic software version it is strongly recommended that you make a binary backup of the database The binary backup must be done by a PC using the Binary Backup PC Utility The Binary Backup is a tool for Coral technicians who install upgrade and maintain Coral systems See the Database Binary Backup PC Utility Reference Manual for further details Installing the IMC8 IMC16 Card Before each installation or removal of an IMC8 IMC16 card from the IPx Office unit press the RESET button on the front panel of the IPx Office unit 1 Press the Release button on the PCMCIA drive of the PC to remove the new IMC8 IMC 16 card 2 Press the Reset button on the on the front panel of the IPx Office unit 3 Press the Release button on the front panel of the IPx Office unit to remove the old IMC8 IMC 16 card 4 Insert the new IMC8 IMC 16 card containing the upgraded generic software version 5 Press the Reset button on the front panel of the IPx Office unit 6 Verify that the following two messages appear on the PI device For SERVICE S OFTWARE installation menu HIT CTRL I NOW De He AE e SE SE SE SE E OE SE E PESE E CHK RAM END CHK RAM Custom Init Code
263. n jumpers on Coral IPx 800X cages refer to the Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual Chapter 6 Connecting the IPx 800X Cage to the IPx Office Unit IPx Office units and IPx 800 cages are interconnected with an IPx Office expansion cable For systems that include one IPx 500X cage and one IPx 800X cage always connect the IPx 500X cage directly to the IPx Office unit If an IPx 800X cage is installed between the IPx 500M cage and an IPx 500X cage a PX card will have to be installed in slot 1 of the IPx 800X cage This slot could otherwise be used for a service card Related Documentation m Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual m Coral IPx 800 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual m Coral FlexiCom and IPx Product Description D T gt 5 5 3 O 5 o S n Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cage Description gt 6 39 gt S 2 5 S 3 20 5 o S n 6 40 Cage Description Coral IP x Office Installation Manual ffice AC Power Supply Unit C Power Supply Unit Coral IPx Office Installation Manual PS Office AC Power Supply Unit The PS Office AC power supply unit provides operating voltages for the Coral IPx Office system Power Source The PS Office AC operates from a nominal input of 100 240VAC 47 63Hz PS Office AC Front Panel Figure 7 1
264. n through extensive configuration flexibility Fits into 19 and 23 racks including racks designed to earthquake specifications Can be mounted on a table See Mounting Table Units page 2 13 Enables installation into standard racks See Mounting Rack Units page 2 14 Enables AC or DC input power supply in every cage See Chapter 7 Power Supply Enables connection to the IP world via interface through the NTU Office card Enables full communication between digital and IP stations Includes simple Input Output I O cable routing directly from the peripheral cards on the rear panel of the unit Includes simple assembly procedures Can be mounted on the same rack as customer supplied cages Includes up to two expansion cages per system See System Configuration Options page 6 23 Includes forced ventilation supported by internal fans within the unit Includes full RFI protection Supports the insertion of peripheral cards under power conditions uS o E ta 3 lt Introduction 1 9 About the Coral IPx Office 1 Table 1 2 1 Office System Specifications Specification Coral IPx Office Coral IPx 500X Coral IPx 800X p Main Cage Expansion Cage Expansion Cage Control Card Slots 1 PX Card Slots t 1 or 0 MRC and Shared Service Card MR RMI U MR 0 or 1 Slots U RMI Office Peripheral Interface Card Slots 5 4 if expansion cages 10 11 are installed Ports
265. n turns OFF m Red UGW indicator turns ON until the system initializes and then turns OFF Initial Power up Tests 2 3 5 a S o S E 3 6 Initial Power up Tests 10 m Red CPU indicator turns ON until the system initializes and then turns OFF m The green GC ACT indicator flashes after the GC initializes m The green MRC indicator turns ON after the MRC card initializes If the following message appears on the PI device and is repeated continuously For SERVICE S OFTWARE installation menu HIT CTRL I NOW END Custom Init Code NO CCS VERSION The line that reads NO CCS VERSION indicates that no generic feature software was detected in the IMC8 IMC 16 card To load the generic feature software into the IMC8 or IMC 16 card follow the procedure in Chapter 4 Software Installation Procedure If the following message appears on the PI device during system start up For SERVICE SOFTWARE installation menu HIT lt CTRL I gt NOW END RAM Custom Init Code CHECKING PROG MEM PROG MEM IS O K CHECKING CODING MEMORY CODING MEMORY IS O K END CHECKING CODING MEMORY CHECKING MCB Office CONTROLS END CHECKING MCB Office CONTROLS CHECKING SAU END CHECKING SAU Patch Loaded CHECKING CODING MEMORY CODING MEMORY IS O K END CHECKING CODING MEMORY CHECKING MCB Office CONTROLS END CHECKING MCB Office CONTROLS
266. nabled by the system URC cards Each Meet Me conference circuit requires 16 card time slots URC Card DB Meet Me Conference Route CDB 11 2 m CONF MEMBERS CONF SWITCH DELAY Special Port Facilities Route PDB 3 m LINKED TO CONF DIAL Refer to Chapter 23 Conference in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details Shared Service Cards 9 43 E 5 E Q E S oO v 3 gt 5 oO S oO S Ax 4 Additional Multi Party Conference Circuits Additional digital Conference Bridge cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description CNF IPx 800X Includes one of the following functions m Dual 15 party conference 2 x 15 party m Eight 3 way conference 8 x 3 way or One card is required for each mode database selectable 2 x 15 party or 8 x 3 way 8DRCF IPx 800X Includes the following conference functions among others m One x 6 party conference 1 x 6 m Six 3 way conference 6 x 3 way and These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 59 Specifications Multi Party Conference Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 6 max 2 default U MR Office card 6 max 2 default Office card 0 MR Office
267. nary Backup PC Utility FMprog PC Utility Reference Man ual Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Coral Terminal Equipment Installa tion Manual Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 2 w 5 lt Introduction 1 3 3 Special Symbols Used in this Document This manual includes information that requires special attention or is distinguished from the main texts in some significant way These are indicated by the use of symbols and text formatting This is illustrated in the following examples WARNING There is a risk of danger to life or personal injury CAUTION There is a risk of damage to Coral system PSN NOTE E Indicates important information demanding special attention Advice that makes it easier to follow the steps of a procedure NOTES A page that is intentionally left blank and may be used for reader information This manual includes information for the Coral configurations in all geographic market areas Much of the information is relevant for all hardware configurations and all market areas 5 43 ta S lt 1 4 j Introduction Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 4 List of Abbreviations ESIM Office Expansion Shelf Interface card in the Main unit 30T Office 30 channel E1
268. nce from edges Ground screws 10 32 UNF One serrated washer above the ring terminal Distance between screws 34 19 mm Figure 2 8 Master Ground Unit Ground Screw lt SS Serrated Washer Ring Terminal Disk Washer 2 Verify that the ground wire is 10AWG stranded conductor is the proper length and includes two ring terminals fitted onto either end of the wire that are suitable for connecting to the master ground and to the MDF 3 Route the ground wire between the unit and the master ground A 5 Ry 4 Connect the ground wire to the unit as described on Connecting the Ground Wire to the Unit page 2 19 5 Connect the unit ground wire to the master ground unit as follows 2 20 gt Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual a Unfasten one of the 10 32 UNF screws connected to the master ground unit and retain the screw and serrated washer See Figure 2 8 b Insert the 10 32 UNF screw such that the ground wire ring terminal is positioned between the serrated washer and the threaded hole of the master ground unit c Position the wire ring terminal over the threaded hole of the master ground unit and fasten Tighten until snug See Figure 2 8 6 Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 for all cages and MDF units in the system Verify that the system ground wire connection between t
269. nd Chapter 10 Peripheral Cards For a specific description of these cards see the Peripheral and Shared Service Cards Installation Manual This must be done before inserting the peripheral cards To set the configuration jumpers 1 Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the strap Circuit cards contain static sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by electro static discharge ESD Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling circuit cards See Figure 2 11 on page 2 24 Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces Handle with care and do not drop Pa NOTE E Synchronization Jumpers Defining different cards or cages by the same synchronization classification could lead to system disruption Verify that the synchronization jumpers are strapped as described in Chapter 10 Peripheral Cards Expansion Cage Identification Jumpers Defining two expansion cages by the same cage number could lead to system disruption Verify that the cage numbering jumpers are strapped as described in Chapter 6 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation and Hardware Reference Manual and or the Coral IPx 800 Installation and Hardware Reference Manual 2 In the IPx Office unit configure the peripheral card jumpers as described in Peripheral and Shared Service Cards Installation Manual 3 For IPx 500X expansion cages configure the jumpers as des
270. nector and the SAU The MCP is described in further detail on Main Control Processor page 8 8 m LED Office card connector P15 The LED Office card is described in further detail on LED Card page 8 23 IMC8 16 flash memory card slot The IMC8 card is described in further detail in IMC8 and IMC16 Flash Cards page 8 31 S S S D S gt m Compact flash memory card slot The compact flash memory card is described in further detail in Compact Flash Disk page 8 37 DBM X card components including connector P13 and threaded holes D The DBM X card is described in further detail on DBM X Card page 8 39 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 5 Hard disk components including connector P17 and threaded holes The hard disk will be provided in future versions of this product Universal GateWay including the UGW processor and the RS 232 connector The UGW is described in further detail in Internet Protocol Gateway page 8 9 Other components that belong to this circuit include m Networking components including LAN ports the WAN port printer port and connector P16 and connectors J9 and J8 The networking components are described in further detail on Chapter 11 Networking m MRC card connectors J3 and J4 and threaded holes A The MRC card is described in further detail on MRC Card page 8 25 m Group Controller circuit including the GC
271. network connections to the UDT Office T1 or PRI 23 jumper selection digital circuit are made via the RJ 45 telephony connector on the front panel See Table 5 16 and Figure 5 11 P X3 NOTE E For further information on how to make the connection to the PSTN LTU CSU refer also to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Table5 15 UDT Office RJ 45 Nomination Functions PRI 23 T1 Pinout Pin Pin 1 RxB Receive Data ring from Network Receive Data tip from Network Shield Cable Shield 48VDC Return T Transmit Data ring to Network i T Pin 7 48VDC Power for CSU LTU Enable Disable see Figure 5 11 Ping GND Cable Shield 48VDC Return xA Transmit Data tip to Network ND Figure 5 11 UDT Office PRI 23 T1 Pinout RJ 45 socket female m 1 RxB external view 2 RxA 3 GND shield 8 4 TxB 5 TxA RJ 45 plug male 6 clip at rear 7 48VDC PRI 23 T1 8 GND UDT Office 48VDC on Pin 7 Card Type 1 For synchronization jumpers see Figure 10 8 on on page 10 28 External Connections 25 31 n O D 3 S D 5 5 D lt S D E o S K nm E S o D 5 O o o NS n O D 3 D D X A D S O S n S 9 o D S S O E O NS PRI 30 Office The external network
272. nit from its slot and place it over the anti static material with the component side facing upwards as described on Removing the Power Supply page 7 21 WARNING Do not remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON Sudden power surges could damage system components Before extracting the PS Office AC card verify that the power switch is turned OFF 6 Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse See the PS Office DC card layout in Figure 7 7 on page 7 16 7 Reinstall the power supply unit as described on Installation and Operation page 1 19 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 6 Specifications Coral 115 IPx Office Power rating 40VDC to 56VDC 10 max Power Consumption from mains Continuous 160W Outputs eere ine eiii diis diesen aea SVDC nom regulated 6 0A max 3 3VDC nom regulated 6 0A max 48VDC nom regulated 1 0A max Fuses Intermodule F2 6 3A 250V S B replaceable Output None Controls and Adjustments Power switch poni 0 8 kg External DC Input Connection Molex 39 01 4031 connector 3 circuit minifit pitch 4 2mm D D 5 S 2 29 Q Q S S WY 29 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 23 NOTES 5 D S S Q Q S 2
273. ns The card can also be inserted into a PC slot using any PCMCIA application adapter for loading a new Coral software version Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 29 33 2 Installing the IMC8 16 The IMC8 16 does not occupy a card slot within the Coral IPx Office system It is installed on the PCM CIA connector on the MCB Office The IMC8 16 release button enables the removal of the IMC8 16 card An arrow on the foil attached to the front side of the IMC8 16 card indicates the insertion direction The IMC8 16 card position on the MCB Office card is shown in Figure 8 13 In order to avoid damage to the IMC8 16 card press very gently during the card insertion CAUTION Before each installation or removal of an IMC8 16 card press the RESET button PN NOTE E Insert the IMC8 16 card with its label side facing left as shown in Figure 8 13 The IMC8 16 card contains three types of data m Generic Feature Software Version m Database Backup m Boot Code When replacing an IMC8 16 card with another card that contains upgraded software the new card will not contain a database It is therefore important to make a binary backup of the database before removing the card See the Database Binary Backup PC Utility Reference Manual for further details Make sure that the IMC8 16 card being installed is not write protected After a new card is installed verify that the PI starts up properly and then save
274. nstalled If another message is displayed see Table 3 1 For a complete list of card slot status messages see Chapter 6 of the the Program Interface amp Database Reference Manual Table 3 1 Card Slot Status Messages 3 12 Initial Power up Tests Message ACTIVE ACTIVE P REPLACED WAIT_DB NO_RESOURCES FAULT UNAUTHORIZED Description Initialization was successfully completed Card is partially active because there are not enough resources to support the other sub circuits on an 8DRCM 8DRCF card or not all tone generators are being used on the iDSP card P TYPE and TYPE are not compatible Both i type and p type fields should show the required card name The card slot has previously been initialized by a different card type see the entry for TYPE field as well Card has not received database or has not reported initialization Insufficient system memory to initialize card HDLC problem The SAU ports are limited and therefore the card is not authorized for use in this system Recommendations None Readjust SIZES to support unsupported sub circuits for 8DRCM 8DRCF card Partial Active for the iDSP card is not critical Readjust the parameter value only when needed Install proper card or enter NO CARD in the TYPE option Continue waiting Check SIZES Check HDLC wiring Install an updated version of the SAU with the appropriate amount of po
275. nt must be installed in accordance with the US National Electrical Code Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 and the Canadian Electrical Code Section 12 E 2 o 2 un Overcurrent Protection A readily accessible listed branch circuit overcurrent protective device rated 30A 60VDC minimum slow blow must be incorporated in the building wiring for every three units Hardware Installation Procedure 22 5 S o D 2 D Table 2 4 Coral IPx Office Maximum Power Requirements 2 6 Hardware Installation Procedure CAUTION This equipment is designed to permit connection between the grounded conductor of the DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor at the equipment See installation instructions below The equipment shall be connected to a properly grounded supply system equipment in the immediate vicinity shall be grounded the same way and shall not be grounded elsewhere The DC supply system is to be local i e within the same premises as the equipment A disconnect device is not allowed in the grounded circuit between the DC supply source and the frame grounded circuit connection System Configuration 115VAC 230VAC IPx Office 2 2 A 1 5 A IPx Office 500X 8 2 A IPx Office 500X 500X 14 2A IPx Office 800X 8 2 A IPx Office 500X 800X 14 2A IPx Office 800X 800X 14 2A 7 5A 24 Maximum power requirement is a maximum case projection based on fully populated systems
276. nternal LAN RJ 45 connectors on the MCB Office card See Figure 11 8 Figure 11 8 Networking Connection without an NTU Office Card Es ml O O Internal LAN connection Coral IPx Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 21 v S w 3 S X Q E NS 50 amp ta 9 5 RN 5 adiran Telecom International Headquarters Tadiran Telecom Ltd 18 Hasivim Street P O Box 7607 Petach Tikva 49170 Israel Tel 972 3 9262000 Fax 972 3 9262310 USA Headquarters Tadiran Telecom Inc 4 Tri Harbor Court Port Washington NY 11050 Tel 1 516 632 7200 Fax 1 516 632 7210 Visit us at our website http www tadirantele com Email coral tadirantele com Coral IPx Office Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual 1st Edition 2006
277. nual The unit ground wire is connected to the unit in the rear panel See Connecting the Ground Wire to the Unit page 2 19 For instructions on how to ground the customer supplied MDF unit see Grounding the MDF Unit page 2 20 Connecting the Ground Wire to the Unit The cage ground connection includes one serrated washer a flat washer and one hexagonal nut assembled on the terminal connection See Figure 2 7 Connect the ground wire to the cage as follows 1 Remove the hexagonal nut and flat washer from the ground terminal Do not discard 2 Insert the serrated washer onto the ground terminal 3 Insert the ground wire ring terminal over the serrated washer 4 Insert the flat washer onto the ground wire ring terminal 5 Fasten the hexagonal nut cruna n Ground Assembly Flat washer Ground wire with ring terminal Serrated washer E 8 S S YV 5 ky Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 19 Grounding the Unit A master ground must be included within the system See Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 and Figure 2 10 The system ground connection is fabricated as follows 1 The master ground unit must have the following specifications See Figure 2 8 Dimensions Minimum of 5 5 x x 1 140 mm x 6 mm x 25 mm 17 rer MITTEN Brass or Copper Mounting holes 14 6 mm diameter 2 13 mm dista
278. nual Chapter 17 Terminal Setup Route TERM 0 for instructions on the database programming required Coral IPx 0ffice Installation Manual Common Control Cards 2 8 19 S 5 c S D S 1 Installing the DBM X Memory Card The DBM X card is an expansion memory card It adds an additional 2 6 or 8 MB SRAM to the Coral main control The card is equipped with an extension connector on its top side However only one DBM X connector ca be installed in the IPx Office unit There is no battery installed on the DBM X card In the event of a power failure the DBM X is powered from the lithium battery installed on the MCB Office For further information see DBM X Card page 8 41 5 5 S S 8 20 gt Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 8 Lithium Battery Condition Testing A new lithium battery can maintain power to the MCB Office memory circuitry and real time clock for approximately 90 days The battery is not recharged by the system power Thus if the battery has powered the memory and real time clock for an extended period and is almost depleted the contents of the memory must be backed up and the battery must be replaced The battery voltage tested under load can be used to determine its state of charge Voltage measured across an unused battery connected to the memory circuitry shoul
279. number of URC time slots The DTD circuits are used to detect and identify standard call progress tones such as dial tone busy tone reorder fast busy tone and ringback tone The DTD is required to support system features such as Automatic Called Number Redial ACNR also called Scanner The DTD may also be utilized to force a station user to wait for a dial tone before dialing to the central office This increases the effectiveness of the toll restriction by prohibiting users from dialing an unrestricted code before the central office is ready and then making a toll call when the dial tone is heard Each tone detection circuit of the DTD consists of a sophisticated audio noise level detector This circuit monitors audio signals and determines a constant or ambient level and then determines the presence of noise above ambient During operation the system passes digitized voice signals from a port to be monitored through the Pulse Code Modulation PCM switching matrix to one of the noise level detection circuits of the DTD The presence of a call progress tone is typically characterized by a sustained non fluctuating noise level The DTD then multiplies the periods that the tone is present and the periods of silence The durations of tone and silence are assembled to form a cadence or rhythm pattern that is compared with an internal list of call progress tones and their associated cadence By matching the cadence of the monitored tone with
280. o the interface A direct current DC blocking capacitor protects the secondary winding of the audio coupling transformer from conducting DC energy As a music input the circuit operates as an input only and so it can be used to play but not record music The relay provides form A single pole single throw and normally open contacts for activating external circuitry and devices Contacts RLY 1 are designated to operate in conjunction with audio interface PAGE for external paging applications Care must be taken not to exceed the contact ratings listed in the specifications 2 Paging External music Page M2 P connector can be used as a music source The selection between the music source or voice paging output is accomplished by P3 jumper located on the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards See Figure 9 18 Table 9 22 defines the position of P3 for the music selection Shared Service Cards 29 77 n n 3 lt X 5 5 T 5 D Y 5 S n 3 lt 2 5 amp S zw D E nm nm DS lt R ini gt S x S nm nm 5 S 253 5 R do 5 S Ey 23 2 Relay Contacts 1 2 Paging Relay Relay Contacts 1 2 can be used as a system alarm or dial operated The selection between the paging or system alarm dial operated is accomplished by P4 jumper located on the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Offic
281. o the three holes displayed in Figure 8 15 E 5 Position the card on top of the MCB Office card and align the four fastening holes on top of the standoff spacers Common Control Cards 2 8 29 4 Gently but firmly press the MRC connector into MCB Office connector until the MRC card rests on the standoff spacers A slight resistance will be felt as the cards engage 5 Insert the M3 spring lock washers over the four Phillips M3X6 screws and fasten the MRC card to the MCB Office card Figure 8 12 MRC Assembly onto MCB Office REMOVE BEFORE USE 11 3 5 8 30 gt Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Removing the MRC 1 RepeatPreparing for Installation page 8 43 2 Remove the M3X6 Phillips screws and washers that secure the MRC card to the standoff spacers of the MCB Office card and safeguard for future re assembly 3 Place your thumbs on the MCB Office card on either side of the MRC card near the MCB Office front side Use your fingers to lift the edge of the MRC card on both sides and gently disengage the multi pin connector P1 on the MRC from MCB Office connector J4 and multi pin connector P2 on the MRC from MCB Office connector J7 E 5 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 31 NOTES S 8 32 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual IMC8 and
282. oIP Voice Over IP Installation Manual Shared Service Cards 29 59 5 o S S D E NOTES S x 6 E S 9 60 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Remote Maintenance Modem 1 General Description The U RMI Office and RMI Office cards provide an auto answer data modem A full duplex asynchronous ASCII modem for remote programming the system database diagnostics and system maintenance and or for displaying various reports The modem operates at up to 56Kbps using the ITU T V 92 standard The modem answers an incoming call in Originate mode no answer tone To establish a connection the originating modem must initiate the call in answer mode by sending answer tone This feature may be used as an added security measure to protect the system database from intrusions Modem umpers Enable Disable The U RMI Office and RMI Office cards are equipped with jumper straps 5 and P6 see Figure 9 3 on page 9 11 that enable and disable the modem These jumpers when removed disable the on board modem without affecting the other programming interfaces Thus a local programming terminal or an external modem incorporating more sophisticated security features may be operated while the modem is disabled The modem requires no external connections to function The data side of the modem circuitry directly accesses the peripheral data bus to communicate with the syst
283. ocated in the rear section of the IPx Office unit However the PI recognizes each physical slots as two separate slots slot 2 3 slot 4 5 slot 6 7 slot 8 9 and slot 10 11 F TYPE 2 This field should show the required card name If the lists a different card type this indicates that the card slot has been previously initialized by a different card type That card must be relocated to a clear card slot where the I_Type field shows NO_CARD or the current card slot assignment must be cleared throughout the PI TYPE sues Shows the card type currently located in the slot Allows modifying the card database set assigned by the system When not applicable for the card is displayed in this field S S S E D o S S 3 X2 S D Version Subversion Provides information on the card software set loaded For display purposes only Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests 3 11 2 S 852 15 E O D 3 D 5 Y X D Status cee The information provided in this field helps you to troubleshoot card initialization problems See Table 3 1 Verify that the cards are identified properly in the card list branch of the system database Route CLIS The different card slot STATUS messages are described below in Table 3 1 8 Verify that the STATUS field indicates ACTIVE for each of the cards i
284. ocedure and Hardware Reference Manual 1 General Description The IPx Office can operate as a system in any one of the following configurations Table 6 3 IPx Office System Configuration System Configuration See Figure Options Main Cage 15 Expansion 2nd Expansion Cage Cage IPx Office Figure 6 17 on page 6 25 D Office 500 Figure 6 18 on page 6 25 e gt IPx Office 500X 500X Figure 6 19 on page 6 26 n E IPx Office 800X Figure 6 20 on page 6 27 S IPx Office 500X 800X Figure 6 21 on page 6 28 E S IPx Office 800X 800X Figure 6 22 on page 6 29 The main cage includes control cards and peripheral cards The expansion cage or cages in clude peripheral cards ES Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cage Description gt 6 23 AS gt ke E 5 8 E 3 20 5 o S 5 n Main Unit IPx Office The IPx Office unit houses the Main Control Board MCB Office the NTU Office card DataBase Module DBM X card hard disk when ordered by the customer Software Application Unit SAU LED Office card and the Main Resources Card MRC In addition the IPx Office unit includes five peripheral card slots and a slot for the power supply Expansion Cage IPx 500X The expansion cage may house 10 universal peripheral special form factor cards These card types are described in detail in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Manual and Ch
285. of assistance How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00345 4 FCC Warning Modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user authority to operate the equipment under FCC rules Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 4 0011118 eese 1 1 Document DescrpllOn o sse t t ect rg tat gi Pega Mc 1 1 Related Documentation aria ra A 1 3 Special Symbols Used in this Document sse eene nnns 1 4 List OF Abbreviations eee ie be SR ne a tee e abe detis 1 5 1 2 About the Coral IPx Office uuu as aa 1 7 System ala 1 7 AD ACILY ee ia 1 7 O 1 7 HEIC 1 8 Major FeatUr65 seem Pa ia ee nt ei 1 9 Recommended TOOIS S o E eee 1 11 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Procedure 2 14 1 amp aa ea 2 1 Installation Environment sess a e enne nennt nnns 2 1 Space Req
286. om the Database Menu press 3 to set the Auto Backup time The following prompt appears NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN BACKUPS l to 255 N Set the number of days between automatic backups The default is set to 7 days between backups so that an automatic backup file is created every week If no automatic backups are needed enter N for creating manual backups Selection of the backup type is required either a manual backup performed by the technician or an automatic daily backup The default after First Initialization is automatic daily backup every week Enter N to enable the manual backup or number between 1 to 255 to enable a daily backup The system prompts for the time of day with SET AUTO BACKUP TIME TIME Enter the time of day to automatically save the system database in the 24 hour military time format Use 24 00 for midnight and 24 01 to 24 59 for times between midnight and 1 00 a m The default time is 01 30 or 1 30 a m The system will return to the Database Backup menu Press 0 to return to the Database menu Software Installation Procedure 4 11 o D n S 5 S S Q 3 a 6 Erasing Flash Memory This function enables erasing of backed up files stored on the IMC8 card Performing the following procedure will erase the Flash DBS backup Before erasing verify that the database is no longer needed 1 From the Database menu press 4 to erase the flash memory The following prompt appea
287. om the card processors regarding port activity It determines the appropriate response based on the programming entries contained in the system database The main processor then instructs the appropriate card processor what action to take with each port Memory Management system memory resides on the MCP embedded circuitry RAM is located directly on the MCB Office card The MCB Office also acts as a mother card to the DBM X memory card and the MRC resources card The DBM X contains 2MB 4 or 8 MB of Static Random Access Memory SRAM expansion memory Flash memory located on the IMC8 16 card stores the generic feature software which determines the operation of the system RAM both on the MCB Office and on the DBM X expansion cards stores the system configuration database and is used as a run memory for general purposes Database memory and real time clock functions in the Coral system are protected against power loss by a long life lithium backup battery installed on the MCB Office A monitoring circuit on the card constantly measures the voltage level of the battery 5 5 S S It signals the main processor when the remaining energy stored in the battery 15 reduced to the level that it can no longer provide sufficient power to maintain the memory circuitry 8 8 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual The generic feature software and
288. ome situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate NOTICE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 ii UL Safety of Information Technology Equipment Compliance This equipment has been tested and complied with the following USL Compliance USL indicates Listing to U S Standard for Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment UL60950 Third Edition CNL Compliance CNL indicates Certification to Canadian Standard fo
289. on slots 6 7 e H O slot 1 5 Power Supply Yellow Green 48VDC To AC Power Circuit Breaker 30A 250V S B To Second Expansion Cage DC power wires To First supplied by Expansion Cage manufacturer To IPx Office Yellow Green To Second O Expansion Cage 2 Ground wires i To First supplied by or E O Expansion Cage customer To IPx Office R 1 0 ohm max 254 Building md Entrance Ground S E D E 5 5 Saj Hardware Installation Procedure 22 37 S S n E lt 5 5 55 2 38 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Program Interface Device Connection PSN NOTE E Coral IP x Office Installation Manual The data terminal or personal computer that will be used as the Program Interface PI device must be equipped with an RS 232E asynchronous serial data interface that can be configured for a data rate of 19200 9600 4800 1200 or 300 bps 8 data bits 1stop bit and no parity bit or EVEN ODD mark space and parity The PI device must use the ASCII character set The ground connection to the PI device must be the same ground connection supplied to the Coral system Unpack the PI device and prepare it for operation Set the interface for a data rate of 9600 bps 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity bit These are the default sett
290. on Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 22 0 3 Preparing the Unit for Installation The process of mounting and installing the unit includes the following stages m Checking the Space and Positioning Requirements m Checking the Electrical Requirements m Opening the Unit Cover Checking the Space and Positioning Requirements Verify that the Coral IPx Office system will be positioned in accordance with local and system space and positioning requirements The spacing requirements as described in Space Requirements on page 2 2 ensure system operation and maintenance Checking the Electrical Requirements Verify that the Coral IPx Office system installation meets all electrical requirements The electrical requirements as described in Electrical Requirements on page 2 5 ensure safe operation and maintenance Power Test Check the functionality of the power supply to the IPx Office system as follows 1 Place an anti static sheet over a desk or a table top that can support 19 416 8 8kg a plastic shipping bag will do 2 Connect a ground wire between the IPx Office unit and the master ground as described in Connecting the Ground Wire to the Unit page 2 19 3 Connect the power cable s as described in Connecting the Power Wires page 2 35 4 If necessary install the DC power supply See Installing the DC Power Supply page 2 34 5 Turn ON the PS Off
291. on and Boot Code m Authorization m Database Backup The IMC8 or IMC16 card can be inserted into a PC slot using any PCMCIA application adapter for loading a new Coral software version Whenever an updated version of the IPx Office software is released the upgrade is delivered to the sites either on 3 5 diskettes via e mail or via other electronic media file transfer applications The upgrade is contained in a self extracting compressed file that is specific for the site The upgraded generic feature software must be extracted by a PC using the FMprog tool and then written from the PC hard disk onto the IMC8 and IMC16 cards The FMprog is a tool for Coral dealers who install upgrade and maintain Coral systems using flash memory cards See the FMprog PC Utility Reference Manual This reference manual describes how to install and operate the FMprog Utility D S 20 gt gt un R Y S S 5 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Software Installation Procedure 24 1 2 Upgrading Using the FMprog Utility Use FMprog version 5 xx and above Otherwise the Coral will not initialize The upgrade of the generic feature software involves the following main steps m Installing the FMprog Utility version 5 xx and later m Extracting the new Coral generic feature software file into the PC hard disk m Programming the new generic software upgrade to the IMC8 IMC16 card The FMprog utility can
292. oral IPx Office space requirements 1 Verify that there is sufficient space for the Coral IPx Office system components 2 The dimensions and weights of the various components are provided in Figure 2 1 Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 3 minimum clearance as detailed in Table 2 3 must be provided around the the various components For more detailed information see Figure 2 2 and Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 4 Figure 2 2 displays a schematic diagram of all installation orientation options 5 The cage must be mounted horizontally 6 It is recommended to mount the first expansion cage above the main cage However any position around the main cage is acceptable 7 It is recommended to mount the second expansion cage above the first expansion cage However any position around the first expansion cage is acceptable 2 3 3 un 8 The mounting of an optional expansion cage should be taken into consideration when mounting the Coral IPx Office equipment 2 2 Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 9 For safety reasons the top cover of the IPx Office cage should not be positioned higher than 64 162 cm from the floor 10 Sufficient space must be reserved for any additional equipment related to the Coral IPx Office system such as the Program Interface terminal or personal computer voice mail system external public address system etc 11 Sufficient space must be rese
293. oral Sentinel with power over LAN type A 4 D A 5 55 2 D mi 5 6 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 5 2 Modular Wired Station Jack Wiring Diagram 654321 Pin 2 Pin 5 Black Yellow DT DTR DR DRR FlexSet DKT 48VDC FlexSet DKT 48VDC Pin 3 Pin 4 Red Green AR DRT NS AT DTT lt UpB gt R T lt UpA gt Pin 3 Pin4 Red Green New Style Surface Jack AR DRT AT DTT lt UpB gt R lt UpA gt Pin2 5 Black Yellow DT DTR DR DRR FlexSet DKT 48VDC FlexSet DKT 48VDC SE625B Wall Jack Pin 4 Pin 3 Green Red AT DTT AR DRT lt UpA gt T lt UpB gt R Pin 2 Pin 5 Black Yellow DT DR DRR FlexSet DKT 48VDC u FlexSet DKT 48VDC Western Electric 42A Modular Cover F Wht Blu ENT Grn Wht m J lt UpA gt Org Wht T DR DRR m 2 DR DRP oe Wht Grn AR DRT Wht Org AR DRT DT DRT R lt UpB gt DT DRT R lt UpB gt TIA T568B AT amp T TIA T568A D 5 5 Saj 3 5 External Connections 5 7 Wireless and VoIP Stations The FlexAir handset the SIP phone and the FlexSet IP 280S model
294. p Start trunks The 4CID Office card includes 4 circuit FSK tone receiver and decoder The card converts FSK tone m BellCore GR 30 or m ETSI 300 659 1 para 6 1 1 into ASCII text information The ASCII information is sent to the Coral IPx Office main processor for CID displaying on FlexSet SLT see 4 8 20S Office and URC above and for SMDR CLA APA etc The CID feature for analog Loop Start trunk requires Authorization for Caller ID Each trunk can be individually enabled through programming in the configuration database 8CID Same as 4CID Office but includes 8 circuit FSK tone receiver and decoder The 8CID is installed on the 8T Office card in Coral IPx Office systems See Figure 10 24 on page 10 44 12Sx Office 12Sx Office card plugged on the m 85 Office card for 205 Office 20 SLT ports total The 12Sx Office expansion piggyback optional card adds 12 SLT ports to the 8S Office card See Figure 10 16 on page 10 36 and Figure 10 17 on page 10 37 8Fx office 8Fx Office card plugged on the m 45 Office card for 4582 Office 12 ports total 4 SLT and 8 SFT m 35 Office card for 8582 Office 16 ports total 8 SLT and 8 SFT The 8Fx Office expansion piggyback optional card adds 8 SFT ports to the 4S Office and 8S Office cards See Figure 10 25 on page 10 45 16Fx office 16Fx Office card plugged on the m 45 Office card for 4516F Office 20 ports total 4 SLT and 16 SFT m 35 Office card for 8516 Office
295. panel and set aside 4 Carefully remove the PS Office DC from its slot 5 Place the PS Office DC over the anti static material with the component side facing upwards D D 5 S 2 29 Q Q S S WY 29 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 21 5 m un S S 29 Q Q S 2 S WY 29 7 22 Power Supply 4 Troubleshooting The PS Office DC unit does not include an alarm LED indicator The front panel of the IPx Office unit includes eight 8 diagnostic LED indicators For information on troubleshooting see Front Panel page 6 3 Power supply failure generally results in the loss of one or more output voltages However protection circuitry in the power supply regulator may shut down a regulator due to a current overload caused by an external fault maintenance activities are to be carried out by a qualified service technician If the power supply is turned ON and power is not present in the system check the following m DC power wires See Figure 7 10 m DC power failure Blown main or circuit fuse breaker in the building electrical panel m Faulty PS Office DC Blown fuse FSI or on the PS Office DC Replace fuse as described on Replacing the PS Office DC Power Fuse page 7 22 Replacing the PS Office DC Power Fuse The PS Office DC employs one fuse F2 to protect the DC main input To replace the DC Power Input Fuse 1 Remove the power supply u
296. paring for Installation 1 Locate a desk or table top that will support 20 Ib 9 1 kg If the surface can be damaged by sharp objects place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar material over the top surface 2 Place an anti static sheet over the desk or table top The card s plastic shipping bag will suffice 3 Remove power from the IPx Office system by turning OFF the power switch on the front panel of the PS Office unit 4 Disconnect the power cord or wires from the PS Office unit 5 If necessary disconnect the ground wire from the IPx Office unit 6 If necessary dismount the IPx Office unit from the rack See Dismounting the IPx Office Unit from the Rack page 2 16 Installing the DBM X Card 1 Open the IPx Office unit See Opening the Unit Cover page 6 8 2 Fasten the three hex M3X6 standoff spacers into the three holes displayed in Figure 8 15 4 22 Q 3 Position the DBM X card on top of the MCB Office card and align the three fastening holes on top of the standoff spacers Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 8 43 4 Gently but firmly press the DBM X connector into MCB Office connector until the DBM X card rests on the standoff spacers A slight resistance will be felt as the cards engage 5 Insert the M3 spring curved washers over the three Phillips M3X6 screws and fasten the DBM X card to the MCB Office card Figure 8 15 DBM X Assembly onto MCB Office
297. per Slot See the Coral Product Description See Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Maximum Combined Trunk and See the Coral Product Description wired Station Ports Maximum Ports In Use See Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution page 6 34 Simultaneously Size See Coral IPx Office Dimensions page 2 3 Weight See Coral IPx Office Weights page 2 3 Space Requirements See Coral IPx Office Space Requirements page 2 3 Power Input See Coral IPx Office Maximum Power Requirements page 2 6 Operating Temperature 32 104 F 0 40 C Operating Humidity 20 80 Relative Non Condensing Maximum Power Consumptiont 160 Watt 460 Watt 575 Watt Heat Dissipation 246 BTU Hr 700 BTU Hr 1070 BTU Hr For a full list of specifications refer to the Coral Product Description T A PX card occupies slot 1 of the first IPx 800X expansion cage in an IPx Office 800X 800X system configuration t Maximum power consumption and heat dissipation are worst case projections based on fully populated cages The figures do not include power consumption and heat dissipation caused by stationary batteries in a high rate of charge 1 10 Introduction Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 Recommended Tools The following tools are needed in order to install and maintain the Coral IPx Office system Require d Tools m 4mm max flat blade screwdriver for installation and removal of the door m 3 16 1 4 and 5 16 straight blade screwdrive
298. ping containers and partially insert them into the card slots as determined above Allow the cards A 5 Ry to protrude from the card cage by approximately 1 inch 2 5 cm 9 Skip to Interconnecting the IP x Office and the Expansion Cages page 2 33 2 26 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Table 2 6 IPx Office Card Types Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Card Type Card Names Slot Allocation Peripheral Analog Trunk Interface Peripheral Digital Trunk Interface Peripheral Wired Station Interface 8SFT Office 16SFT Office 24SFT Office 4S Office 8S Office 20S Office 8S 12Sx Integrated Coral Message Center Voice Mail Unified 8T Office 8T CID Office 4T Office 4T CID Office 10 11 4TBR Office UDT Office PRI 30 Office 30T Office 4S8F Office 4S 8Fx 4S16F Office 45 16Fx 8S8F Office 85 8Fx 8S16F Office 8S 16Fx IPC SFC office IPC uCMC office IPC WiCMC office Messaging Resources MR office RMI office U MR office U RMI office Expansion ESIM Office 8 9 2 3 or 4 5 8 9 or 10 11 2 3 or 4 5 2 3 or 4 5 These cards may require changes to option straps which affect interface characteristics or operation For reference material see the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Hardware Installation Pro
299. processor and replaceable software chips The group controller circuit is described in further detail on Group Controller Circuit page 8 10 m Rest Button used to reset the IPx Office unit including all telephony and IP applications The reset button is described in further detail on Front Panel page 6 3 m Backup Battery used to backup the database during power failure The backup battery is described in further detail on Lithium Battery Condition Testing page 8 21 m Rear connectors including the J2 ESIM connector P4 MCB Office connector and the P5 power supply connector m PS Office card connector supplies power from the PS Office power supply card to the MCB Office card MBP Office connector connects the MCB Office card to the backplane m ESIM connector provides an interface between the MCB Office and the first expansion cage The MCB Office card includes a 50 pin female connector that can facilitate an ESIM card 5 5 S S 8 6 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 8 2 MCB Office Card Layout LED card connector 000 6 0041 05 MAC 000A6B0041D4 MAC 000A6B0041D3 Release flash card optional PS Office connector Release A button 090 MBP Office connector UGW
300. public address The interface supplies a line level 10dBm or 50 to 100m V 6000 balanced audio output and a Single Pole Single Throw Normally Open or SPST NO form A relay RLY1 contact Figure 9 22 and Figure 9 23 illustrate connections to two typical examples of voice paging systems The audio output of the voice page interface may drive amplified speakers directly The number of speakers which may be driven varies from manufacturer to manufacturer See speaker manufacturer documentation for specific details The paging connector is a stereo 3 5 mm phone plug see Figure 9 9 on page 9 17 Figure 9 22 Page Am External Wiring To Paging Connectors Amplifier i M2 P Balanced 600 ohm i Input Coral IPx x Office i Amplifier ELI 7 Control U RMI Office Relay Contacts Figure 9 23 Page Wiring To Amplified Bu Speakers i i M2 P iJ1 H Balanced 600 ohm Amplified Speakers Amplified Speaker Power Supply TU Output Coral IPx Office n S 2 5 gt 3 D E S n n IS lt 2 5 5 S D E gt U RMI Office 9 82 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 8 The relay contact closes continuously during access to the voice page interface Although not always required the relay contact is often utilized for Mac Precedence or Mute Control to mute back
301. r Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 CE Compliance Statement The Coral system complies with the requirements of the following standards EN60950 1 EN55022 ACA TS001 EN55024 AS NZS 3260 AS NZS 3548 CISPR22 AS NZS 60950 The Coral system may include a CLASS I laser product All laser transmitters integrated within the Coral systems are approved CLASS I laser units Coral systems that include such laser transmitters comply with EN60825 1 ili Federal Communications Commission Part 15 The FCC Wants you to Know This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures a Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna b Increase the separation between the equipm
302. r RLY3 System Alarm or Dial Operated contacts Figure 9 21 displays the jumper settings for the page feature Table 9 23 Relay Contacts 1 2 PAGE RELAY Selection 4 1 2 2 3 P4 Jumper Setting Relay Contacts 1 2 PAGE RLY1 RELAY RLY3 Figure 9 20 Paging Relay Relay Simplified Diagram contacts 1 T O P4 1 t O 0 PAGE 4 RLY1 PAGE O o lt RLY3 RELAY System Alarm or Dial Operated Figure 9 21 Relay sincro 2 Relay Contacts P4 election P4 Jumper Setting 1 2 Function a inni 1 2 1 P5 RLY1 PAGE E 3 419 5 0 1 o 2 5 P3 P2 RLY3 RELAY b 4101 1 5 22221211 9 80 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 5 Database Programming Each U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office or MR Office card provides one paging output the external voice paging port operates by using both the relay circuit RLY1 and the PAGE circuit The paging feature requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required for Paging The following parameters must be set to enable the paging feature 1 Card List Route CLIS Card type must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 General Numbering Plan Route NPL 0 12 Ckt 2
303. rameter enter 1 to 6 ports as required URC Configuration Route 11 1 m 3WAY defines the maximum number of 3 way Conference bridge resources to be enabled by the system URC cards Each 3 way conference circuit requires 4 card time slots therefore eight 3 way circuits require 32 TS Card List Route CLIS Card type see Table 9 3 on page 9 7 must show RMI F or MR in the P TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 URC2 in the P TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Port List Route PLIS 0 Port type must show CONF in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Ckt 48 53 max See URC Meet Me Multiparty Conference Configuration page 9 27 Use the NAME fields to assign a short full name to the authorized CONF ports If you choose 0 Physical Location type Shelf 1 Slot 7 Ckt 48 53 If you choose 1 Dial Number select field 5 E E v gt E gt 29 2 3 M S D S S Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 6 System Port List for more details 9 42 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Numbering Plan Route NPL 0 CONFERENCE RELEASE field 9 index 173 CONFERENCE LOCK field 9 index 190 CONFERENCE DIAL NUMBERS field 30 Shelf 1 Slot 7 Ckt 48 53 URC Configuration Route 11 1 m Meet Me defines the maximum number of Multi Party Meet Me conference bridge resources to be e
304. ransfer Circuits eene eene nnne nnns 5 15 Physical Connection alici eb b ads E erede etie 5 15 SIE ze J taa h 5 15 Buc TEE 5 15 Database Programming eise et d eed ce ade dne t dae Hd 5 16 Power Failure Trunk Definition Route 4 5 16 5 5 Data Communication Ports 5 17 5 6 Card Connections 5 19 Peripheral Cards Index x cete hurt 5 19 5 EE 5 22 Direct Pinout of the Champ Card Connection 5 23 Direct Pinout of the MDF Connection eee enne nnns 5 25 H 45 Connections i dre eate po arret ada 5 27 Peripheral Cards Nde tae ala 5 27 AT Office and 4T CID Office Cards 5 28 8T Office and 8T CID Office CardS i 5 29 Office Card teta npe ar egt eer i edet 5 30 vii UDT Office T1 or PRI 23 pria 5 31 PRESVY OFICE moy iniii a erano aa 5 32 Z30T Office Gard irte ti o iaia iaia atti 5 33 5 7 LAN WAN and Printer Connections 5 35 Connecting t the LAN li aa u a A 5 36 Connecting to the LAN when an NTU Office Card is 5 36 Connecting to the LAN when an NTU Office Card is not
305. re installing the card into a card slot that has been initialized by another card type the previous card name must be cleared first To clear an initialized card slot 1 Select the Card List branch Route CLIS in the system database 2 Ifthe I TYPE for the card slot shows a card type other than the card currently installed enter NO CARD to clear the slot Refer to Program Interface and Database Reference Manual Chapter 6 for further details Diagnostic LED Indication Each plug in Office service and peripheral card is equipped with one or two red diagnostic indication LEDs on the front side near the right side of the card These LEDs can assume one of three states of illumination OFF ON or FLASHING The illumination state of the LED indicates the card s operating condition Table 10 1 lists the indication provided by each of the three LED states During normal operation the card diagnostic LED should be extinguished However the LED routinely illuminates steadily whenever power is first applied to the system the entire system is initializing or the card is first inserted into a card slot The LED remains illuminated steadily until the card receives a card database from the system 1 In the U RMI Office and U MR Office card a second LED is located in the middle of the card In the 4S8F Office 4S16F Office 8S8F Office and 85162 Office cards a second LED is located in the right side of the card Coral IPx Office Installat
306. reams into RTP packets See MRC Card page 8 27 for more information RTP packets designated for the LAN are directed through the UGW internal switch The UGW switch directs the media stream to LAN ports 1 8 The dynamic IP addresses are either provided by the NTU Office card or the DHCP server enabling connection to the endpoints on the LAN RTP packets designated for the WAN are directed to the NTU Office card which then directs them through the external WAN port on the front panel to their destination on the WAN Media Stream from the LAN and WAN to the Digital World WAN Packets are directed from the WAN port directly to the NTU Office card The NTU Office card redirects the RTP packets to the MRC card where they are translated into PCM streams Finally the PCM streams are directed to the digital network LAN packets are directed from the LAN ports 1 8 through the internal UGW switch which is embedded on the MCB Office card The packets are then directed into the MRC which converts the RTP packets into PCM streams Finally the PCM streams are directed to the digital network E 5 S n v S D Coral IPx Office Installation Manual System Networking gt 11 5 E 2 5 E 8 v 3 5 5 Figure 11 2 System Operation with an NTU Office Card 11 6 gt System Networking NTU Office CS Embedded Router PCM RTP media Packets HDLC Time Signal
307. rface PI and Database Reference Manual Gains Table Route ROOT 0 1 3 Entry 11 of the gains table can be used to set gain parameters to the music sources These parameters set the transmission value levels of the music while in CONNECT state with any possible port in the system For more information see Chapter 19 in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference manual WAIT QUE Route ROOT 7 3 The following three fields MUSIC TONE MUSIC 5 0 and RETAIN WAIT Q SOURCE are used to activate WAIT Q features For more information see Chapter 27 CoraLINK in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference manual Shared Service Cards 29 73 m 3 Q T 5 E S S E re 5 5 5 m 3 Q E o 2 3 E S US re S 5 5 External Connections Figure 9 16 illustrates the connection of customer supplied music sources The first music source is passed to any port in a hold state and may also be selected as background music over the speaker of idle key telephone sets The second music source may be defined in the system database as a second music source for multiple background music sources The music source should have a line level 10dBm 50 to 100mV 6000 balanced output with an adjustable output level In some cases an 80 speaker level output from a portable radio or tape player may be used wit
308. ripheral Cards 10 23 U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office features 10 24 Assembly Parts Used NTU Office card Assembly Kit 11 9 xvili List of Figures Figure 2 1 Coral IPx Office Sizes and Weights i 2 4 Figure 2 2 Coral IPx Office Space Requirements a 2 4 Figure 2 3 Table Mounting Bumpers U 2 13 Figure 2 4 IPx Office Unit Mounted on Table i 2 13 Figure 2 5 IPx Office Unit Mounted onto Rack i 2 15 Figure 2 6 Removing IPx Office Unit from nennen nns 2 17 Figure 2 7 Coral IPx Office Cage Ground Assembly 2 19 Figure 2 8 Master Ground Unit i 2 20 Figure 2 9 System Ground Connection i 2 21 Figure 2 10 System Ground with Three Units 2 22 Figure 2 11 ESD Strap Connection to Cage ii 2 24 Figure 2 12 Coral IPx Office Card Placement nennen nnne 2 28 Figure 2 13 1st Expansion Cage 500X Card 2 29 Figure 2 14 2nd Expansion Cage 500X Card Placement a 2 30 Figure 2 15 1st Expansion Cage 800X Card 2 31 Figure 2 16 2nd Expansion Cage 800X Card Place
309. rogramming required Dial Operated Accessory The following parameters must be set to enable the Dial Operated Accessory feature 1 Card List Route CLIS Card type must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 General Numbering Plan Route NPL 0 21 Ckt 25 Use the 21 RELAY field of the Update menu to designate dial numbers to the dial select alarm relay ports in the system Refer to Chapter 5 Numbering Plan in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for more details Port List Route PLIS Port type must show RELAY in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 25 Use this field to assign a short full name to this port If you choose 0 Physical Location type Shelf 1 Slot 6 Ckt 25 If you choose 1 Dial Number choose field 8 RELAY Refer to Chapter 6 System Port List in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for more details Class Of Service Route COS 0 RELAY Use the RELAY parameter to determine whether a specific station user is allowed to switch the Relay ON and OFF Refer to Chapter 7 Station and Trunk COS in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for more details Shared Service Cards 9 95 lt S ES 5 n S D 5 lt S e S nm nm lt Major Minor Alarm Relay 1 System Features Diagnostics Route SFE 9 MINOR_RLY Use this parameter to
310. rs na 6 39 Connecting the IPx 800X Cage to the IPx Office Unit eee 6 39 Related Documentation 6 39 Chapter 7 Power Supply 7 1 PS Office AC Power Supply i 7 1 General Description 7 1 SOUICO tl lira arie 7 1 PS Office AC Front Panel ura u sn ilari iii 7 1 PS Office AC Card 7 2 CIICUIPDescrHplion Xe s sse ue 7 4 DE Output oec t hat i Lade o e a pee eM cibi tee bet pine 7 4 Normal Operation sea la t Pe ueteres b eae 7 4 Disconnecting the AC Power Cord from the AC Power 7 5 Turning the Power Switch OFF i 7 5 Monitoring ieri rrt ote pes tta Dee tate ee Pea ia 7 5 Installation and iii 7 6 Installing the Power SUpply iaia 7 6 Operating the PS Office AC i 7 7 Removing the Power Supply en eedem aan 7 9 Troublesfioolilig d ce hue ER ER E 7 9 Replacing the PS Office AC iii 7 10 Diagnosing the IPx Office LED Indicators ii 7 10 8 ate E LE 7 12 7 2 PS Office DC Power Supply UNit nennen nnne nas 7 18 General Description
311. rs Proceed with Erase 0 1 A N N 9 Specify one of the options as follows 0 erases DBO DEF 1 erases DB1 DEF A erases both DBO DEF and DB1 DEF N cancels the operation After you specify 0 1 or A the following message appears Erasing Upon completion of the erasing the following message appears Erase Completed If the erasing operation was not successful the following message appears Erase failed 5 5 D kel S 5 S E 3 2 n 4 12 Software Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 7 Backing the Hard Disk onto the Compact Flash Card In the future IPx Office systems will include an optional hard disk that is installed onto the MCB Office card The hard disk will be backed up with the compact flash card 8 Loading Restoring from the Compact Flash Card 5 D 3 S S S 3 A n Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Software Installation Procedure 4 13 ta D n 5 ta S x 2 5 4 14 Software Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 5 3 Protecti 5 4 Power Fail PF Circuits 5 15 5 5 Data Communication Ports 24444444 5 17 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Main Distribution Frame 5 This chapter describes the MDF and the pinout connections to the cage and external equipment For hardware installa
312. rs m 1 and 2 Phillips screwdrivers m Diagonal wire cutters m Long nosed pliers m Electrician s pliers m Slip joint pliers m Adjustable wrench m Wrench for ground cable hex nuts 3 2 mm x 7 mm m Telephone cable cutters m Standard crimping tool m Telephone cable insulation strippers m 16 ft 5m measuring tape m Punch tool matching all telephone cable terminal blocks used at the installation site Digital Volt Ohm Amp meter m Telephone line test set capable of pulse and DTMF dialling m Static dissipating wrist strap m Portable laptop personal computer with a PCMCIA slot capable of emulating an asynchronous ASCII data terminal and approved by the manufacturer to run the binary database save and restore utility portable asynchronous ASCII data terminal or permanently installed on site personal computer or ASCII data terminal uS o gt w 3 lt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Introduction gt 1 11 Optional Tools m Modular line polarity tester m Flashlight m Tone continuity talk battery generator m Tone detector amplifier probe m Telephone line test set with MF tone signalling capability Alligator clip leads m Champ installation tool m Soldering iron and high quality rosin core solder m 3 16 and 1 2 cable staple gun m Analog line transmission analyzer m Portable DS1 E1 analyzer Bit Error Rate tester and channel demultiplex
313. rs antenna connectors P pu A UGW LAN 2 6 8 WAN PRINTER Fa Bor Network card reset button EE System reset button Flash memory COM LAN USB Connector card slot port connectors Compact flash UGW COM WAN memory disk port connector slot Table 6 1 Front Panel Features System power is on and functional conti Group controller functional MRC functional Software upgrade MAINT LED red continuously on FAN LED red continuously on GC LED red continuously on Any fan is malfunctioning Group control is malfunctioning UGW LED red continuously on CPU LED red continuously on IMC8 16 release button Used to release the IMC8 16 card IMC8 16 flash memory card Used to save and restore the database as well as to store the Generic feature software Compact flash release button Used to release the compact flash card Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description 6 3 UGW is malfunctioning CPU is malfunctioning S 5 o nm D E D 3 D S D 5 Data Terminal Port DTE Interface used to connect an RS232 E serial cable providing access to the PI or CoralVIEW CVA CVD CVT Default configuration 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit VT 100 See KB0 RS 232E Programming Port page 8 18 UGW COM port Data Terminal Port DTE Interface used to conne
314. rts added Ask your dealer for an authorized upgrade Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 System Initialization Preparing for Initialization After the software has been installed and initialized 1 In the expansion cages verify that the PS Office power switch is in the OFF position turned downwards I NOTE E Before proceeding verify that all power supply units within the expansion cages are turned OFF If the expansion cages are turned ON before the IPx Office unit the peripheral cards within the expansion cages will not initialize properly 2 Check the position of shared service and peripheral interface cards that will be inserted into the system card cage Observe any order previously directed or any established convention of the distributor See Inserting a Coral Peripheral Card page 2 24 and use the following card placement diagrams m Coral IPx Office Card Placement page 2 28 m ist Expansion Cage 500X Card Placement page 2 29 m 2nd Expansion Cage 500X Card Placement page 2 30 m ist Expansion Cage 800X Card Placement page 2 31 m 2nd Expansion Cage 800X Card Placement page 2 32 3 Verify that all peripheral cards in the expansion cages protrude from the cage by approximately 1 inch 2 5 cm 4 Attach the Program Interface PI device cable to KBO programming port connector on the front side of the IPx Office unit IPx Office Unit Initialization 1 Verify that the MCB Office control card has been
315. runks 3 way for stations and analog lines is standard support for Silent Monitoring and the Coral Message Center s Silent Record feature as described on page 9 35 m Two max 6 meet me bridge conference for 14 parties as described on page 9 39 m 24 max 24 port DTMF receivers and decoders for touch tone digits as described on page 9 45 n E D E S x x N x 3 p E SS m 16 max 32 port tone detector DTD and call progress tone analyzer for enhanced dialing busy outside number auto redial as described on page 9 49 Use a self contained table of call progress tone profiles to identify standard dial busy and ringback tone signals 9 10 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual m 16 max 32 Caller ID circuit transmitters adapted to Bellcore standards which includes the time and Caller Name Num display as described on page 9 53 Figure 9 3 U RMI Office Card Circuits Layout Front Panel and Jumpers P6 P5 1 Modem Enable re Tx P2 lt internal music lt M1 external music P3 1 2 2 o 2 external music 3lo P paging Relay contacts 1 2 and 3 4 1 2 RLY1 PAGE 1 2 RLY3 RELAY RLY3 RELAY RLY2 BELL e M2 P is o U RMI Office Relay Relay contacts contacts 1 2 3 4 Shared Service Cards 29 11 n o 5 x lt 5 gt 5 gt Figure 94
316. rved for a technician s desk or work table Table 2 1 Coral 3 IPx Office Dimensions Dimension Centimeters cm 17 43 2 19 bracket to bracket 48 bracket to bracket IPx Office Unit Depth Height 2U Table 2 2 Coral IPx Office Weights Pounds Kilograms IPx Office Unit Fully loaded 19 4 8 8 The weight provided is typical and can significantly differ depending on the type of cards installed Table 2 3 IPx Office Space Dimension Centimeters cm Requirements IPx Office Unit Space between rails 18 1 25 2 2 w 3 M Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 3 ta 2 M gt un Figure 2 1 Coral IPx Office Sizes and Weights Weight fully loaded 19 4lb 8 8Kg Figure 2 2 Coral eee pr IPx Office Space Requirements Other min 3 15 8 cm IPx Office min 3 15 Gm Other Equipment Unit Equipment 36 100cm Minimum required 1 clear floor space 18 1 25 2 1 46cm 64cm lt 7 Space between rails 36 100cm Minimum required clear floor space 2 4 j Hardware Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Electrical Requirements General Requirements The Coral IPx Office operates from a standard wide input 100 to 240VAC 47 to 63Hz source or from a 40 to S6VDC source 1
317. s m See Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution page 6 34 for timeslot PCM distribution among the slots m If no other convention exists see Peripheral Card Installation page 10 1 and Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual E S 3 S D E 5 5 N 6 If IPx 500X expansion cages are installed determine the position of peripheral interface cards that will be inserted into card slots 1 through 10 in the expansion cage Observe any order previously directed by a system designer or any established convention of the distributor Card placement diagrams shown Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Hardware Installation Procedure 2 25 on Figure 2 13 through Figure 2 15 may be used a worksheet by the system designer to establish card placement prior to installation Refer to the Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual Chapter 2 and the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual Place digital trunk interface cards in card slots 4 and or 5 Slots 4 and 5 are wired as the primary and secondary external clock source respectively The cards inserted in these slots can be used to synchronize the Coral IPx system clock with a network clock signal derived from a digital trunk circuit If no other convention exists refer to Section 10 Peripheral Cards Installation of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual 7 If IPx 800X expansion cages are installed determine the position of service and
318. s FlexSet APDL CPA need only connect Tip T and Ring R or lt UpA gt and lt UpB gt as shown m FlexSet 280 series or FlexSet APDL units with PEX or PEX APA need extra 2 wires when power is supplied through the line connector The polarity of this connection is irrelevant When using the TPS single unit Telephone Power Supply no additional wires are required For peripheral device installation refer to the Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual 5 RE 5 gt Rj To prevent a potential shock hazard to station users and damage to the system make sure that station circuits extended over cables that exit the building are adequately External Connections 5 5 protected from lightning and surge currents See Protection Devices page 511 for protective device specifications Table 5 2 Station Interface Wire Pair Station Interface Supported Station Equipment Pairs Requirements Card Type Required 4 8 20S Office Standard Single Line Telephone SLT Sets 1 458 Office SLT Sets with Message Waiting Lamp 4S16F Office 8S8F Office 8S16F Office 8 16 24SFT Office FlexSet APDL CPA GKT APA PEX PEX APA 1 4S8F Office 4516 Office FlexSet 280 series with PEX 2 8S8F Office FlexSet 280S APDL with PEX or PEX APA 8S16F Offi CPA for optional external power via line connector pins 2 and 5 see Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual FlexSet IP 280S C
319. s 10 11 slot 1 slots 8 9 ee e ESIM Office Digital trunk card slots 8 9 card slots 8 9 and 10 11 Synchronization indicators UDT Office UE 2 PRI 30 Office LOS CRC GEN SEC PRM 30T Office Not from this card Primary green Secondary yellow Synchronization indicators sec O 10 S 4TBR Office 8 e 9 SN sync 0 1 2 3 5 e Synchronization Source r Not from 6 9 9 this card e 8 Pe 50 Primary oloo S green 7 59 Secondary 58008 yellow 10 16 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Figure 10 4 ESIM Office Card Jumper Settings for Synchronization Not in any expansion cage Primary green in any expansion cage Secondary yellow in any expansion cage Primary and Secondary in any expansion cage Synchronization indicators SYNC lt gt SEC PRM ESIM Office S MI re 5 E E 20 Q Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards gt 10 17 NOTES ta S n S M E un re 5 E 20 Q 10 18 Peripheral Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 104 Service and Peripheral Cards This section includes a list of all peripheral cards currently used in the Coral
320. secure the unit to the cage These screws also Removable Screws ground the unit to the cage and safeguard the unit against malfunction D gt A D 2 R Q D S n Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Power Supply 2 7 13 Figure 7 6 PS Office DC Front Panel ON PS Office DC Cat No 77440950300 OUTPUT 5 6A 43 3 6A 48 1A Removable screws 5 un S S 29 Q Q S 2 S WY 7 14 Power Supply Coral IP x Office Installation Manual PS Office DC Card Layout The PS Office DC card s component side is shown in Figure 7 7 Three components are described in the following table Feature Power Switch F2 DC Power Input Fuse DC Input Power Connector Connection to Backplane Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Description Turns the unit ON or OFF WARNING Contact with live wires in the power supply unit could cause shock burn or death Do not remove the power supply from the IPx Office system when the power switch is turned ON and power is connected A 6 3A 250V slow blow fuse that protects the unit s voltage See PS Office DC Power Supply page 7 23 The entire 48VDC input circuitry including the power supply is protected by that fuse See Figure 7 9 Connects the PS Office DC power supply to the 48VDC power source Connects the power supply to the cage backplane Power Supply gt 7 15 D gt
321. service resources are database programmable and can be adjusted as required See the relevant Program Interface Manual for URC defaults maximums and time slot details n D S 2 E Shared Service Cards 29 9 The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards include m Configuration jumpers as described on page 9 15 m External connectors as described on page 9 17 MR RMI F software as described on page 9 18 m Internal external music on hold and background music ports as described on page 9 69 m A paging output port or an external music on hold and background music port as described on page 9 77 m Universal Night Answer UNA Central Bell as described on page 9 85 m Dial operated accessory or alarm RELAY as described on page 9 91 m Two relay contacts for two of the following three features External voice paging PAGE Universal Night Answer UNA Central Bell Dial operated accessory alarm RELAY as described on page 9 99 The U RMI Office and RMI Office cards include m A built in remote maintenance access modem V 92 ITU T standard up to 56Kbps as described on page 9 61 The U RMI Office and U MR Office cards include m Shared Service components m URC indicator front panel red LED as described on page 9 16 m software as described on page 9 21 m Eight max 24 3 way conferences Consultation Broker service for digital t
322. set to enable CID URC Feature Authorization Route FEAT 1 m URC CLID m SLI CID URC Configuration Route CDB 11 CID Defines the maximum number of Caller ID CID transmitter resources to be enabled by the system URC cards Each CID transmitter circuit requires 1 card time slot When the CID exists and is initialized the PI shows Card List Route CLIS Card type see Table 9 3 on page 9 7 must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 URC2 in the P TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Port List Route PLIS 0 Port type must show CID in the TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Ckt 80 111 max See Table 9 17 URC iDSP CID Caller ID Transmitters PI Configuration page 9 30 Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 6 System Port List for more details a ua a ua S S o 9 54 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 3 Additional CID Circuits Additional CID resources cards may be installed in the optional Coral IPx 800X expansion cage The additional cards include Card Cage Description iDSP IPx 800X 64 circuit FSK Frequency Shift Keying tone generator card These cards are described in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual 4 Specifications CID Number of Circuits U RMI Office card 32 max 16 default U MR Office card 32 max 16 default RMI
323. sion cages as described in Chapter 3 of the Coral IPx 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual or Coral IPx 800 Installation Procedure and Hardware E 2 3 5 n D S Reference Manual 7 Skip to Common Control Test page 3 5 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Initial Power up Tests 3 1 Figure 3 1 Coral IPx Office Unit AC Power To AC Connections power outlet To Master Ground slots 82 3 5Voc 3 3Voc 6A 8 1 PS Office AC Gi slots 4 5 o slots 6 7 slots 8 9 slots 10 11 e N a S D 5 un D S 3 2 3 Initial Power up Tests Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 2 DC Powered Systems 1 Verify that the cage ground wire is connected and the ground nut is tightened See Ground Wiring page 2 18 2 Verify that the PS Office DC unit has been installed and the two removable screws on the left and right side of the PS Office DC front panel are tightened 3 Verify that the PS Office DC power switch is turned OFF downwards 4 Turn ON the facilities 48VDC Main Power Supply MPS and close any fuse or circuit breaker required to supply 48VDC to the Coral IPx Office unit 5 Measure the DC voltage entering the power input connector See figures on DC Power Wiring for One IPx Office Unit page 2 37 and on DC Power Wiring for Three Units page 2 37 Connect the positive l
324. t exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total REN s contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment please contact the supplier at 516 632 7200 for repair and or warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may r
325. t the customer s site Connecting to a Printer when an NTU Office Card is not Supplied If no NTU Office card is provided a printer can be connected to any of the LAN RJ 45 ports as any other ethernet device In this case the dynamic IP addresses are provided by the customer s DHCP server See Chapter 11 System Networking for more information External Connections 2 5 37 a E S D E S x S E S 4 LAN WAN Pinout Table 5 18 and Figure 5 16 show the interface connections of the pins on the LAN WAN RJ 45 connector to the network and IP endpoints Table 5 18 LAN WAN Nomination Function Pinout Tx Transmit Data to Network Tx Transmit Data to Network Rx Receive Data from Network not used not connected not used not connected Rx Receive Data from Network not used not connected not used not connected Figure 5 16 LAN WAN 12345678 Pinout Tet 2 Tx 4 5 7 8 not 3 connected 6 Rx RJ 45 Connector For information on LAN WAN connections see Chapter 11 System Networking P NOTE E For further information on how to make the connection refer to the Coral Voice over IP Installation Manual n E E S D 5 E S 5 38 gt Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Coral IPx Office Installation Manual General System Description This sec
326. tc RJ 45 jacks are mounted on the front panel of many of the peripheral cards for example the UDT Office T1 Office PRI 30 Office cards etc Mating male RJ 45 connectors should be industry standard Refer to the specific card tables in Chapter 5 External Connections for connector pin assignments Expansion Connector The expansion connector is positioned on the ESIM Office card The IPx Office expansion cable can be connected to an expansion cage only if the ESIM Office card is inserted in slot 8 9 See Interconnecting the IP x Office Unitand the Expansion Cage page 6 30 Cage Ground Terminal The ground connection is used to connect the cage to the master ground unit See Figure 6 10 for more details 9 Q S 8 2 un S 5 Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Cage Description gt 6 15 Blank Panels Blank panels are used to cover peripheral card slots that are not occupied by a peripheral card The blank panel covers the slot and prevents the insertion of foreign objects into the system thus preventing inadvertent shock or malfunction There are four blank panel sizes See Table 6 2 and Figure 6 11 Table 6 2 Blank Panel Description Part Number Card Type Card Description 77444000066 Type Il Full sized Ful sized panel used to cover slots 23 and 45 used to cover slots 2 3 and 4 5 77444000067 Type I A Half sized EA used to cover slots 6 7 and 10 11 7744400006
327. ter from the WAN into one of the LAN ports The packets are directed from the LAN into one of the LAN ports PN NOTE E If a network card is not installed in the system the WAN port can function as an additional LAN port when a cable is connected between two RJ 45 connectors on the surface of the MCB Office card For more information see Connecting to the Network without an NTU Office Card page 11 21 LAN and WAN packets are directed from ports 1 8 and potentially from the WAN port as well through the UGW internal switch The packets are then directed into the MRC which converts the RTP packets into PCM streams and directs them to the Coral Figure 11 1 System ration with n Operation without a MCB Office NTU Office Card MRC PCM RTP media gt Packets ic I HDLC Controller switch Signal Processor Processor E E amp 5 D E D S 11 4 System Networking Coral IP x Office Installation Manual 3 System Operation with NTU Office Card The Coral IPx Office system enables seamless integration between the digital and IP world with or without an NTU Office card With an NTU Office card the Coral IPx Office can connect to the WAN directly from the WAN port without any additional external router See Figure 11 2 Media Stream from the Digital World to the LAN and WAN PCM streams are directed from the Coral to the MRC which converts the PCM st
328. the female connection on the first expansion cage 6 30 gt Cage Description Coral IPx Office Installation Manual The figures below show how to interconnect the IPx Office unit with IPx 500X and or 800X cages Figure 6 23 Connection between the IPx Office and 500X Female Q o First S expansion cage 2 IPx 500X 8 Ma IPx Offi EL x Ice A Female Figure 6 24 Connection Not used between the IPx Office unit and two 500X Female a Male Second expansion cage IPx 500X H500 1 cable First expansion cage IPx 500X 2 5 lt o c G x 2 x ao D 3 gt n 2 8 S 3 20 2 2 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description 6 31 Figure 6 25 Connection between the IPx Office Unit and the 800X Cage IPx Office expansion cable Female l First expansion cage IPx 800X 2 Male rear panel Px Office son Me Figure 6 26 Connection between the IPx Office Unit 500X and 800X Cages 2 Second S expansion cage IPx 800X M Male c rear panel Male
329. the one contained in the list the DTD identifies the tone and reports the tone type via the peripheral bus to the a S 5 8 9 Q E S 5 system processor Shared Service Cards 29 49 2 Database Programming The DTD requires the appropriate definitions in the database Consult the Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual for instructions on the database programming required The following parameters must be set to enable DTD Sizes TAB Route SYSGEN RESOURCES URC Configuration Route CDB 11 1 DTD Defines the maximum number of Dial Tone Detector DTD resources to be enabled by the system URC cards Each DTD circuit requires 1 card time slot URC Card Database Route CDB 11 2 DTD GAIN The gain may be adjusted in this branch and not in the Feature Control branch as with other cards When the DTD exists and is initialized the PI shows Card List Route CLIS Card type see Table 9 3 on page 9 7 must show RMI F or MR in the P_TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 6 URC2 in the P TYPE field of Shelf 1 Slot 7 Port List Route PLIS 0 Port type must show DTD in the TYPE field of Shelf 0 Slot 7 Ckt 112 143 max See Table 9 18 URC Dial Tone Detector DTD PI Configuration page 9 32 Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 6 System Port List for more details S a S 8 S Q E S 3 9 50 Coral IPx Offi
330. thorization Unit nens 2 12 Assembling the WiFi Antennas 2 12 Mounting Table ian ce odes lan ctae dto dete rali 2 13 Mounting Rack Units ie a cede ke eee eee o dne erue va e Ah 2 14 Preparing the Unit for Mounting onto the 2 14 Preparing the Rack for Unit MOUnting i 2 14 Mounting the Unit onto the Rack U u nennen 2 14 Dismounting the IPx Office Unit from the Rack i 2 16 Gro nd Witings ixi tit etti Eee cte 2 18 Connecting the Ground Wire to the Unit eee 2 19 Grounding the MDF Unit 2 2 2 ani 2 20 Strapping the Configuration 2 23 Peripheral Card Installation 2 24 Inserting a Coral Peripheral Card i 2 24 Interconnecting the IPx Office and the Expansion 2 33 Interconnecting the IPx Office Unit and the Expansion 2 33 Interconnecting the 1st Expansion cage and 2nd Expansion Cage 2 33 Defining Expansion Cage NumbersS i 2 33 Installing the DC Power 5 iii 2 34 Connecting the Power Wires 2 35 AC Powered Systems 2 35 DC Powered Systems m ede Led Une tee eere 2 36 2 3 Program Interface Device Connection
331. tion Install control cards as described below m Installing the MRC page 8 29 Installing the IMC8 16 page 8 34 m Installing the DBM X page 8 43 Do not attach a control card to any connector other than the one designated Irreparable damage may occur to a control card that is attached to the wrong connector if power is applied n 5 w 8 4 Common Control Cards Coral IPx Office Installation Manual MCB Office Card Main Control Board 1 General Information This section describes the features and functions of the MCB Office main control card The MCB Office card is the control processor card for Coral IPx Office systems The MCB Office includes the following embedded circuits m Main Control Processor MCP which is a separate card in other Coral products MCP card m Universal GateWay UGW embedded circuitry which is part of a separate card in other Coral products known as the UGW Universal GateWay card m Group Controller GC embedded circuitry which is part of a separate card in other Coral products 4GC or 30GC for example The MCB Office contains multi pin connectors and support circuitry for the addition of DBM X and MRC baby cards and a hard disk that will be available for future system versions 3 Card Components The MCB Office includes components that are part of the MCP the UGW or GC Main control processor including a the MCP CPU processor the RS 232 con
332. tion The Coral IPx Office can be expanded using an additional expansion unit Up to two expansion units combination of IPx 500X and IPx 800X can be connected to one IPx Office unit The IPx 800X expansion cage uses standard Coral FlexiCom 300 400 5000 6000 and Coral IPx 800 3000 4000 peripheral cards The IPx 500X expansion cage uses the special form factor XXXipx cards The IPx Office operates from a standard wide input 100 240VAC 47 63Hz or from a 48VDC source VolP m G 168 line echo cancellation m Gain control m Voice codec G 711A u law G 726 G 723 1 G 729 A B VAD CNG m Tone generation and detection DTMF Dial Busy Ring back call process Protocol support SIP MGCP RTP RTCP Only the SIP will be implemented at this stage The other protocols will be implemented in future versions uS o E w 3 lt Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Introduction 1 7 E S o D S 5 5 lt 1 8 Introduction Circuitry The Coral IPx Office includes digital communications switching based on Pulse Code Modulation PCM switching technology The active circuitry of the system is contained on the MCB Office card and removable cards The active circuitry of the IPx Office system is divided into two major functions common control and peripheral The common control circuitry directs call traffic through the system establishing audio connections
333. tion describes the IPx Office unit components Upon completing this section you will be familiar with unit components The actual instructions for installing the unit are found in Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Procedure The IPx Office system is housed in a rack mounted or table mounted unit and can be expanded by adding additional IPx 500 or IPx 800 expansion cages Each system consists of one main unit that contains the common control cards and peripheral cards as well as one or two optional expansion cages The main unit is equipped with peripheral card slots Expansion cages are equipped with additional peripheral card slots 1 Unit Exterior The IPx Office unit is designed to provide a simple reliable method for installing and removing the printed circuit cards and assemblies that contain the active circuitry of the system The IPx Office unit is housed in a case that Includes networking and peripheral cards a slot for the power supply unit three DC fan units holes on the side panels for forced ventilation eight ports for connection to the LAN one port for connection to the WAN one printer connection the UGW port the KB0 port system and NTU Office card reset buttons flash and compact flash cards and a decorative cover that can be easily removed The entire unit is 2U 3 5in or 8 9cm in height The IPx Office is a versatile unit that can be mounted onto either a 19 or a 23 rack or a table located at the customer s site The
334. tion instructions refer to Hardware Installation Procedure page 2 1 FN NOTE E This chapter describes connections between the Coral IPx Office unit and the customer supplied MDF Some of these connections can be made directly from the Coral IPx Office unit and the facilities infrastructure without the use of an MDF It is the customer s responsibility to decide when to do so For information on connections between the IPx 500X expansion cage and the MDF see the Coral IPX 500 Installation Procedure and Hardware Manual For information on the Coral IPx 800X expansion cage and the MDF see the Coral IPx 800 Installation Procedure and Hardware Manual The MDF is often located adjacent to other signaling systems such as m Paging and public address systems m Voice messaging systems m Alarm and monitoring systems m Closed circuit television m Property management systems Building and energy management systems Y 5 E E E E 3 amp amp Ss External Connections 5 1 Therefore care should be taken to plan the MDF layout before fastening components to the rack or table mounted surface such as m Network LAN WAN Connection m Trunk circuits m Wired and wireless station equipment Database programming terminals m Report printers m Music and or audio sources m External public address or paging equipment m Recording devices Connections to most telecommunications interfaces of th
335. to DC converter to produce the 5VDC and 3 3VDC operating voltages for the Coral IPx Office internal circuitry All outputs are regulated Two internal fuses protect the PS Office AC circuitry from current overload Figure 7 4 displays a block diagram of the PS Office AC power supply DC Output Power The PS Office AC includes one AC DC converter and one switch mode DC DC converter that converts 100 240VAC 47 63Hz input power to m 5VDC m 3 3VVDC m 48VDC Normal Operation The AC input passes through the AC input fuse FS1 via an RFI filter into the AC to DC converter circuit The converter circuit produces an output of 48VDC The 48VDC is fed via the intermodule fuse F2 into the DC DC converter This circuit produces 5VDC and 3 3VDC Figure 74 PS Office AC Block Diagram 7 4 dPower Supply On off AC Input fuse switch 5A 250V S B 48VDC LED Indicator on circuit board 100 240VAC DC Input fuse 47 63Hz FZO SA 250V S B GND 3 3VDC 5VDC Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Disconnecting the AC Power from the AC Power Mains Disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC power mains will cause normal operation to discontinue However the best way to disable the output voltages 15 by turning OFF the power switch Turning the Power Switch OFF Turning the power switch OFF allows you to shut down all power to the Coral IPx Office system It is used for maintenance purposes Monitorin
336. tors These slots are designated slot 2 3 slot 4 5 slot 6 7 slot 8 9 and slot 10 11 because the Program Interface PI recognizes each physical slot as two separate slots for the purpose of system programming Power Supply Unit The IPx Office includes one AC or DC PS Office power supply unit located on the left side of the cage The power supply unit is attached to the unit with two screws that ensure that the unit is grounded These power supply units are described in detail in Chapter 7 Power Supply Coral IP x Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards The IPx Office unit includes five peripheral card slots in the rear section These card types are described in Chapter 10 Peripheral Cards and in greater detail in the Coral Service and Peripheral Card Manual Configuration J umpers The jumpers of the IPx Office unit that are configured at the customer s site are located in the peripheral cards For further information see The Service and Peripheral Card Installation Manual 10 Connectors Every peripheral card includes an I O connector to interface with the MDF The I O connections for each peripheral card slot are provided directly from the front panel of the card to the MDF The I O connectors are either Champ or RJ 45 m Champ connectors include female 25 pair AMP Champ or Amphenol Microribbon type connectors that appear on the front panel of many peripheral cards for example 8SLS Office 16SFT Office e
337. uch lower arc levels than direct current DC operated loads If the contact must operate a DC powered inductive load the contact must be adequately protected by arc suppression devices Figure 9 36 illustrates the use of a common rectifier diode as a simple arc suppression device The diode is normally reverse biased not conducting with the cathode top side in the drawing connected to the positive side of the power source Figure 9 36 DC Arc Suppression for U RMI U MR RMI MR Office Card Relays Relay Contacts LATH Galina SAH Coral IPx Office Spike Suppression Diode U RMI Office RLY3 contacts 1 2 when P4 is connected between legs 2 3 3 4 when P4 is connected between legs 3 4 When the inductive load is powered a magnetic field is created around the coil windings When power is removed the magnetic field quickly deteriorates producing a reverse polarity voltage counter EMF across the windings This reverse polarity voltage is typically many times the voltage which originally powered the coil providing enough potential to arc across the open relay contacts By placing the diode in the circuit the reverse polarity current is conducted by the diode shunting the energy around the contacts A rectifier rated at 1 0 ampere forward current 1 0A Ip and a peak inverse reverse voltage of at least 250 volts 250V PIV or should be sufficient in most cases
338. uirements aisi see lac Eee Hx de o 2 2 Electrical Requirements 2 5 General Requirements 2 5 DC Electrical Requirements i 2 5 2 2 Equipment Installation 2 7 2 7 Unpacking the Shipping Container nens 2 8 Preparing the Unit for Installation sss 2 10 Checking the Space and Positioning 2 10 Checking the Electrical Requirements eene ener 2 10 METRE 2 10 Installing the Control and NTU Office 2 11 Opening the Unit GOWVel u poste ce 2 11 Installing the Main Resources Card sse 2 11 Installing the DBM X Card i 2 11 Installing the NTU Office Card ii 2 11 Installing the Internal LAN Cable i 2 11 Installing the WiFi Card and Antenna nnne 2 11 Removing the Battery Insulator 2 11 Closing the Unit COVer ie ree iaia et Ez idea 2 11 Installing the External Components iii 2 12 Installing the IMC 8 or IMC 16 Flash 2 12 Installing the Compact Flash Disk n nennen nenne 2 12 Installing the Software Au
339. uit wiring from building entrance to the Coral IPx Office system Figure 5 3 Typical Trunk Circuit Wiring Diagram IPx Office System 2 RJ 45 ermina Connector RJ 21X or Similar Interface Bridging CORAL I O Block Network Interface Surge Protector Circuit Feed Block TELCO Demarcation Lightning amp Ground 5 S gt Rj External Connections 5 9 1 Auxiliary Connections Table 5 3 lists the auxiliary connectors located on the peripheral cards and their functions Table 5 8 Auxiliary Connectors Card Connector Type Remarks U RMI Office Relays Terminal Block See Configuring the Relay Contacts U MR Office Jumper 9101 for relays definition RMI Office MR Office 1 Music 3 5 Stereo See External Connectors page 917 Phone Jack for details M2 P Music Page ESIM Office Expansion The 50 pin Used with Coral IPx 500X 800X angled SCSI Expansion Unit only connector D E 5 5 Saj D 5 10 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Protection Devices 9 1 Introduction to Primary and Secondary Protection Devices Any circuit connected to the Coral system that is exposed to lightning or electrical hazards must be protected with approved lightning and surge protection devices to avoid potentially lethal hazards to all users Secondary protection devi
340. unit is supplied with mounting brackets and fasteners exhaust fans and a top cover with ventilation holes The IPx Office includes an installation kit that includes components for mounting the cage onto a table and onto a rack Figure 6 1 displays the IPx Office cage mounted onto a table Figure 6 2 displays the rack configuration for the IPx Office cage mounted onto a 19 rack including the front and rear rack mounting brackets Instructions for mounting the cage onto the rack can be found on Mounting Rack Units page 2 14 S n Q S 5 ta 2 un S Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description 6 1 Figure 6 1 Front View of the Table Mounted IPx Rear side Office Unit Side panel Exhaust fans Front panel Side panel Figure 6 2 Front View of the Rack Mounted IPx Office Unit S S 5 o a So E 5 D S S 9 6 2 gt Description Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Front Panel The front panel includes eight diagnostic LED indicators a slot for a memory card a compact FLASH disk a KBO port a UGW port eight LAN ports one WAN port one printer server port two openings for the reset buttons and two holes for mounting the optional WiFi antennas Figure 6 3 displays the front panel of the IPx Office unit Table 6 1 displays the Figure 6 3 Front Panel Diagnostic Holes for WiFi LED indicato
341. val the following message appears Operation denied Load DBS available only to DBO DEF Press Y to begin loading the database or press N to return to the Database menu Loading the database from a file generally takes several minutes When the database has been loaded the system performs a partial initialization and begins processing calls Software Installation Procedure 4 9 ta o D n S 5 S S Q 3 2 4 Show File Information This option displays the list of backed up files stored on the IMC8 card From the Database Flash menu press 2 to display the list of backed up files The following prompt appears Execute Y N N Type Y A report appears with the following columns File Name Displays a list of the DBO DEF and DBI DEF files If only one file is present DBO DEF will appear Version File version Last Date Last backup date Last Time Last backup time File Status OK the backed up file is valid Invalid the backed up file is invalid 5 5 YV S lt 5 Q S DS 2 4 10 Software Installation Procedure Coral IPx Office Installation Manual 5 Automatic Daily Backup The system configuration database can be automatically saved to a database file on the IMC8 at a preset time each day Use AutoBackup to automatically save the database During automatic daily backup the database is saved to DBO DEF 1 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Fr
342. whether the conference participants will be notified when a member joins or leaves the conversation Refer to Chapter 23 Conference in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details Class of Service Route COS 0 CONF CONF RELEASE CONF LOCK Feature Timers Route FE T This branch may be used to determine time intervals for multi party conference call features The related parameters are CONF SUPV RECALL GRP CALL RING Refer to Chapter 6 System Features in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details Group Calls Route CALL This branch may be used to assign various multi party conference call features Refer to Chapter 10 Groups in the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details Feature Timers Route FE T CALL RING Shared Service Cards 29 41 E 5 E Q E S oO v 3 gt 5 oO S oO S Ax Gains Table Route 0 1 3 Entry 12 of the gains table can be used to set gain parameters to the conference For more information see Chapter 19 in the Program Interface PI and Database Reference manual Feature Authorization Route FEAT 1 m URC CONF m CONF Separate Software Authorization 1s required to allocate the URC resources Refer to Program Interface PI and Database Reference Manual Chapter 3 Feature Authorization for more details Sizes Route SIZ CONF CKTS pa
343. x Office Unit IPx Office and IPx 500 cages are interconnected with a IPx Office expansion cable For systems that include one IPx 500X cage and one IPx 800X cage always connect the IPx 500X cage directly to the IPx Office unit If an IPx 800X cage is installed between the IPx Office unit and an IPx 500X cage a PX card will have to be installed in slot 1 of the IPx 800X cage This slot could otherwise be used for a service card Related Documentation m Coral IPx 500 Hardware and Installation Manual m Coral FlexiCom and IPx Product Description R el 5 S 3 O 2 22 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Cage Description gt 6 37 gt E 5 8 E 3 20 5 o S 5 n 5 Optional Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage 6 38 gt Cage Description General The Coral IPx 800X expansion cage is a small rack mounted extension to the IPx Office IPx 800M or Coral IPx 500M cage It supports any of the FlexiCom 300 400 5000 6000 and IPx 800 3000 4000 family standard shared service and peripheral cards 1DSP 8DRCF 24SLS 24SFT 30T etc Any combination of up to two IPx 500X and IPx 800X expansion cages can be connected to one IPx Office unit The key features of the IPx 800X cage capacity and functions are described below Card Slots One IPx 800X cage can hold up to twelve cards Slot 2 through slot 12 are universal s
344. ystems The UGW circuitry includes the UGW processor the connection to the MRC card the UGW COM port the LAN ports WAN port and printer port For further information see Internet P rotocol Gateway page 8 9 m The Group Controller GC contains the High Level Data Link Control HDLC bus interface circuitry Pulse Code Modulation PCM bus interface circuitry clock circuitry to synchronize the peripheral section of the system and digital tone generators dial busy ringing ringback DTMF and test Additionally the group controller contains circuitry to synchronize the Coral peripheral clock to an external clock derived from a digital trunk a E 5 5 5 interface circuitry functions in similar manner to the 4GC and 30GC cards in other Coral systems For further information see Group Controller Circuit page 8 10 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Common Control Cards 28 1 n 5 w 8 2 Common Control Cards The MCB Office is permanently installed onto the inner surface of the front section of the IPx Office unit and is not removed in the field It interfaces with the system via the backplane connector on the MBP Office Main BackPlane card and is powered via the power supply connector Because the MCB Office integrates several embedded circuits that were previously part of separate cards in earlier systems it also includes additional components
345. zation signals in the Coral IPx Office main unit UDT Office PRI 23 or T1 30T Office PRI 30 Office and 4TBR Office The following digital trunk cards can retrieve synchronization signals in the Coral IPx 500X expansion cages UDTipx PRI 23 or T1 30Tipx PRI 23ipx PRI 30ipx ATBRipx and 8TBRipx More Coral FlexiCom 300 400 5000 6000 and IPx 800 3000 4000 digital trunk cards UDT 30T PRI 23 PRI 30 4TBR 8TBR are available for synchronization purposes through the Coral IPx 800X expansion cages 5 5 3 EN E 5 E a X 5 E Q Coral IPx Office Installation Manual Peripheral Cards 10 9 M E 5 50 Q 10 10 2 Synchronization Slots in the Main and Expansion Cages Peripheral Cards Two slots located in the Coral IPx Office main unit are set to accept the digital trunk cards slot 8 9 and slot 10 11 Each card can be installed into either slot See Figure 10 3 below Synchronization Slot Selection Any combination of primary and secondary synchronization sources either in the main unit or in the expansion cage is valid The hardware selection between the Coral IPx Office unit and the expansion cages synchronization slots is determined by m In the Coral IPx Office main unit jumper settings on the ESIM Office and on the digital trunk cards m the expansion cages jumper settings on the backplane card In addition
346. zed as such by the PI only Refer to the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual Chapter 6 Card List for further details Shared Service Cards 29 5 5 2 3 n D Re S D n 5 S St er 5 2 Layout and Installation The MRC card includes two connectors that connect to connectors 14 and J7 on the MCB Office For more information about various aspects of the card refer to Section 8 MRC Card on page 8 27 Figure 9 1 Card L Layout ower view Upper view 00 726v vC L ON1VO E 3 gt D x 5 S D a 3 S 5 N m M 9 6 Coral IPx Office Installation Manual U RMI U MR MR Office Cards Figure 9 3 through Figure 9 6 starting on page 9 1 1 display the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office card circuit layout The main shared service functions of these cards are described in Table 9 4 Figure 9 2 displays the U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office architecture Card Location The U RMI Office U MR Office RMI Office and MR Office cards may be installed only in peripheral slot 6 7 Database Programming Card List Route CLIS Optional card names shown in the P TYPE field of the Card List branch Route CLIS include MR RMI F and URC2 depending on which components are actually installed Refer to Table 9 3 Table 9

Coral IPx Office Installation and Hardware Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents